JP2024091856A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine capable of suitably detecting fraudulent activities. [Solution] The gaming machine includes a storage means for storing information on a plurality of pieces of game performance information showing the performance of a game executed in the gaming machine, an output means for outputting information on the game performance information based on the information stored in the storage means, a specific judgment means for judging whether or not the judgment is a specific result when the judgment is not a predetermined result, an opening means for opening one of the normally closed winning ports for a predetermined time without awarding a predetermined game value when the judgment means judges that the judgment is a specific result, a change means for changing the probability of a specific result in a predetermined judgment among a plurality of levels, and a storage control means for erasing the information stored in the storage means when the probability is changed by the change means. [Selected Figure] Fig. 52

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which gaming media are shot by a shooting means into a gaming area provided with multiple winning slots, and when the gaming media enters one of the winning slots, a predetermined number of gaming media is paid out to the player for the winning slot. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-340046 A

There are people who cheat in these types of games. However, there have been insufficient measures to curb such cheating.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively suppress fraudulent activities.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in claim 1 comprises a game area provided with a plurality of winning slots, a launching means for launching gaming media into the game area, a winning detection means provided for each winning slot and detecting the winning of the gaming medium into the corresponding winning slot, and a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of gaming media to the winning slot into which the gaming medium has won when the winning detection means detects that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won any of the winning slots, and makes a predetermined judgment when a starting condition is met, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player, and the performance of the game executed on the gaming machine is The game machine includes a storage means for storing information about a plurality of pieces of game performance information indicated by the game, an output means for outputting information about the game performance information based on the information stored in the storage means, a specific judgment means for judging whether the judgment is a specific result when the judgment is not a predetermined result, an opening means for not awarding the predetermined game value and opening one prize opening that is normally closed for a predetermined time when the specific judgment means judges that the judgment is the specific result, a change means for changing the probability of the specific result being obtained in the predetermined judgment among a plurality of levels, and a storage control means for erasing the information stored in the storage means when the probability is changed by the change means.

The gaming machine described in claim 2 is the gaming machine described in claim 1, in which the gaming performance information is a base value.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, a launching means launches gaming media into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning slots. Each winning slot is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the gaming media. When the winning detection means detects that the gaming media launched by the launching means has won one of the winning slots, a predetermined number of gaming media are paid out by the payout means to the winning slot in which the gaming media won. Information on a plurality of gaming performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is stored in the storage means and output by the output means. This has the effect of making it possible to preferably discover fraudulent acts from the information on the gaming performance information output by the output means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined judgment when a starting condition is met, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player, and if the judgment is not a predetermined result, the specific judgment means judges whether the judgment is a specific result or not. If the determination means determines that the judgment is a specific result, a specified gaming value is not awarded, and one winning port that is normally closed is opened by the opening means for a specified time. If a gaming medium enters this opened winning port, the gaming medium is paid out by the payout means. In addition, the probability of a specific result being obtained in a specified judgment is changed among a plurality of levels by the change means. Then, when the change means changes the probability, the information stored in the storage means is erased by the storage control means. Therefore, the information regarding the gaming performance information is stored in the storage means at the newly set probability, which has the effect of allowing accurate gaming performance information to be output.

According to the gaming machine described in claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in claim 1, since the gaming performance information is a base value, the information on the base value is stored in the storage means at a newly set probability, so that there is an effect that a highly accurate base value can be output.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of area division settings and effective line settings on a display screen, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. This is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of various counters, reserved ball storage area, and reserved ball execution area. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic example of a jackpot random number table, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic example of a jackpot type table, (c) is a diagram showing a schematic example of a jackpot fluctuation pattern table when the number of reserved balls is 2, (d) is a diagram showing a schematic example of a miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table when the number of reserved balls is 2, and (e) is a diagram showing a schematic example of a miss (high probability) fluctuation pattern table when the number of reserved balls is 2. A diagram showing a schematic example of a prize ball number table. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a switch reading process executed by an MPU in the main control device. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing a variation process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing for controlling the ratio of reels executed by the reel ratio management chip in the main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing a part of the setting information receiving process executed by the role ratio management chip in the main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing a part of the setting information receiving process executed by the role ratio management chip in the main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel ratio calculation process executed by the reel ratio management chip in the main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the inspection result output process executed by the role ratio management chip in the main control unit. 11 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the variable display processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device. (a) is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (c) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a main control device in a second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the winning information storage process executed by the bonus ratio management chip in the main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the inspection result output process executed by the role ratio management chip in the main control unit. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a third embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the role ratio processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing of role ratios executed by the MPU in the main control device. A flowchart showing role ratio processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing of role ratios executed by the MPU in the main control device. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a fifth embodiment. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram showing a base display device, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram showing display contents on the base display device. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the information necessary to display the base value, which is stored in the external working area of the RAM in the MPU of the main control unit, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of each base value data. 5 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a base value process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a base value calculation process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a part of a base value display process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the remaining part of the base value display process executed by the MPU in the main control device. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the pachinko machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 4A is a front view of the setting key showing the setting key in an OFF state, and FIG. 4B is a front view of the setting key showing the setting key in an ON state. This figure shows the start-up modes of a pachinko machine and the states of the RAM erase switch, setting key, and door open switch when the power to the pachinko machine is turned on to start up in each start-up mode. 1A is a diagram showing the roles of the RAM erase switch and the setting key in the setting change mode, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the role of the setting key in the setting confirmation mode. 5A to 5C are schematic diagrams showing various examples of the display contents of the base display device in a setting change mode and a setting confirmation mode. 5A to 5C are schematic diagrams showing various examples of display contents when the error history is displayed on the base display device. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of the LEDs of the first pattern display device, and (b) is a diagram showing the lighting pattern of the round number indication LED when indicating that the maximum number of rounds is 2, when indicating that the maximum number of rounds is 15, when indicating that the setting is being changed, and when indicating that the setting is being confirmed. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. 2 is a schematic diagram showing data stored in an external work area of a RAM in the MPU of the main control device; FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a base display process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 23 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by the MPU in the main control device of the pachinko machine in the seventh embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, a first embodiment of the present invention applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described with reference to Figs. 1 to 26. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having numerous nails and winning holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a, etc. is attached to the inner frame 12 so that it can be detached from the back side. A pinball game is played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is also fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the top and bottom of the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front side with the side where the hinges 19 are provided as the axis of opening and closing. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a door opening switch 208g (see FIG. 6) that detects when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is unlocked and opened (the door is opened).

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at approximately the center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls that juts out forward and is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a. In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the top surface of the upper tray 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described below. The frame button 22 is also used as an operation button that allows the player to select the performance content in the so-called super reach, which is one type of variable performance.

The variable effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and as described below, is executed when a ball shot into the front area of the game board 13 enters a specific winning hole (second starting hole 64b described below; see Figure 2) (starting winning). After the pattern (third pattern described below) is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, the player is presented with the result of a lottery (whether it is a jackpot or not) held for that starting winning, based on the combination of patterns that are displayed in a stopped state.

A stage is a presentation mode that provides uniformity to the various presentations displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and this pachinko machine 10 has three stages: the "town stage," the "sky stage," and the "island stage." Various presentations, such as the above-mentioned variable presentations and the reach presentations that are executed during the variable presentations, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

The stage changes when the player presses the frame button 22 during a period when no change performance is taking place, or during a high-speed change in which the third symbol is displayed changing at high speed and cannot be seen by the player. Each time the frame button 22 is pressed, the stage is changed repeatedly in the following order: "town stage" → "empty stage" → "island stage" → "town stage" → ... In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

In addition, when a normal reach presentation is started in the variable presentation performed by the third pattern display device 81, when the normal reach develops into a super reach, a selection screen for the presentation mode of the super reach is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during the normal reach.

On the selection screen, multiple presentation mode candidates that can be selected as the presentation mode of the Super Reach are displayed, and one of the presentation mode candidates is selected. If the player presses the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the selected presentation mode candidate is changed. Then, the presentation mode of the Super Reach is determined based on the presentation mode candidate that was selected when the Super Reach developed, and the Super Reach is executed on the third pattern display device 81 according to that presentation mode.

In this embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, it may be configured as an operation lever that can be tilted by the player in a predetermined direction relative to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, forward, backward, right, or left relative to the pachinko machine 10). Then, based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted, the performance stage may be selected or the performance mode of the super reach may be selected.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks due to the built-in LEDs lighting up or blinking, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that the player is in the reach just before a jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs and capable of indicating when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred is provided at the upper left of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see Figure 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 to create a more dazzling appearance.

The ball lending operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit.

In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in the center, which is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is arranged, which is operated by the player to shoot balls into the front of the game board 13. Inside the operating handle 51, there is built-in a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a push-button type shooting stop switch 51b that stops the shooting of balls while it is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance.

When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes according to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, thereby shooting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. The interval between ball launches from the ball launching unit 112a is set to approximately 0.6 seconds. Furthermore, when the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the shot stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

2, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails, windmills and rails 61, 62 for guiding balls, the first normal winning opening 63a, the second normal winning opening 63b, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc., on a wooden base board 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The first normal winning opening 63a, the second normal winning opening 63b, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base board 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. In addition, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Below, the configuration of the game board 13 will be explained, mainly with reference to Figure 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and outer rail 62 surround the front periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area on the front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an approximately circular area (an area where winning holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) on the front of the game board 13, partitioned by the two rails 61, 62 and the arc member 70.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2), which prevents the ball once guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back to the center while reducing its force. In addition, between the tip of the lower right side of the inner rail 61 and the tip of the upper right side of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed with an arc on the inner side connecting the rails is driven into the base plate 60 and fixed.

At the upper right side of the play area when viewed from the front (upper right side of Figure 2), a first symbol display device 37 is provided, which is equipped with a number of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LEDs") 37a, which serve as light emitting means, and a seven-segment display 37b. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to the various controls performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the play status of the pachinko machine 10.

The LEDs 37a indicate the change display that is performed when a ball enters either the first start hole 64a or the second start hole 64b (start winning) by the lighting state of the LEDs 37a, and indicate the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start winning as the stopping pattern after the change display ends by the lighting state of the LEDs 37a, and indicate the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have entered the first start hole 64a or the second start hole 64b but have not yet been changed (reserved balls), by the lighting state of the LEDs 37a. The seven-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors. The LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED has a different light color (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b, a jackpot determination is made as to whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, the type of jackpot is also determined. The types of jackpots that can be determined here include a 15R special jackpot, a 2R special jackpot, and a 15R regular jackpot.

The LED 37a not only indicates whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or not as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation that occurs when the ball enters the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b, but also indicates a pattern according to the type of jackpot if a jackpot is found.

Here, a "15R special jackpot" refers to a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "2R special jackpot" refers to a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2. A "15R normal jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and is in a time-saving state for a specified number of fluctuations (e.g., 100 fluctuations).

The "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot increases as an added value after the end of a jackpot, that is, when the probability is fluctuating (during a high probability state), in other words, a gaming state in which it is easy to transition to a special gaming state (jackpot). In this embodiment, the high probability state (during a high probability state) includes a gaming state in which the probability of hitting the second symbol described below increases and it is easy for the ball to enter the second starting hole 64b.

On the other hand, the "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not in a special state, and refers to a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is normal, that is, the probability of winning a jackpot is lower than when the probability of winning a jackpot is in a special state. Also, the time-saving state (during time-saving state) within the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is normal, and the probability of winning a jackpot remains the same, but only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, making it easier for the ball to enter the second starting hole 64b.

In addition, instead of changing the probability of winning the second symbol, the time for which the electric role associated with the second start hole 64b is opened or the number of times the electric role is opened with one win with the second symbol may be changed according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, in the time-saving state, the time for which the electric role associated with the second start hole 64b is opened may be made longer than in a state other than the time-saving state, or the number of times the electric role is opened with one win may be made more than in a state other than the time-saving state. Also, in the time-saving state, at least two of the following may be performed simultaneously: increasing the probability of winning the second symbol, lengthening the time for which the electric role is opened, and increasing the number of times the electric role is opened.

The first normal winning hole 63a is located on the lower left side of the play area, and the second normal winning hole 63b is located on the lower right side of the play area. When a ball enters the first normal winning hole 63a, the first normal winning hole switch 208c (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the play board 13 is turned on, and eight balls are paid out as prize balls due to the first normal winning hole switch 208c being turned on. When a ball enters the second normal winning hole 63b, the second normal winning hole switch 208d (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the play board 13 is turned on, and eight balls are paid out as prize balls due to the second normal winning hole switch 208d being turned on. It should be noted that the number of winning balls when a ball enters the first normal winning opening 63a does not necessarily have to be the same as the number of winning balls when a ball enters the second normal winning opening 63b; for example, the former may be 6 balls and the latter 8 balls, etc.

A variable display unit 80 is provided in the center of the play area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display unit 81 and a second pattern display unit 83. The third pattern display unit 81 is configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display unit") that performs a variable display (variable performance) of the third pattern in synchronization with the variable display in the first pattern display unit 37, triggered by a ball entering either the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b (start winning). The second pattern display unit 83 is provided with a second pattern display unit 83 that is configured with an LED that displays a variable display of the second pattern in response to the ball passing through the through gate 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display unit 81.

The third pattern display device 81 is configured with a large liquid crystal display, for example, 8 inches in size, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see Figure 5) described later, so that, for example, three rows of patterns, left, center, and right, are displayed.

Each symbol row is made up of multiple symbols, and these symbols are scrolled vertically for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, the game status is displayed in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 by the first symbol display device 37, while a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed by the third symbol display device 81. Note that instead of a display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be explained with reference to Figure 4. Figure 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, where Figure 4(a) is a diagram that shows a schematic diagram of the area division settings and the effective line settings of the display screen, and Figure 4(b) is a diagram that shows an example of the actual display screen.

The third design is made up of 10 main designs numbered "0" to "9". Each main design is made up of a rear design of a wooden box with the numbers "0" to "9" added above it, and the main designs with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) have large numbers added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. In contrast, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have additional designs imitating characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets added to almost the entire front of the wooden box, and even numbers are added in small green to the lower right of the additional designs so that they are displayed in front of the additional designs.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the result of the lottery by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display (variable presentation) is performed in which the same main symbols are lined up on the effective line L1, and the jackpot occurs after the variable display ends. If a transition to a high probability state (high probability state) occurs after the jackpot ends, a variable display is performed in which main symbols with odd numbers (corresponding to "high probability symbols") are lined up on the effective line L1. On the other hand, if a transition to a low probability state occurs after the jackpot ends, a variable display is performed in which main symbols with even numbers (corresponding to "low probability symbols") are lined up on the effective line L1.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two parts, top and bottom, with the bottom 2/3 being the main display area Dm that displays the third pattern (main pattern) in a variable manner (variable performance), and the remaining top 1/3 being the sub-display area Ds that displays preview performances, characters, etc. Also, in the center of the bottom base of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, there is a reserved ball count display area Db that displays the number of reserved balls.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, left, center, and right, with pattern row Z1 displayed in display area Dm1, pattern row Z2 displayed in display area Dm2, and pattern row Z3 displayed in display area Dm3.

In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a specified order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and the display changes by scrolling from top to bottom periodically for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the center symbol row Z2 and right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

In addition, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three rows, top, middle, and bottom, for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle section of this main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and with each variable performance, the third symbols are stopped and displayed on the active line L1 in the order of left symbol column Z1 → right symbol column Z3 → center symbol column Z2. If the third symbols stop on the active line L1 to form a jackpot symbol combination (a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

The sub-display area Ds is horizontally elongated and positioned above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three equal small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 is an area for displaying characters and preview images. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a sense of anticipation that a jackpot will result from the variable display performed in the main display area Dm. The number of reserved balls display area Db is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have entered the first start hole 64a and the second start hole 64b and for which the variable display (variable display) has not yet been performed.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a total of nine main symbols of the third design are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, videos are displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is easier to transition to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action other than the predetermined action, the boy's hair, which is usually black, or the color of his headband, which is usually white, changes, or another character appears, providing a preview performance.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b while a variable performance (variable display) is being performed by the third pattern display device 81 (first pattern display device 37), the number of balls that enter is reserved up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and is also displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db. In the reserved ball number display area Db, one reserved ball number pattern (a "●" pattern) is displayed for each reserved ball, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed.

In other words, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is four. Also, when no reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is zero, that is, there are no reserved balls.

In this embodiment, the balls entering the first starting hole 64a and the second starting hole 64b are configured to be reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times in total, and may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved ball number pattern in the reserved ball number display area Db, the reserved ball number may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as a number, or the four divided areas may be displayed in a different manner (e.g., color or lighting pattern) according to the number of reserved balls. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37, the third pattern display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four reserved lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, the number being the maximum number of reserved balls, and the number of reserved balls may be displayed according to the number of reserved lamps that are lit.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will continue. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by alternately lighting a "circle" and an "x" as a display symbol (second symbol) each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a "circle"), the electric device provided in the second starting hole 64b is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The number of times that a ball passes through the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first pattern display device 37 and is also displayed by lighting the second pattern reservation lamp 84. There are four second pattern reservation lamps 84, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the number of lit second pattern reservation lamps 84.

The second pattern change display may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device 83 as in this embodiment, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37 or the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, instead of turning on the second pattern reserved lamp 84, the second pattern change display may be performed by a part of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, as in the second starting port 64b, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37, the second pattern reserved lamp 84 may not be lit.

The first starting hole 64a is disposed below the variable display unit 80, and the second starting hole 64b is disposed below the first starting hole 64a. The first starting hole 64a has an opening facing upwards through which a ball can enter. The opening of the first starting hole 64a is always open and is in a state in which a ball can enter. When a ball enters the first starting hole 64a, the first starting hole switch 208a (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the first starting hole switch 208a is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5), and a display according to the lottery result is displayed by the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37, and a variable performance of the third pattern is executed by the third pattern display device 81. The first starting hole 64a is also one of the winning holes from which three balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters it.

On the other hand, the second starting hole 64b is provided with an electric device having two blades that cover the opening through which the ball enters the second starting hole 64b. The electric device opens and closes the two blades to open (expand) or close (shrink) the second starting hole 64b. Normally, the second starting hole 64b is in a closed state with the blades of the electric device closed (standing upwards), making it impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the second starting hole 64b.

When the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 stops at the "○" pattern, the electric device in the second starting hole 64b is operated for a predetermined time. While the electric device is being operated, the blades of the electric device move from an upwardly raised state to an approximately V-shaped (inverted V-shape), and the second starting hole 64b is in an open state. When the second starting hole 64b is in an open state, the ball can enter the second starting hole 64b, or the ball can enter more easily than in a closed state. In other words, when the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 stops at the "○" pattern, which is a win, and the second starting hole 64b is in an open state, the ball can enter the second starting hole 64b, allowing for more jackpot draws to be held.

When a ball enters the second starting hole 64b, the second starting hole switch 208b (not shown) located on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the second starting hole switch 208b is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37, and a variable performance of the third pattern is executed by the third pattern display device 81. The second starting hole 64b is also one of the winning holes from which two balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters it.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the second starting hole 64b, and a horizontally long rectangular large winning hole (also called a large opening hole or a specific winning hole) 65a is disposed in the approximate center of the device. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery by the main control device 110 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on to show the jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, indicating the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the large winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

This large prize opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after that closure, the large prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this large prize opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds).

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 comprises a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the large prize winning opening 65a, and a large prize winning opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the opening/closing plate to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate. The large prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot or do not easily win. In the event of a jackpot, the large prize winning opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate downward toward the front, temporarily creating an open state in which it is easy for balls to win the large prize winning opening 65a, and the device operates to alternate between this open state and the normal closed state.

When a ball enters the large prize opening 65a, the large prize opening switch 208e (see FIG. 6) on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the number of times the large prize opening switch 208e is turned on is counted to count the number of balls that have entered the large prize opening 65a, and the closing conditions of the large prize opening 65a are determined. In addition, 12 balls are paid out as prize balls due to the large prize opening switch 208e being turned on. Then, by repeatedly opening and closing the large prize opening 65a due to a jackpot, it becomes easier for many balls to enter the large prize opening 65a, and a larger number of prize balls than usual are paid out to the player as a grant of game value (game value). This state is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A specific winning opening and a large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening may be provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to a big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37, the specific winning opening is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening is open, the ball entering the specific winning opening triggers the large opening to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, forming a special game state.

Through gates 67 are provided on the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80. Through gates 67 have vertical through holes (not shown) for the ball to pass through. When a ball is shot into the play area and passes through through gate 67, a through gate switch (not shown) provided in the through hole turns on, which causes the main control device 110 to draw a winning lottery for the second symbol (also called the normal symbol).

If the second symbol (normal symbol) is selected for the ball that passed through the through gate 67 and determined to be a winning symbol, the second symbol is displayed in a varying manner on the second symbol display device 83, and then the "○" symbol is displayed stationary, after which the electric device in the second starting hole 64b is activated. As a result, the blades of the electric device, which make it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting hole 64b, move from a substantially vertically erected state to a substantially V-shape (inverted V-shape), allowing the ball to enter the second starting hole 64b for a specified period of time, or making it easier for the ball to enter compared to the closed state.

The left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13 are provided with attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is further provided with an outlet 66. Any balls that do not enter any of the winning holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a are guided through the outlet 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). Any balls that enter the winning holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a are guided to the ball discharge path after passing through a switch for detecting balls that are provided for each winning hole. The balls guided to the ball discharge path pass through an out switch 208f (see FIG. 6) for detecting the guided balls, and are then discharged to the island equipment (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

Here, a ball shot into the game area of the pachinko machine 10 always enters one of the winning holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a or the out hole 66. Therefore, balls that enter these winning holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a and the out hole 66 are guided to the ball discharge path and always pass through the out switch 208f. Therefore, by counting the number of balls detected by the out switch 208f, the number of balls shot into the game area (the number of balls used in the game) can be grasped. In addition, the out switch 208f detects balls that have actually passed through the game area and entered one of the winning holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a or the out hole 66. In other words, balls that were shot into the game area but got stuck somewhere in the game area and were not used in the game are not detected. Therefore, by counting the number of balls detected by the out switch 208f, it is possible to prevent balls that were not used in play from being counted as balls that were shot into the play area as a result of this.

The game board 13 has many nails planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various parts (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged on it.

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main board is also provided with an inspection terminal 207a (see FIG. 5) to which an inspection device 300 can be connected, which inspects the performance of the gaming machine, such as the ratio of game features. The inspection terminal 207a is normally covered by the rear pack 92 of the rear pack unit 94, and is revealed by opening the rear pack 92. However, the rear pack 92 may be provided with an opening for the inspection terminal 207a, and the inspection terminal 207a may be exposed from the opening. When the connector of the cable connected to the inspection device 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a, the inspection device 300 can inspect the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 10, such as the ratio of game features.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 5). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 5. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the lottery for the big win, the setting of the variable display (variable presentation) on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery for the display result on the second pattern display device 83. The main processes of this pachinko machine 10 are executed by the MPU 201, and the RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

The MPU 201 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37, the second pattern display device 83, the second pattern hold lamp 84, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large prize opening solenoid for driving the large prize opening 65a to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role-playing device, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches and sensors including various switches for detecting balls that have entered each winning port and balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path through each winning port and outlet port, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply unit 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The main control device 110 is provided with a feature ratio management chip that manages information related to feature ratios in the pachinko machine 10. The feature ratio management chip 207 is a microchip (integrated circuit) that is connected to the MPU 201 via the bus 206, receives information necessary for managing feature ratios from the MPU 201, processes the received information, and stores it to manage information related to feature ratios in the pachinko machine 10.

The inspection terminal 207a is connected to the feature ratio management chip 207. The inspection terminal 207a is configured to be connectable to an external inspection device 300 that inspects the performance of the gaming machine, such as the feature ratio. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a via a cable and connector, information on the feature ratios managed by the feature ratio management chip 207 and other inspection information is transmitted to the inspection device 300. The inspection device 300 can determine whether the feature ratios of the pachinko machine 10 are within the normal range based on the information on the feature ratios received via the inspection terminal 207a.

Now, the detailed configuration of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 6. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device 110.

As described above, the input/output port 205 is connected to the RAM erase switch circuit 253 as an input side, and to the solenoid 209, the first pattern display device 37, the second pattern display device 38, the second pattern hold lamp 84, the payout control device 111, and the voice lamp control device 113 as an output side. In addition, various switches 208 connected as an input side include a first start port switch 208a for detecting a ball that has entered the first start port 64a, a second start port switch 208b for detecting a ball that has entered the second start port 64b, and a first normal winning port switch 208c for detecting a ball that has entered the first normal winning port 63a. A first normal winning port switch 208c for detecting a ball that has won the normal winning port 63b, a second normal winning port switch 208d for detecting a ball that has won the second normal winning port 63b, a large winning port switch 208e for detecting a ball that has won the large winning port 65a, an out switch 208f for detecting balls that have won the winning ports 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a and balls that have entered the out port 66 and are guided to the ball discharge path, and a door opening switch 208g for detecting when at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is locked and opened are connected.

The input/output port 205 includes a start 1 port 205a to which the output of the first start port switch 208a is input, a start 2 port 205b to which the output of the second start port switch 208b is input, a normal 1 port 205c to which the output of the first normal prize port switch 208c is input, a normal 2 port 205d to which the output of the second normal prize port switch 208d is input, a large prize port port 205e to which the output of the large prize port switch 208e is input, an out port 205f to which the output of the out switch 208f is connected, and a door open port 205g to which the output of the door open switch 208g is connected.

During the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) that is executed every 2 milliseconds, the MPU 201 executes a switch read process (see FIG. 11) that checks the state of various switches. During the switch read process, the MPU 201 refers to the start 1 port 205a, start 2 port 205b, normal 1 port 205c, normal 2 port 205d, big prize opening port 205e, and out port 205f, determines whether there is a prize opening that has won and whether there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path, and counts the number of balls that have won at each prize opening and the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls that have been shot into the game area) in 0.5 seconds. Then, the number of balls counted and the game state at that time (whether there is a big win, whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (so-called door) is open, whether there is an error state, etc.) are set in the role ratio management chip 207 every 0.5 seconds. The role ratio management chip 207 calculates and manages the role ratio based on the number of each ball. Whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open is determined by the MPU 201 referring to the door opening port 205g and checking the output of the door opening switch 208g.

The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a stop pattern table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, a prize ball count table 202e, and trigger information data 202f. The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 using various counters stored in the RAM 203 and various tables 202a to 203d stored in the ROM 202. The prize ball count table 202e and the trigger information data 202f are data used to manage the ratio of the prize balls in the prize ball ratio management chip 207, and are sent to the prize ball ratio management chip 207 when the main control device 110 is powered on.

Now, with reference to FIG. 7, we will explain the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the jackpot lottery, set the variable display (variable presentation) of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and draw the display results of the second pattern display device 83. In addition, in the explanation of the various counters, with reference to FIG. 8, we will also explain the various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

To set the jackpot lottery and the variable display (variable presentation) of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, the first jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first jackpot type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot pattern, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 used for selecting the variable pattern, and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 are used.

The second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second pattern display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 17), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Details will be described later, but the RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4), and each of these areas stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first starting hole 64a and the second starting hole 64b.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 899) and to return to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (e.g., 899 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 899). In addition, when the first hit random number counter C1 has completed one cycle of update, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and the first hit random number counter C1 is updated from that initial value.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 899. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 17).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), for example, and when a ball enters either the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b (starting winning), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 at that time is stored in the first winning random number counter storage area 203b1 of one of the reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The random number value that results in a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and a jackpot is determined to have occurred when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved area matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a.

Now, referring to FIG. 8(a), the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described. FIG. 8(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a is divided into two types: one for a low probability state, which is used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (period when it is not in a special probability state), and one for a high probability state, which is used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (in a special probability state) in which the probability of a jackpot is higher than in a low probability state. The number of random numbers that result in a jackpot included in each of the low probability state and the high probability state is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot different, the probability of a jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

The first win random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter with a range of 0 to 899. In this first win random number counter C1, the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that result in a jackpot in a low probability state is 3, and this value "7,307,582" is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a.

On the other hand, the number of random numbers (jackpot random number values) that will result in a jackpot in a high probability state is 30, and the values "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a.

In this embodiment, the jackpot random number values for the low probability state and the high probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are set so that they do not overlap. If a value exists that will be a jackpot random number regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, this value will be easier to predict from the outside, which may increase the possibility of winning a jackpot illegally. In contrast, in this embodiment, the value of the random number that will be a jackpot can be changed depending on the state (i.e., whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), making it harder to predict the value of the random number that will be a jackpot, thereby preventing fraud.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation will be continued. The first winning type counter C2 determines the type of big win in the event of a big win, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a ball enters either the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b (starting winning), the value of the first winning type counter C2 at that time is stored in the first winning type counter storage area 203b2 of the same reserved area in which the first winning random number counter C1 is stored, among the reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Here, if the value of the first win random number counter C1 stored in one of the reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that results in a jackpot, in other words, if it is a random number that results in a miss, the variation pattern in the variable presentation and the type of stop pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "stop type") will be those for a miss. On the other hand, if the value of the first win random number counter C1 stored in one of the reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that results in a jackpot, the variation pattern in the variable presentation and the stop type will be those for a jackpot. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type for that jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first win type counter C2 stored in the same reserved area.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on this first win type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202. Now, with reference to FIG. 8(b), the jackpot type table 202b will be explained. FIG. 8(b) is a diagram showing a schematic example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8(b), the jackpot type table 202b is a table that associates jackpot types with the value of the first win type counter C2.

As for the types of jackpots, as mentioned above, there are "15R sure-win jackpots" that transition to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum of 15 rounds, "15R normal jackpots" that transition to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum of 15 rounds and a time-saving state for 100 fluctuations, and "2R sure-win jackpots" that transition to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum of 2 rounds.

In the jackpot type table 202b, the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8(b), the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 "0 to 39" is associated with a 15R special jackpot, the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 "40 to 79" is associated with a 15R normal jackpot, and the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 "80 to 99" is associated with a 2R special jackpot.

When the value of the first win random number counter C1 is a value that results in a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first win type counter C2 stored in the same reserved area is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. For example, if the value of the first win type counter C2 is "20", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R variable jackpot", if the value of the first win type counter C2 is "60", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R normal jackpot", and if the value of the first win type counter C2 is "90", the jackpot type is determined to be "2R variable jackpot".

In this way, in this embodiment, when a jackpot occurs, there is a 40% probability that a 15R special jackpot will be selected, a 40% probability that a 15R normal jackpot will be selected, and a 20% probability that a 2R special jackpot will be selected. The probability that each jackpot type will be selected when a jackpot occurs is set appropriately depending on the model. Then, depending on the set probability, the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is specified in the jackpot type table.

The probability of a jackpot type being selected may be changed depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to each game state is prepared, and the number of values of the first jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is changed in each jackpot type table.

The probability of a jackpot type being selected may also be changed depending on the starting hole into which the ball has entered. That is, the probability of each jackpot type being selected when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b upon entry of a ball into the first starting hole 64a is a random number that results in a jackpot may be, for example, 40% for a "15R guaranteed jackpot", 40% for a "15R normal jackpot", and 20% for a "2R guaranteed jackpot", and the probability of each jackpot type being selected when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b upon entry of a ball into the second starting hole 64b is a random number that results in a jackpot may be, for example, 55% for a "15R guaranteed jackpot", 40% for a "15R normal jackpot", and 5% for a "2R guaranteed jackpot".

In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to the first start hole 64a and a jackpot type table corresponding to the second start hole 64b are prepared, and the number of values of the first win type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is changed in each jackpot type table. In addition, flags indicating which of the first start hole 64a and the second start hole 64b the values of the various counters stored in each area were stored in association with the winning of the ball in each area may be stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b, and the jackpot type table to be used when determining the jackpot type based on the first win type counter C2 stored in each area may be selected based on the flags. Alternatively, a flag may be provided corresponding to each of the first through fourth reserved areas, and the flag may indicate whether the values of the various counters stored in the corresponding area were stored in association with a winning entry into the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, and the jackpot type table to be used when determining the jackpot type based on the first win type counter C2 stored in each area may be selected based on the flag.

Returning to FIG. 7, the various counters will be explained further. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 99). In this embodiment, the stop type displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a miss occurs is selected by the stop pattern selection counter C3, and one of three stop (performance) patterns is selected: a "reach before or after miss" in which the final stop symbol stops just one symbol before or after the reach symbol after a reach occurs, a "reach other than before or after miss" in which the final stop symbol stops other than before or after the reach symbol after a reach occurs, and a "complete miss" in which no reach occurs.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt processing), and when the ball enters either the first start hole 64a or the second start hole 64b (start winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the same reserved area in which the first winning random number counter C1 is stored, among the reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of RAM 203.

In correspondence with the stop pattern selection counter C3, multiple stop pattern tables 202c with different ranges of random number values for the selected stop types are provided in the ROM 202. The reason multiple stop pattern tables 202c are provided is to change the selection ratio of the stop types depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state, etc.

For example, in a high probability state, since a jackpot is likely to occur, a stop pattern table 202c with a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete miss" is selected so that a "complete miss" is more likely to be selected. In this stop pattern table 202c, the "front or rear miss reach" is narrowed to 98, 99, and the "reach other than front or rear miss" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select a "front or rear miss reach" or a "reach other than front or rear miss."

In addition, in a low probability state, the stop pattern table 202c is selected in which the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "complete miss" is narrowed to 0 to 79 in order to ensure the time for the ball to enter the first start hole 64a or the second start hole 64b, making it difficult to select "complete miss". In this stop pattern table 202c, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear miss" is widened to 80 to 97, making it easier to select "reach other than front and rear miss". Therefore, in a low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with long performance times, so that the time for the ball to enter the first start hole 64a or the second start hole 64b can be ensured, making it easier for the third symbol display device 81 to continue to display the variations. Note that in the latter stop pattern table 202c, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear miss" is also set to 98, 99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) described later is executed, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 17). In addition, when a ball enters either the first start hole 64a or the second start hole 64b (start entry), the value of the variation type counter CS1 at that time is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 of the same reserved area in which the first winning random number counter C1 is stored, among the reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the variation pattern. That is, when the MPU 201 performs a variation performance based on various counters stored in one holding area, the variation pattern is determined by the variation type counter CS1 stored in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 of that holding area and the variation pattern table 202d stored in the ROM 202. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is the determination of the variation time of the pattern variation. The sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and also determine whether or not to execute the advance notice performance and the execution mode of the advance notice performance.

Now, with reference to Figures 8(c) to (e), the details of the variation pattern table 202d will be described. In this pachinko machine 10, as the variation pattern table 202d, a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 used at the time of a jackpot, and loss variation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 used at the time of a loss are prepared. In addition, as the loss variation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3, a loss (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 and a loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 are prepared depending on whether the game state is a time-saving state or a high-probability state during a probability change state, or a low-probability state during normal times other than the time-saving state.

Furthermore, each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 is provided separately as a table to be referenced when the number of reserved balls is 0 (i.e., when there are no reserved balls), a table to be referenced when the number of reserved balls is 1, a table to be referenced when the number of reserved balls is 2, a table to be referenced when the number of reserved balls is 3, and a table to be referenced when the number of reserved balls is 4.

Note that, as in this embodiment, it is not necessary to prepare a variation pattern table for each number of reserved balls, and each variation pattern table 202d1 to 202d3 may be prepared so that the table to be referred to is changed simply based on the number of reserved balls. For example, each variation pattern table 202d1 to 202d3 may be prepared separately as a table to be referred to when the number of reserved balls is less than 3 and a table to be referred to when the number of reserved balls is 3 or more. In addition, the number of reserved balls condition for determining the table to be referred to may be different in each variation pattern table 202d1 to 202d3. For example, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 may be prepared as a table to be referred to when the number of reserved balls is less than 3 and a table to be referred to when the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, the loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 may be prepared as a table for each number of reserved balls, and the loss (probable) variation pattern table 202d3 may be prepared as a single table regardless of the number of reserved balls.

Figure 8 (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202 that is referenced when the number of reserved balls is 2.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is divided into groups based on the jackpot type, regardless of the number of reserved balls it corresponds to. Specifically, it is divided into a 15R jackpot common that is referenced when a 15R variable jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot is determined as the jackpot type, and a 2R variable jackpot exclusive that is referenced when a 2R variable jackpot is determined. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is then associated with each of these divided groups.

When the value of the first win random number counter C1 is a value that results in a jackpot (jackpot random number value), a group (group) to be referenced in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 that determines the fluctuation pattern is determined according to the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first win type counter C2 stored in the same holding area. In that group (group) of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1, the fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is determined as the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation performance held in that holding area.

For the 15R jackpot, three selectable fluctuation patterns are available: fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds. Each fluctuation pattern is associated with a value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Variation A is a variation pattern executed by the third pattern display device 81, where a so-called normal reach is executed in which the third pattern is lined up after a reach with a short variation time. Variation B is a variation pattern executed by the third pattern display device 81, where a so-called super reach is executed in which the third pattern is lined up after a reach with a longer variation time than the normal reach. Super reaches include, for example, reaches that develop from normal reaches, as well as long reaches that simply have a long reach time. Variation C is a variation pattern executed by the third pattern display device 81, where a so-called special reach is executed in which the third pattern is lined up after a reach with an even longer variation time than the super reach. Special reaches include, for example, reaches that develop further after the super reach, as well as special reaches that develop from the normal reach in a different way from the super reach.

In the example shown in FIG. 8(c), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 when the number of reserved balls is 2 is 0 to 10 for fluctuation A, 11 to 99 for fluctuation B, and 100 to 198 for fluctuation C in the common table for 15R jackpots. The common table for 15R jackpots is selected when a 15R special jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot occurs, so in order to create a sense of expectation among players, fluctuation C, which results in a special reach, is more likely to be selected. However, by configuring it so that fluctuation A, which results in a normal reach, and fluctuation B, which results in a super reach, can also be selected, it is possible to provide a game in which a jackpot can be expected from any reach.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, many different effects are prepared for each reach. For example, the super reach includes a reach that displays a rapidly changing back image (an image displayed on the back side of the third pattern, which is the main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81), a reach that suddenly displays a certain character, and other reaches with different effects, such as a reach that adds a notice effect before the fluctuation starts and a reach that adds an effect that becomes a jackpot with a re-flux. In the main control device 110, when a 15R sure-variable jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot occurs, only fluctuations A, B, and C are determined as the fluctuation pattern, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to each of fluctuations A to C. The fluctuation effect is executed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the detailed fluctuation pattern.

For 2R special jackpots, only the "2R change" change pattern with a change time of 59 seconds is available for selection. In the jackpot change pattern table 202d1, regardless of the number of reserved balls, in the group dedicated to 2R special jackpots, 2R change is associated with all possible values (0 to 198) of the change type counter CS1, as shown in FIG. 7(c). In other words, when the jackpot change type is a 2R special jackpot, 2R change is always selected as the change pattern.

When 2R variation is selected by the main control device 110, the detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation is determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Therefore, when the main control device 110 determines that the jackpot type is a 2R sure-variable jackpot, the third pattern display device 81 executes a variation performance according to a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation. In this pachinko machine 10, the detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation includes, for example, a variation pattern in which characters such as "chicken" or "girl" are displayed in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 of the third pattern display device 81, and the third pattern finally stops at a specific pattern, and a variation pattern in which the third pattern finally stops at a specific pattern accompanied by the lighting or blinking of a specific lamp, etc.

The fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, but it may be configured to be determined using multiple other fluctuation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice performance that notifies the start of a jackpot or reach performance before the start of the fluctuation or during the fluctuation performance may be determined by other fluctuation type counters, and when a reach is established, the number of patterns by which the third pattern that stops last will be shifted (for example, a miss that is shifted by one pattern, etc.) may be determined by other fluctuation type counters.

In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1, a group dedicated to 2R certain variable jackpots is provided, but in this pachinko machine 10, when a 2R certain variable jackpot occurs, only the "2R fluctuation" fluctuation pattern is selected, so instead of providing a group dedicated to 2R certain variable jackpots, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 may only specify the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern when a 15R certain variable jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot occurs. In this case, when a 2R certain variable jackpot occurs as the jackpot type, 2R fluctuation may be determined as the fluctuation pattern without referring to the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, only "2R variation" is selected when a 2R certainty jackpot occurs, but one variation pattern may be selected from multiple variation patterns when a 2R certainty jackpot occurs. In this case, even in a group dedicated to 2R certainty jackpots, such as a group common to 15R jackpots, a variation type counter CS1 may be associated with the variation pattern selected when a 2R certainty jackpot occurs, and the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in a certain reserved area may be determined as the variation pattern in the variation performance reserved in that reserved area.

Figure 8 (d) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202 that is referenced when the number of reserved balls is 2.

As shown in FIG. 8(d), the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is divided into groups (sets) based on the stop type when a miss occurs: a complete miss only table that is referenced when a complete miss is determined as the stop type when a miss occurs, and a reach common table that is referenced when a front or rear miss reach or a reach other than a front or rear miss is determined. Each of these divided groups is associated with a value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

When the value of the first win random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area is not a value that results in a jackpot (jackpot random number value), i.e., is a value that results in a miss, and the game state is in a normal low probability state excluding the time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in that holding area is determined from the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area as the first win random number counter C1.

For complete misses only, two selectable patterns are prepared: a change D with a change time of 7 seconds and a change E with a change time of 10 seconds, and the value of the change type counter CS1 is associated with each change pattern. When change D or change E is selected as the change pattern, the third symbol display device 81 executes a change performance in which the third symbol starts to change at high speed and then stops without a reach being achieved. As shown in FIG. 8(d), in the miss (normal) change pattern table 202d2, the correspondence between each change for complete misses only and the value of the change type counter CS1 when the number of reserved balls is 2 is 0 to 98 for change D and 99 to 198 for change E.

Furthermore, for the reach common, three variation patterns are available for selection from the three variations A to C mentioned above, namely, variation A, which has a variation time of 30 seconds and executes a normal reach on the third pattern display device 81, variation B, which has a variation time of 60 seconds and executes a super reach on the third pattern display device 81, and variation C, which has a variation time of 90 seconds and executes a special reach on the third pattern display device 81. In the loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2, the correspondence between each variation common to the reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the number of reserved balls is 2 is as follows: variation A is 0 to 98, variation B is 99 to 190, and variation C is 191 to 198.

Figure 8 (e) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a miss (probable win) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 stored in the ROM 202 that is referenced when the number of reserved balls is 2.

As shown in FIG. 8(e), the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d3, like the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table, is divided into groups (sets) based on the stop type when a miss occurs: a complete miss only table, which is referenced when a complete miss is determined as the stop type when a miss occurs, and fluctuations D and E can be selected as the fluctuation pattern, and a reach common table, which is referenced when a front or rear miss reach or a reach other than a front or rear miss is determined, and fluctuations A to C can be selected as the fluctuation pattern. In each divided group, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each selectable fluctuation pattern.

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area is a value that does not result in a jackpot, i.e., a miss value, and the game state is in a time-saving state or a high probability state during a special probability, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in that holding area is determined from the miss (special probability) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area.

As shown in FIG. 8(e), in the miss (probable variable) fluctuation pattern table 202d3, the correspondence between each fluctuation and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the complete miss only when the number of reserved balls is 2 is as follows: Fluctuation D is 0 to 190, and Fluctuation E is 191 to 198. In addition, the correspondence between each fluctuation and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the reach common when the number of reserved balls is 2 is as follows: Fluctuation A is 0 to 98, Fluctuation B is 99 to 190, and Fluctuation C is 191 to 198. In other words, the correspondence between each fluctuation and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the reach common is the same in the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 and the miss (probable variable) fluctuation pattern table 202d3.

On the other hand, when the game state is in a time-saving state or a high probability state during a special bonus, it is easy for the ball to enter the second starting hole 64b, and if there are many complete misses (Variation E) with long fluctuation times, it will take a long time until the next fluctuation display starts, which may make the player feel uncomfortable as they are left waiting. Also, it is undesirable for the hall as it reduces the operating rate.

Therefore, the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 and miss (high probability) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 are configured so that if a complete miss occurs when the game state is in a time-saving state or a high-probability state during a high probability state, a complete miss (fluctuation D) with a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than in other game states (normal states excluding the time-saving state). This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of causing discomfort to the player by starting the next fluctuation display early. It also makes it possible to prevent the operating rate from dropping too dramatically.

The variation pattern for a miss is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but multiple variation type counters may be used in combination for selection (selecting whether or not to display a warning, etc.). Also, the selection of the miss type is configured to be divided into a miss (normal) variation pattern table and a miss (high probability) variation pattern table, but even if the game is in a normal state, if there are multiple reserved balls (for example, three or more if the maximum is four), the variation display may be ended early, so the selection may be made by referring to the miss (high probability) variation pattern table.

In addition, the correspondence between the fluctuations A to C selected when the fluctuation type is a front/rear miss reach or a reach other than a front/rear miss and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same regardless of the game state, so the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 and the miss (probable hit) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 do not include a group common to reaches, and these fluctuation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 are referenced only when the stop type is a complete miss, and a separate fluctuation pattern table may be prepared to be referenced when the stop type is a front/rear miss reach or a reach other than a front/rear miss regardless of the game state.

In this pachinko machine 10, the correspondence between the fluctuations A to C selected when the fluctuation type is a forward or rear miss reach or a non-forward or rear miss reach and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same regardless of the game state, but it may be different depending on the game state.

Furthermore, in the fluctuation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 for each miss shown in FIG. 8(d) and FIG. 8(e), fluctuations D and E may simply be set as "complete miss fluctuations", and when the "complete miss fluctuation" is selected, fluctuations D and E may be selected with a predetermined probability by referring to other tables. Of course, in this case, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may also be prepared.

Returning to FIG. 7, the second win random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 250 and returns to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., 250). Also, when the second win random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second win random number counter C4.

In this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is performed, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right through gate 67. There are 149 possible random number values that will result in a win, with the range being "5 to 153." In other words, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 153," it is determined to be a win, and the "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83, the electric device of the second starting hole 64b is activated, and the second starting hole 64b is opened for a predetermined period of time.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see Figure 10), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see Figure 17).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control device 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the variable displays (variable presentation) on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Returning to FIG. 6, the explanation will continue. The prize ball number table 202e in the ROM 202 is a table that specifies the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters each of the winning slots 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, and 65a (winning). Here, the details of the prize ball number table 202e will be explained with reference to FIG. 9. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the prize ball number table 202e.

9, in the prize ball number table 202e, the first start port 64a, the second start port 64b, the first normal winning port 63a, the second normal winning port 63b, and the large winning port 65a are defined as "start port types", and the "number of prize balls" corresponding to each winning port is defined. Specifically, in the prize ball number table 202e, the first start port 64a is associated with the number of prize balls 3, the second start port 64b is associated with the number of prize balls 2, the first normal winning port 63a is associated with the number of prize balls 8, the second normal winning port 63b is associated with the number of prize balls 8, and the large winning port 65a is associated with the number of prize balls 12.

Note that the prize ball number table 202e specifies the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning port for all winning ports provided in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, if the pachinko machine 10 has winning ports other than the above-mentioned winning ports 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, and 65a, the prize ball number table 202e will specify the number of prize balls corresponding to those winning ports as well.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the number of prize balls is the same for the first normal winning port 63a and the second normal winning port 63b. Therefore, in the prize ball number table 202e, the first normal winning port 63a and the second normal winning port 63b may be collectively defined as the "starting port type" as the "normal winning port", and the number of prize balls may be defined as 8 in association with the "normal winning port". Also, if the number of prize balls for the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b is the same as "3", the prize ball number table 202e may collectively define the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b as the "starting port type" as the "starting port", and the number of prize balls may be defined as 3 in association with the "starting port".

The prize ball number table 202e is sent to the reel ratio management chip 207 during the initialization process of the MPU 201, which is executed when power is applied to the main control device 110, and is used when the reel ratio management chip 207 calculates the reel ratio.

The trigger information data 202f is data that specifies the timing (trigger) at which the reel ratio is calculated in the reel ratio management chip 207. Details will be described later, but the reel ratio management chip 207 calculates the reel ratio at the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f.

The reel ratio management chip 207 corresponds to three timings (triggers) for calculating the reel ratio. The first is the number of balls fired, and the reel ratio management chip 207 calculates the reel ratio each time the number of balls fired reaches a predetermined number. The second is time, and the reel ratio management chip 207 calculates the reel ratio when a predetermined time is reached. The third is playing time, and the reel ratio management chip 207 calculates the reel ratio when a predetermined playing time has elapsed by the player.

The trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating either the "number of shots," "time," or "play time" as the calculation timing (trigger) of the reel ratio in the reel ratio management chip 207.

When the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating the "number of shots", it also specifies information indicating the "predetermined number of balls" that is the timing for calculating the role ratio. For example, if the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating the "number of shots" and information indicating 500 balls as the "predetermined number of balls", the role ratio is calculated in the role ratio management chip 207 every time the number of shots reaches 500 balls.

When the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating a "time", it also specifies information indicating a "predetermined time" that is the timing for calculating the reel ratio. For example, if the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating a "time" and information indicating 12:00, 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00 as the "predetermined times", the reel ratio is calculated in the reel ratio management chip 207 at the timings of 12:00, 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00.

When the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating "play time", it also specifies information indicating a "predetermined time" that is the timing for calculating the role ratio. For example, if the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating "play time" and information indicating two hours as the "predetermined time", the role ratio is calculated in the role ratio management chip 207 every time two hours of play time have elapsed.

The trigger information data 202f, together with the prize ball number table 202e, is sent to the reel ratio management chip 207 during the initialization process of the MPU 201, which is executed when power is applied to the main control device 110, and is used when determining the trigger for calculating the reel ratio in the reel ratio management chip 207.

In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags and values of counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is cut off (including when a power outage occurs; the same applies below), the power outage signal SG1 output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201. This input causes the NMI interrupt process (see Figure 15) to be executed, and information about the occurrence of a power outage is set. Then, when the main process (Figure 17) of the MPU 201 determines that there is information about the occurrence of a power outage, the stack pointer and the values of each register at that time are stored in the RAM 203.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on after a power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state it was in before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 20) when the power is cut off, and the values written to the RAM 203 are restored during the start-up processing (see FIG. 19) when the power is turned on.

The RAM 203 further includes at least a reserved ball number counter 203a, a reserved ball storage area 203b, a reserved ball execution area 203c, a start 1 counter 203d, a start 2 counter 203e, a normal 1 counter 203f, a normal 2 counter 203g, a big prize slot counter 203h, and an out counter 203i.

The reserved ball counter 203a is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display (variable performance performed by the third pattern display device 81) performed by the first pattern display device 37 up to a maximum of four times based on a ball entering either the first start hole 64a or the second start hole 64b (start winning) detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. This reserved ball counter 203a is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (S616 in FIG. 16). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, one is added up to a maximum value of four (see S202, S203 in FIG. 12). On the other hand, the reserved ball counter 203a is decremented by one each time a variable performance is executed (see S305 in FIG. 13).

The value of the reserved ball counter 203a (i.e., the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 12). The reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected and the reserved ball number counter 203a is incremented by one.

The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the value of the number of reserved balls for the variable performance reserved in the main control device 110 by using the reserved ball number command. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to manage the number of reserved variable performances without accessing the main control device 110. Also, by sending a reserved ball number command from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected, even if the reserved ball number for the variable performance managed by the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual reserved ball number for the variable performance reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the deviation can be corrected by the reserved ball number command received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 sends a reserved ball number display command to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number each time the number of reserved balls managed internally changes. The display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number pattern in the reserved ball number display area Db of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by this reserved ball number display command.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control unit 110 sends a reserved ball number command to the voice lamp control unit 113, the reserved ball number command includes not only the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a incremented by 1, but also the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer (see Figure 6) in response to the start winning that triggered the increment of the reserved ball number counter 203a.

In other words, when a start win occurs, the values of the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer by the main control unit 110 are transmitted to the audio lamp control unit 113 by the reserved ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 reads ahead the values of the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 transmitted by the reserved ball count command before the change performance based on each value is executed, and determines what the change performance will be (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what the change time will be, etc.) before the change performance is executed. Then, based on the result of the read-ahead judgment, it is possible to decide to execute various types of performance.

The reserved ball storage area 203b is a memory for storing the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) when a start winning is detected. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has won (start winning) either the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), it obtains the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer and stores them in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4) so that data corresponding to one start winning (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) can be stored (reserved) up to four times (see FIG. 7).

The reserved ball execution area 203c is a memory for storing data (the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referenced in processes such as the jackpot lottery and the settings of the variable display (variable performance) of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing the variable performance, it shifts the data corresponding to one start winning from among the data corresponding to each start winning (counter values C1 to C3, CS1) stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b described above to this reserved ball execution area 203c in order to execute processes such as the jackpot lottery and the setting of the variable display (variable performance) of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81. Note that in this embodiment, shifting refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

Now, referring back to FIG. 7, the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described in detail. The reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the jackpot lottery and to set the variable display (variable performance) of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81.

The first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the variable display (variable performance) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are used to set the jackpot lottery, the first type symbol counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the type of stop when a miss occurs, and the variable type counter CS1 used to determine the variable pattern. The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when a ball enters either the first start hole 64a or the second start hole 64b (start entry).

The reserved ball storage area 203b is made up of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4). Each of the four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4) includes a first win random number counter storage area 203b1 that stores the value of the first win random number counter C1, a first win type counter storage area 203b2 that stores the value of the first win type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203b4 that stores the value of the variation type counter CS1.

In this embodiment, the first winning random number counter storage area 203b1, the first winning type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variable type counter storage area 203b4 are provided in one reserved ball storage area 203b, but multiple reserved ball storage areas may be provided and each of the four areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, and 203b4 may be provided in one of the reserved ball storage areas.

As mentioned above, the reserved ball storage area 203b stores up to four pieces of data (the values of each counter C1-C3, CS1) obtained when a ball enters the second start port 64b (start winning), and in this case, data is stored in the available areas of the four reserved areas (reserved areas 1-4) in order starting from the area with the smallest area number (1-4). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to an older start winning is stored, and reserved area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest start winning.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. Like the reserved ball storage area 203b, this reserved ball execution area 203c is provided with a first win random number counter storage area 203c1 that stores the value of the first win random number counter C1, a first win type counter storage area 203c2 that stores the value of the first win type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4 that stores the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, it shifts the data (the values of the counters C1-C3 and CS1) stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203b to each of the areas 203c1-203c4 of this reserved ball execution area 203c. The data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c is then referenced in the variable start process (see FIG. 17), and a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, while a variable pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, a variable display is performed based on the determined variable pattern and stop type.

The variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a variation pattern command and a stop type command, and are also notified to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 performs a variation presentation based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the variation pattern command and stop type command.

The details of the data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable performance, it shifts the random number value in the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 in the reserved first area to the first hit random number counter storage area 203c1 in the reserved ball execution area 203c. Similarly, it shifts the random number value in the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 to the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the random number value in the variable type counter storage area 203b4 to the variable type counter storage area 203c4.

When the shifting of data to the reserved ball execution area 203c is completed, the reserved first area becomes empty, and a shift process is performed to move the data stored (reserved) in each area (2nd to 4th) of the reserved ball storage area 203b to the area (1st to 3rd) with the area number one smaller. Note that in this embodiment, data shifting is only performed for the reserved areas (1st to 4th) in the reserved ball storage area 203b where data is stored (reserved).

Here, we will explain the data shifting performed for each reserved area in reserved ball storage area 203b. For example, assume that the value of reserved ball counter 203a is "4" when a decision is made to start the variable performance, and data is stored in all areas (1st to 4th) of reserved ball storage area 203b. In this state, when the data in reserved area 1 is shifted to reserved ball execution area 203c and reserved area 1 becomes empty, MPU 201 shifts the data in the other areas (2nd to 4th) to the areas (1st to 3rd) with area numbers one smaller. In other words, the data in reserved area 2 is shifted to reserved area 1, the data in reserved area 3 is shifted to reserved area 2, and the data in reserved area 4 is shifted to reserved area 3.

For example, if the value of the reserved ball count counter 203a is "2" when the decision to start the variable performance is made, the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the reserved second area to the reserved first area and ends the data shifting. As described above, in this embodiment, data shifting is not performed for the reserved areas (third to fourth) in which no data is stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced.

It is also possible to configure the system so that each data in the reserved areas (2nd to 4th) is shifted to an area with an area number one smaller, regardless of whether or not data is present. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) in the reserved areas (2nd to 4th), which makes it easier to create programs.

Returning to FIG. 6, the explanation will be continued. The start 1 counter 203d is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the first start port 64a, the start 2 counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the second start port 64b, the normal 1 counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the first normal winning port 63a, the normal 2 counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the second normal winning port 63b, the large winning port counter 203h is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the large winning port 65a, and the out counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game). All of these counters 203d to 203i are set to zero as their initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (S616 in FIG. 16).

In addition, in the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) executed every 2 milliseconds, the MPU 201 refers to the start 1 port 205a, start 2 port 205b, normal 1 port 205c, normal 2 port 205d, large prize opening port 205e, and out port 205f to determine whether a ball has been detected in each of the first start opening switch 208a, the second start opening switch 208b, the first normal prize opening switch 208c, the second normal prize opening switch 208d, large prize opening switch 208f, and out switch 208g. If a prize has been won in any of the prize openings (a ball has been detected in the corresponding switch), the counter corresponding to the prize opening where the prize has been won is incremented by one, and if a ball has been detected in the out switch 208g, the out counter 203i is incremented by one.

Counting of the number of balls in counters 203d-203i continues for 0.5 seconds. After 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the values of counters 203d-203h are treated as winning information, and the value of out counter 203i is treated as out information, which are set in the bonus ratio management chip 207 together with information indicating the game status at that time. After the values of counters 203d-203i are set in the bonus ratio management chip 207, the values of counters 203d-203i are initialized to zero, and the number of balls that have won in each winning slot in the next 0.5 seconds is counted for each winning slot, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game) is counted.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have entered each winning slot at 0.5 second intervals, and also counts the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game), and sets the counting results in the bonus ratio management chip 207. Then, as described below, the bonus ratio management chip 207 accumulates these counted values for each value until it is time to calculate the bonus ratio, thereby counting the number of balls that have entered each winning slot for each winning slot from the time the power is turned on until it is time to calculate the bonus ratio for the first time, or from the time the bonus ratio is calculated last time until it is time to calculate the bonus ratio next time, and also counts the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game).

In this way, the number of winning balls in the winning slots actually detected by the MPU 201, etc. are input from the MPU 201 to the bonus ratio management chip 207, so that the bonus ratio management chip 207 can accurately grasp the number of balls recognized as winning during actual play.

In addition, if the MPU 201 were not to count the number of balls that entered each winning slot or the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game), and these counts were to be performed only by the bonus ratio management chip 207, the bonus ratio management chip would also have to monitor the winning balls that entered each winning slot and the balls that were guided to the ball discharge path at short intervals (e.g., every 2 milliseconds), which would increase the processing load and could lead to increased power consumption.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the MPU 201 counts and sets these counting results in the bonus ratio management chip 207 at 0.5 second intervals, so that the bonus ratio management chip 207 counts the number of balls that have entered each winning slot for each winning slot every 0.5 seconds from when the power is turned on until the bonus ratio is calculated for the first time, or from when the bonus ratio was calculated last time until the bonus ratio is calculated next time, and also executes a process to count the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game). This makes it possible to suppress the processing load and power consumption in the bonus ratio management chip 207.

On the other hand, the MPU 201 monitors the winning balls in each winning slot and the balls guided to the ball discharge path at intervals of, for example, 2 milliseconds in order to count the number of winning balls in each winning slot and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game). However, these monitoring operations are necessary for controlling the main game such as the big win lottery and the prize ball judgment, and are originally processed at short time intervals of 2 milliseconds. In addition, since the interval at which balls are fired into the game area by the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) in the pachinko machine 10 is about 0.6 seconds, the number of winning balls in each winning slot and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game), which are counted at 0.5 second intervals, is almost always 0 or 1 ball, or at most a few balls, so the amount of data required for the counters 203d to 203i provided in the RAM 203 may be small. This counting process therefore prevents the capacity of RAM 203 from increasing. Therefore, there is no significant impact even if MPU 201 executes a process to count the number of balls that enter each winning port in 0.5 seconds for each winning port, and also count the number of balls that are guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game).

The role ratio management chip 207 is provided with a CPU 261, a buffer 262, a first read/write memory 263, a second read/write memory 264, a setting register 265, and a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") 266, which are connected to each other via a bus 206. The bus 206 is also connected to the MPU 201 and the inspection terminal 207a.

A large-capacity capacitor 267 is also connected to the reel ratio management chip 207. The capacitor 267 is charged while power is being supplied to the main control device 110, and when the power supply to the main control device 110 is stopped due to a power outage or the like, the reel ratio management chip 207 uses the power charged in the capacitor 267 to execute processing associated with the power cut. Note that instead of the capacitor 267, a rechargeable secondary battery may be connected to the reel ratio management chip 207.

The CPU 261 is a calculation device that controls the operation of the feature ratio management chip 207, and by executing a control program stored in a ROM (not shown) provided within the feature ratio management chip 207, the feature ratio management chip 207 manages the feature ratios in the pachinko machine 10. By having the CPU 261 manage the feature ratios in the feature ratio management chip 207, it is possible to flexibly respond to changes in the functions and specifications of the feature ratio management chip 207 by changing the software.

The RTC 266 outputs the current time. The RTC 266 has a built-in rechargeable secondary battery (not shown), and the RTC 266 always keeps track of the current time and outputs the time using the secondary battery as a power source. The time output by the RTC 266 is referenced by the CPU 261 when the timing (trigger) for calculating the role ratio set by the trigger setting area 265b is "time", and when the time indicated by the RTC 266 matches or exceeds the "predetermined time" set in the trigger setting area 265b, the process of calculating the role ratio is executed. In addition, as will be described later in detail, when jackpot information, door open information, error information, or out-of-hours information is added to the jackpot data 263g, open data 263h, error data 263i, and out-of-hours data 263k in the first reading memory 263, the time at that time is read from the RTC 266, and the read time is added to each data together with each information.

The buffer 262 is a memory for temporarily storing various information set by the MPU 201, and is composed of a static random access memory (SRAM), which is a volatile memory that can read and write data. The buffer 262 includes at least a start 1 buffer 262a, a start 2 buffer 262b, a normal 1 buffer 262c, a normal 2 buffer 262d, a big prize opening buffer 262f, a big win buffer 262g, an open buffer 262h, and an error buffer 262i.

The Start 1 buffer 262a stores the value of the Start 1 counter 203d set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals. The Start 2 buffer 262b stores the value of the Start 2 counter 203e set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals. The Normal 1 buffer 262c stores the value of the Normal 1 counter 203f set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals. The Normal 2 buffer 262d stores the value of the Normal 2 counter 203g set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals. The Large Winning Gate buffer 262e stores the value of the Large Winning Gate counter 203h set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals. The Out buffer 262f stores the value of the Out counter 203i set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals.

The jackpot buffer 262g stores information (jackpot information) when the game status set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals is a jackpot. The open buffer 262h stores information (door open information) when the game status set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals is when the inner frame 12 or front frame 14 is open. The error buffer 262i stores information (error information) when the game status set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals is when an error occurs.

In the bonus ratio management chip 207, the MPU 201 sets (writes) various buffers provided in the buffer 262, and when an interrupt signal is received from the MPU 201, the CPU 261 executes the setting information reception process (see FIG. 19) described below. The setting information reception process counts the number of winning balls for each winning slot based on the various information set in the buffer 262, counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., balls shot into the play area), and stores these numbers of balls in the first reading/writing memory 263. Information regarding the play status of the pachinko machine 10 is also stored in the first reading/writing memory 263.

The setting register 265 is a register for setting the setting values required for the operation of the bonus ratio management chip 207. The setting register 265 is provided with at least a prize ball count data setting area 265a and a trigger setting area 265b.

The prize ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a. The trigger information data 202f stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 is set in the trigger setting area 265b. When the main control device 110 is powered on, the prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f are sent to the role ratio management chip 207. Then, the CPU 261 sets the prize ball number table 202e in the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and sets the trigger information data 202f in the trigger setting area 265b.

The prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 275a is referenced by the CPU 261 when calculating the ratio of the prize balls. Here, the number of prize balls for each prize winning slot is determined by the model of the pachinko machine, and this information has been stored in the ROM 202. The prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 is sent to the prize ball number management chip 207 every time power is supplied, and the prize ball number information, which differs for each model, is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a of the prize ball ratio management chip 207, so that it is not necessary to store the information on the number of prize balls, which differs for each model, in the ROM of the prize ball ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the production of the prize ball ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. In addition, if the model of the pachinko machine is different, it is only necessary to change the ROM 202, and the prize ball ratio can be accurately calculated even if the same prize ball ratio management chip 207 is used between different models of pachinko machines.

The trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is also referenced by the CPU 261, and it is determined whether or not it is time (trigger) to calculate the bonus ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f. If it is determined that the timing has arrived, the process of calculating the bonus ratio is executed. Here, since there is a physical limit to the memory capacity in the bonus ratio management chip 207 that can record information related to the bonus ratio, it is preferable that the timing (trigger) for calculating the bonus ratio is determined by taking into consideration the probability of a big win and the probability of a special bonus in the pachinko machine 10, rather than fixing the timing in the bonus ratio management chip 207. Like this pachinko machine 10, trigger information data 202f that specifies the timing for calculating the role ratio determined in consideration of the jackpot probability, probability of special bonus, etc. in the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the ROM 202, and each time power is supplied, the trigger information data 202f is sent from the ROM 202 to the role ratio management chip 207, so that the role ratio management chip 207 can calculate the role ratio and consecutive role ratio at a timing that matches the jackpot probability, probability of special bonus, etc. in the pachinko machine 10, and record it in the second reading and writing memory 264.

In addition, only the prize ball number table 202e and trigger information data 202f transmitted during the start-up process (so-called boot process) executed by the MPU 201 when the main control device 110 is powered on are configured to be set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a and trigger setting area 265b. The start-up process is a so-called boot process, and is a non-user program that is not programmed by the user. This makes it possible to prevent a fraudster from setting a false prize ball number table or trigger information data in the prize ball number data setting area 265a and trigger setting area 265b.

The first read/write memory 263 is a memory for temporarily storing, while accumulating, information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 until the timing for calculating the role ratio arrives. The first read/write memory 263 is configured with a volatile memory capable of reading and writing data, such as an SRAM. The first read/write memory 263 may also be configured with a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory), which is a volatile memory capable of reading and writing larger amounts of data.

The first reading memory 263 stores at least a start 1 counter 263a, a start 2 counter 263b, a normal 1 counter 263d, a normal 2 counter 263e, a big prize slot counter 263e, an out counter 263f, big win data 263g, open data 263h, error data 263i, and overtime data 263j. These counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263 are all initialized to 0 by the CPU 261 based on an initialization signal sent by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 (see S710 in FIG. 18).

These counters and data stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 are referenced by the role ratio calculation process executed by the CPU 261 when it is time to calculate the role ratio, and after the necessary processing is executed, they are all initialized to 0 again by the CPU 261 (S744 in FIG. 21). As a result, the first reading/writing memory 263 will again temporarily store, while accumulating, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 until it is time to calculate the role ratio again.

The start 1 counter 263a is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have entered the first start port 64a by the time the bonus ratio is calculated. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the start 1 counter 203d, which indicates the number of balls that have entered the first start port 64a in 0.5 seconds, in the start 1 buffer 262a, the CPU 261 adds the value set in the start 1 buffer 262a (i.e., the number of balls that have entered the first start port 64a in 0.5 seconds) to the start 1 counter 263a.

The start 2 counter 263b is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have entered the second start port 64b until the timing for calculating the bonus ratio is reached. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the start 2 counter 203e, which indicates the number of balls that have entered the first start port 64a in 0.5 seconds, in the start 2 buffer 262b, the CPU 261 adds the value set in the start 2 buffer 262b (i.e., the number of balls that have entered the second start port 64b in 0.5 seconds) to the start 2 counter 263b.

The normal 1 counter 263c is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have entered the first normal winning port 63a by the time the ratio of the winning combination is calculated. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the normal 1 counter 203f, which indicates the number of balls that have entered the first normal winning port 63a in 0.5 seconds, in the normal 1 buffer 262c, the CPU 261 adds the value set in the normal 1 buffer 262c (i.e., the number of balls that have entered the first normal winning port 63a in 0.5 seconds) to the normal 1 counter 263c.

The normal 2 counter 263d is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have entered the second normal winning port 63b by the time the ratio of the winning combination is calculated. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the normal 2 counter 203g, which indicates the number of balls that have entered the second normal winning port 63b in 0.5 seconds, in the normal 2 buffer 262d, the CPU 261 adds the value set in the normal 2 buffer 262d (i.e., the number of balls that have entered the second normal winning port 63b in 0.5 seconds) to the normal 2 counter 263d.

The large prize opening counter 263e is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have entered the large prize opening 65a by the time the ratio of winning devices is calculated. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the large prize opening counter 203h, which indicates the number of balls that have entered the large prize opening 65a in 0.5 seconds, in the large prize opening buffer 262e, the CPU 261 adds the value set in the large prize opening buffer 262e (i.e., the number of balls that have entered the large prize opening 65a in 0.5 seconds) to the large prize opening counter 263e.

The out counter 263f is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., balls shot into the play area) until the timing for calculating the role ratio is reached. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the out counter 203i, which indicates the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path for 0.5 seconds, in the out buffer 262f, the CPU 261 adds the value set in the out buffer 262f (i.e., the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path for 0.5 seconds) to the out counter 263f. When the trigger for calculating the role ratio set in the trigger setting area 265b is the "number of shots," the out counter 263f is referenced, and when the number of balls (number of shots) indicated by the out counter 263f becomes equal to or greater than the "predetermined number of balls" set in the trigger setting area 265b, the CPU 261 executes the role ratio calculation process.

The jackpot data 263g is data that specifies jackpot information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has reached a jackpot, together with the time at which the jackpot has been reached, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has reached a jackpot by the time the ratio of the bonus items is calculated. When the MPU 201 sets jackpot information indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot in the jackpot buffer 262g, the CPU 261 adds the jackpot information to the jackpot data 263g together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266.

The open data 263h is data that specifies door open information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has entered a door open state, together with the time at which the door is open, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 has become one in which the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (door) is open by the time the role ratio is calculated. When the MPU 201 sets door open information indicating that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open as the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the open buffer 262h, the CPU 261 adds the door open information to the open data 263h together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266.

Error data 263g is data that specifies error information indicating that pachinko machine 10 is in an error, together with the time at which the game state of pachinko machine 10 is in an error, if the timing for calculating the role ratio arrives. When MPU 201 sets error information indicating that the game state of pachinko machine 10 is in an error in error in error buffer 262i, CPU 261 adds the error information to error data 263i together with the current time indicated by RTC 266.

After-hours data 263j is data that specifies after-hours information indicating that some operation was performed on the pachinko machine 10 late at night, together with the time of day, when the MPU 201 sets (writes) the buffer 262 during a late-night period (for example, between midnight and 6 a.m.), which is usually outside business hours. When the MPU 201 sets (writes) the buffer 262, the CPU 261 reads the current time from the RTC 266, and if it is determined that the time is during the late-night period, the after-hours information is added to the after-hours data 263j together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266.

The second read/write memory 264 is composed of a non-volatile memory, such as a flash memory, from which data can be read and written. The second read/write memory 264 only needs to retain the stored data even when the power is turned off. In addition to the flash memory, other types of memory such as a ferroelectric memory (FeRAM), a magnetoresistive random access memory (MRAM), a resistive random access memory (ReRAM), etc. may be used.
Alternatively, the second read/write memory 264 may be configured as a dynamic random access memory (DRAM). In addition, the second read/write memory 264 may be configured as a dynamic random access memory (DRAM), and the power supply device 115 may continue to supply a backup voltage to the DRAM even while the power is off, thereby allowing data to be held even while the power is off.

The second reading memory 264 stores at least the following: bonus item ratio data 264a, consecutive bonus item ratio data 264b, number of shot balls data 264c, and game information data 264d.

The reel ratio data 264a is data representing the reel ratio calculated for each timing (trigger) at which the reel ratio is calculated, and recorded together with the time at which the reel ratio was calculated. The consecutive reel ratio data 264b is data representing the consecutive reel ratio calculated at the same timing (trigger), and recorded together with the time at which the reel ratio was calculated.

The role ratio here indicates the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out in conjunction with winning the second start port 64b and the large prize port 65a, which activate the role, to the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player, and is set to be 70% or less. The consecutive role ratio indicates the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out in conjunction with winning the large prize port 65a, which activates the role, to the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player, and is set to be 60% or less.

Originally, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio refer to the above ratio when the test shot test of the game ball is performed for 10 hours, but here, for each timing (trigger) for calculating the role ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b, the CPU 261 calculates the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out in association with winning the second start hole 64b and the large prize hole 65a to the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player from the time when the power is turned on until the first time is reached, or from the previous time to the current time, and records it in the role ratio data 264a together with the time at that time. Also, the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out in association with winning the large prize hole 65a to the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player from the time when the power is turned on until the first time is reached, or from the previous time to the current time, is calculated and recorded in the continuous role ratio data 264b together with the time at that time.

Even if the power is cut off, the power stored in the capacitor 267 is used to calculate the role ratio and consecutive role ratio based on the number of balls (prize balls) paid out during the period from the timing (trigger) for calculating the most recent role ratio until it is determined that the power is cut off, and these are recorded together with the time in the role ratio data 264a or consecutive role ratio data 264b. As a result, after the role ratio and consecutive role ratio are calculated and recorded, the role ratio and consecutive role ratio can be calculated without omission even for the number of prize balls paid out before the power is cut off.

The number of balls that have entered the first start port 64a indicated by the start 1 counter 263a stored in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls that have entered the second start port 64b indicated by the start 2 counter 263b, the number of balls that have entered the first normal winning port 63a indicated by the normal 1 counter 263c, the number of balls that have entered the second normal winning port 63b indicated by the normal 2 counter 263d, and the number of balls that have entered the large winning port 65a indicated by the large winning port counter 263e are multiplied by the number of prize balls associated with each winning port indicated in the prize ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and the number of balls paid out to each winning port in connection with the winning of that winning port can be calculated. Then, by adding these up, the total number of balls paid out to the player can be calculated.

This allows the ratio of the combination of the number of balls paid out for winning the second start opening 64b and the number of balls paid out for winning the large winning opening 65a to the total number of balls paid out to the player to be calculated, thereby allowing the ratio of the combination of the number of balls paid out for winning the large winning opening 65a to be calculated, thereby allowing the ratio of the consecutive combination of the balls to be calculated, thereby allowing the ratio of the number of balls paid out for winning the large winning opening 65a to the total number of balls paid out to the player to be calculated, thereby allowing the ratio of the consecutive combination of the balls to be calculated, thereby allowing the ratio of the number of balls paid out for winning the large winning opening 65a ... consecutive combination of the balls to be calculated, thereby allowing the ratio of the number of balls paid out for winning the large winning opening 65a to be calculated, thereby allowing the ratio of the consecutive combination of the balls to be calculated, thereby allowing the ratio of the consecutive combination of the balls to be calculated, thereby allowing the ratio of the consecutive combination of the balls to be calculated, thereby allowing the ratio of the consecutive combination of the balls to be calculated, thereby allowing the ratio of the consecutive combination of the balls to be calculated, thereby allowing the ratio of the consecutive combination of the balls to be calculated, thereby allowing the ratio of the consecutive combination of the balls to be calculated, thereby allowing the ratio of the consecutive combination of the balls to be calculated, thereby allowing the ratio of the consecutive combination of the balls to be calculated, thereby allowing the

The number of fired balls data 264c is data that records the total number of balls fired into the play area counted by the out counter 263f of the first reading and writing memory 263, together with the time at each timing (trigger) at which the ratio of the special features is calculated. The total number of balls fired into the play area from the time the power is turned on until the first timing is reached, or from the previous timing to the current timing, is indicated by the out counter 263f. When it is time to calculate the ratio of the special features, the value of the out counter 263f at that time is recorded in the number of fired balls data 264c together with the time at that time indicated by the RTC 266.

The game status data 264d is data in which the jackpot information, door open information, error information, and after-hours information stored in the jackpot data 263g, open data 263h, error data 263i, and after-hours data 263j of the first reading memory 263 are recorded together with the time associated with each piece of information. When it is time to calculate the ratio of the game devices, the jackpot information, door open information, error information, and after-hours information stored in the jackpot data 263g, open data 263h, error data 263i, and after-hours data 263j of the first reading memory 263, and the time associated with each piece of information are recorded in the game status data 264d by the CPU 261.

At this time, for example, if jackpot information is stored in jackpot data 263g at intervals of less than one second, this means that jackpots are occurring continuously in the game state, so only the oldest jackpot information and its time are recorded in game state data 264d. Similarly, for door open information, error information, and after-hours information, if each piece of information is stored in each data 263h-j at intervals of less than one second, only the oldest information and its time are recorded in game state data 264d. This makes it possible to keep the storage capacity required for game state data 264d small.

When recording jackpot information, door open information, error information, and after-hours information in the game play status data 264d, the CPU 261 sorts each piece of information from oldest to newest and records it in the game play status data 264d. Then, when outputting the information recorded in the game play status data 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 outputs the information in the order in which it was recorded. As a result, each piece of information is output in order from oldest to newest, and the inspection device 300 can easily analyze changes in the game play status over time by analyzing the information in the order in which it was output.

However, the CPU 261 does not necessarily have to store each piece of information in the game status data 264d in order from the oldest information. In this case, when outputting information recorded in the game status data 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 may read the information from the game status data 264d in order from the oldest information and transmit it to the inspection device 300, or the CPU 261 may output each piece of information to the inspection device 300 in the order in which it was recorded, and the inspection device 300 may rearrange the received pieces of information in order from the oldest information.

The jackpot information, door open information, error information, and after-hours information stored in the jackpot data 263g, open data 263h, error data 263i, and after-hours data 263j of the first reading memory 263 may all be recorded in the game status data 264d along with the associated time. Although the game status data 264d requires a large amount of storage capacity, by outputting this to the inspection device 300, the operating status of the pachinko machine 10 can be analyzed while observing minute changes in the game status.

Here, the information on the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, and total number of balls shot into the play area that can be recorded in the role ratio data 264a, consecutive role ratio data 264b, and number of shot balls data 264c is each limited to a predetermined number (e.g., 1024). In addition, the total number of jackpot information, door open information, error information, and out-of-hours information that can be recorded in the game status data 264d is also limited to a predetermined number (e.g., 16384). If a predetermined number of pieces of information have already been recorded in the role ratio data 264a, consecutive role ratio data 264b, number of shot balls data 264c, or game status data 264d, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is recorded in its place. For example, the feature ratio data 264a, the continuous feature ratio data 264b, the number of shot balls data 264c, and the game status data 264d are each configured as a ring buffer, and a memory for managing the position where information is written on the ring buffer is prepared separately in the second read/write memory 264 or in a non-volatile memory provided separately from the second read/write memory 264, and the writing position is shifted by one each time information is written, thereby erasing the oldest information and recording the latest information there. In this way, by setting an upper limit on the number of pieces of information that can be recorded in each data, it is possible to prevent the storage capacity of the second read/write memory 264 from increasing. In addition, when the number of pieces of information to be recorded in each data reaches the upper limit, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is recorded, so that the inspection device 300 can perform analysis, including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, by preparing a memory for managing the position where information is written on the ring buffer in the second read/write memory 264, even if the power is cut off in the middle, new information can be added and recorded from the continuation of the information stored so far after the power is supplied.

When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt is generated for the CPU 261, and the CPU 261 transmits the role ratio data 264a, the continuous role ratio data 264b, the number of shot balls data 264c, and the game status data 264d recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 to the inspection device 300 in sequence. When transmitting each data 264a-d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 reads each piece of information recorded in each data 264a-d (including the recorded time information associated with each piece of information) in the order in which they were recorded, and transmits them to the inspection device 300. Simply connecting the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a generates an interrupt, and a process of transmitting each piece of information recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 to the inspection device 300 is executed, so that the transmission can be quickly executed and completed. Therefore, the inspection device 300 can analyze the ratio of reels and the ratio of consecutive reels from the information received from the pachinko machine 10, and can quickly and easily detect fraudulent activity from these ratios of reels and the ratio of consecutive reels.

Specifically, if the data to be transmitted to the inspection device 300 does not satisfy the upper limit number of recordable information (the above-mentioned specified number) set for each piece of data, the CPU 261 sequentially reads out the information recorded from the position where information was first written to the data to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written (i.e., the position where the information at the latest time is recorded) and transmits it to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, if the data to be transmitted to the inspection device 300 satisfies the upper limit number of recordable information (the above-mentioned specified number) set for each piece of data, the CPU 261 shifts the read out position by one, starting from the next position (i.e., the position where the information at the oldest time is recorded) indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written, and sequentially reads out the information recorded up to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written (i.e., the position where the information at the latest time is recorded), and transmits it to the inspection device 300. As a result, information is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest information.

The second reading and writing memory 264 is composed of a non-volatile memory, so even if the power is cut off midway, the second reading and writing memory 264 continues to record information related to the ratio of reels and the like in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the inspection device 300 can receive and analyze information related to the ratio of reels and the like, including information before the power was cut off.

Here, some cheaters try to increase the number of winning balls at the second starting hole 64b by fraudulently opening the electric device at the second starting hole 64b in some way or by guiding balls to the second starting hole 64b, thereby increasing the chances of winning the jackpot. Also, some cheaters try to win many winning balls by fraudulently opening the opening and closing plate at the large winning hole 65a in some way or by guiding balls to the large winning hole 65a. When such fraudulent behavior occurs, the device ratio and consecutive device ratio become high.

In response to this, in this pachinko machine 10, a bonus feature ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110, and the bonus feature ratio management chip 207 obtains winning information for each winning slot from the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, thereby calculating and continuously recording the bonus feature ratio and consecutive bonus feature ratio in the pachinko machine 10 at a predetermined timing. Then, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the bonus feature ratio and consecutive bonus feature ratio recorded in the bonus feature ratio management chip 207 are output to the inspection device 300. This makes it possible to discover any fraudulent activity by analyzing the bonus feature ratio and consecutive bonus feature ratio in the inspection device 300.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, information regarding the number of balls shot into the play area and information regarding the play status are also recorded in the feature ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300. Therefore, if the feature ratio and continuous feature ratio are found to be high through analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause can be identified based on the information regarding the number of balls shot into the play area and information regarding the play status.

The reel ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110 and is stored in one board box 100 together with the MPU 201, ROM 202, etc. This makes it difficult for a fraudster to alter the winning information, etc., input to the reel ratio management chip 207. It is also difficult to tamper with or erase the reel ratio and consecutive reel ratio recorded in the reel ratio management chip 207. This makes it possible to maintain a high level of reliability for the reel ratio and consecutive reel ratio calculated and output by the reel ratio management chip 207.

In addition, the role ratio management chip 207 is provided with a first reading/writing memory 263 and a second reading/writing memory 264, and the first reading/writing memory 263 counts the number of winning balls for each winning port, and calculates the role ratio and the continuous role ratio based on the number of winning balls for each winning port counted in the first reading/writing memory 263, and records them in the second reading/writing memory 264. Here, the second reading/writing memory 264 is composed of a non-volatile memory, but generally, non-volatile memory requires a large amount of power for writing, takes a long time to write, and has a limit on the number of times it can be written from the viewpoint of durability. In this embodiment, by separating the first reading/writing memory 263 composed of a volatile memory and the second reading/writing memory 264 composed of a non-volatile memory, first, the first reading/writing memory 263 is used to count and store the number of winning balls for each winning port at high speed, so that the balls that have won at each winning port can be counted without missing any. Then, later, by calculating the ratio of winning devices and the ratio of consecutive winning devices from the number of winning balls stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 at a specified timing (trigger), and recording the calculated ratio in the second reading/writing memory 264, the number of times data is written to the second reading/writing memory 264 can be reduced, thereby preventing the above-mentioned problems caused by using non-volatile memory from becoming apparent.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will continue. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. In addition, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is immediately executed as a process during a power outage.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched at intervals of approximately 0.6 seconds with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the audio output of the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the settings of the display mode of the effects performed by the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable effects and continuous preview effects.

The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, etc.

The audio and lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, it controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114, to change the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or to change the performance mode during a super reach.

When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that a rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Here, the rear image refers to an image displayed on the rear side of the third pattern, which is the main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

When the frame button 22 is operated for a purpose other than changing the stage, such as changing the presentation mode of a super reach, a frame button operation command is sent to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the frame button operation command, the display control device 114 displays an image corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 on the third pattern display device 81.

RAM 223 has a command memory area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and a fluctuation start flag (not shown) that indicates that a fluctuation performance should start when in the on state.

The command memory area is configured as a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 25) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area is read out from among the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes the command and performs processing according to the command.

The fluctuation start flag is initially set to off when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a stop type command output from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1005 in FIG. 25). It is then turned off when the fluctuation display setting is made in the third pattern display device 81 (see S1102 in FIG. 26).

The display control device 114 is a device that controls the screen display of the third pattern display device (LCD) 81, and controls various screen displays such as the changing display of the third pattern (changing presentation) and the jackpot presentation when a jackpot is hit, according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113 (main control device 110).

The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236 are connected to the output side of the input port 237. The image controller 236 is connected to the video RAM 234 and character ROM 235, and is also connected to the output port 238 via the bus line 240. The output side of the output port 238 is connected to the third pattern display device 81. In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different probability of winning a jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out per jackpot, there are models with the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third pattern display device 81 based on the display variable pattern command and various other commands output from the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the various programs are executed by the MPU 231.

The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores data (character information) for effects such as the designs (background design and third design) displayed on the third design display device 81 in a compressed format. The video RAM 234 is a memory that has an area (not shown) for storing multiple pieces of character information read from the character ROM 235 in a decompressed format to generate an image to be displayed on the third design display device 81, and a frame buffer area (not shown) for temporarily storing one frame of display data generated using at least a portion of the decompressed multiple pieces of character information until it is displayed.

The image controller 236 adjusts the timing of the MPU 231, video RAM 234, and output port 238 to mediate the reading and writing of data, and also reads out the display data stored in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the third pattern display device 81.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminals of the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC stabilized falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 18).

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 10 to 17. The processes of the MPU 201 can be broadly divided into start-up processes that are started when the power is turned on, main processes that are executed after the start-up processes, timer interrupt processes that are started periodically (every 2 millisecond period in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processes that are started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For ease of explanation, the timer interrupt processes and NMI interrupt processes will be described first, followed by the start-up processes and main processes.

Figure 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Timer interrupt processing is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. By executing this timer interrupt processing by the MPU 201, various processes that should be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, external output processing is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and main processing, commands to be sent to the dispensing control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, etc. are generated based on various processes, and temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203. In the external output process of S101, output data of commands, etc. stored in this command transmission ring buffer is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

For example, the reserved ball count command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 12) is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, confirmation command, etc. set in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 13) and the fluctuation start process (FIG. 14), which is one process of the fluctuation process, are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, a ball launch signal set when launching a ball in the process of S111 described below is sent to the launch control device 112.

Next, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then, in the case of a jackpot state, a large opening opening/closing process is executed to open or close the large winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 (S103). That is, the large winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the large winning opening 65a. Then, when either of these conditions is met, the large winning opening 65a is closed. This opening and closing of the large winning opening 65a is repeated a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the second symbol display device 83 executes a display control process for the second symbol (for example, a "circle" or "x" symbol) (S105). In simple terms, on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display of the second symbol. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in a winning state, the electric device associated with the second starting hole 64b is opened for a predetermined time.

Next, a switch reading process is executed (S106). That is, the state of the various switches 208 connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Also, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of won balls to be sent to the payout control unit 111 is set in a command sending ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control unit 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing that is executed next. Details of the switch reading process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 11.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (899, 99, 99, 198, and 250, respectively, in this embodiment), they are each cleared to 0. In addition, when the first hit random number counter C1 or the second hit random number counter C4 has completed one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 or the second hit random number counter C2, and the initial value is set to the first hit random number counter C1 or the second hit random number counter C2. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109), and then a start winning process associated with a win at either the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b is executed (S110). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 13, and details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 12.

After the start winning process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S111), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the ball launch is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. Then, when the ball launch is on, the ball launch signal information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to send the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Other processes (S112) include a process for judging whether the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state. For example, if the ball guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the ball fired into the play area) is not detected by the out switch 208f for a predetermined time or more despite the ball firing signal information being set in the process of S111, it is judged that there is an error state as there is a possibility of ball jamming. Also, if a payout abnormality signal is read in the process of S102, it is judged that there is an error state in the payout of the balls. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 is subjected to large vibrations or if it is judged that a magnet has been brought close to the pachinko machine 10, it is also judged that there is an error state as there is a possibility of cheating in the game.

Whether or not a large vibration has been applied to the pachinko machine 10 is determined by providing a vibration sensor in the pachinko machine 10 that detects vibrations, configuring the output of the vibration sensor to be input to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110, and reading the output of the vibration sensor during the processing of S112. Whether or not a magnet has been brought close to the pachinko machine 10 is determined by providing a magnetic sensor in the pachinko machine 10 that detects changes in magnetism, configuring the output of the magnetic sensor to be input to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110, and reading the output of the magnetic sensor during the processing of S112.

If it is determined in the process of S112 that an error state exists, an error command including information regarding the type of error is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203. As a result, the error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next. Then, a warning sound corresponding to the type of error can be output from the voice output device 226, the display lamp 34 can be turned on or blinked, and an image corresponding to the type of error can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, the switch reading process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 11. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing this switch reading process (S106).

In the switch reading process, first, the outputs of the first start port switch 208a, the second start port switch 208b, the first normal prize port switch 208c, the second normal prize port switch 208d, the large prize port switch 208f and the out switch 208g are read by referring to the start 1 port 205a, the start 2 port 205b, the normal 1 port 205c, the normal 2 port 205d, the large prize port port 205e and the out port 205f of the input/output port 205, and a determination is made as to whether or not a prize has been won in the first start port 64a, the second start port 64b, the first normal prize port 63a, the second normal prize port 63b and the large prize port 65a, and whether or not a ball has been guided to the ball discharge path, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved (S151). The determination of whether a ball has won and whether a ball has been guided to the ball discharge path is made over three timer interrupt processes based on the output of each switch 208a to 208f.

Next, if any of the first start port 64a, second start port 64b, first normal winning port 63a, second normal winning port 63b, and large winning port 65a is determined to have won a prize by the processing of S151 based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of balls won is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203 so that the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning port (i.e., the number specified by the prize ball number table 202e) is paid out (S152). As a result, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing that is executed next.

Then, based on the winning detection information, if any of the first start opening 64a, the second start opening 64b, the first normal winning opening 63a, the second normal winning opening 63b, and the large winning opening 65a is determined to have won by the processing of S151, the counter corresponding to the winning opening where a winning has occurred among the start 1 counter 203d, the start 2 counter 203e, the normal 1 counter 203f, the normal 2 counter 203g, and the large winning opening counter 203h is incremented by one, and if it is determined that a ball has been guided to the ball discharge path, the out counter 203i is incremented by one (S153).

Next, it is determined whether 0.5 seconds have passed since the winning information (the values of each counter 203d-i and information about the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10) was set in the previous bonus ratio management chip 207 (S154). As a result, if 0.5 seconds have not passed (S154: No), the switch reading process ends and returns to the timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that 0.5 seconds have passed (S154: Yes), the processes of S155 to S157 are executed. First, in the process of S155, the values of the Start 1 Counter 203d, Start 2 Counter 203e, Normal 1 Counter 203f, Normal 2 Counter 203g, and Big Win Counter 203h are treated as winning information, and the value of the Out Counter 203i is treated as out information, and these are set in the bonus ratio management chip 207 together with the game status of the pachinko machine 10 at that time (S155).

As a result, the value of the Start 1 counter 203d is set to the Start 1 buffer 262a of the feature ratio management chip 207, the value of the Start 2 counter 203e is set to the Start 2 buffer 262b of the feature ratio management chip 207, the value of the Regular 1 counter 203f is set to the Regular 1 buffer 262c of the feature ratio management chip 207, the value of the Regular 2 counter 203g is set to the Regular 1 buffer 262d of the feature ratio management chip 207, the value of the Big Winning Gate counter 203h is set to the Big Winning Gate buffer 262e of the feature ratio management chip 207, and the value of the Out counter 203i is set to the Out buffer 262f of the feature ratio management chip 207.

In this way, the counters 203d-203i continue to count the number of balls for 0.5 seconds, and when 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the values of the counters 203d-203h become winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i becomes out information, which are set together with information indicating the game status at that time in the bonus ratio management chip 207. That is, in this pachinko machine 10, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have won in each winning slot at 0.5 second intervals, and also counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game), and sets the counting results in the bonus ratio management chip 207. As described below, the bonus ratio management chip 207 accumulates these counted values for each value until it is time to calculate the bonus ratio, and counts the number of balls that have entered each winning slot for each winning slot from the time when the bonus ratio is calculated for the first time after the power is turned on, or from the time when the bonus ratio is calculated last time, until the time when the bonus ratio is calculated next time, and also counts the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game).

If the MPU 201 were not to count the number of balls that entered each winning slot or the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in a game), and instead the counting were to be done only by the bonus ratio management chip 207, the bonus ratio management chip would also have to monitor the winning balls that entered each winning slot and the balls that were guided to the ball discharge path at short intervals (e.g., every 2 milliseconds), which would increase the processing load and could result in increased power consumption.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the MPU 201 counts and sets these counting results in the bonus ratio management chip 207 at 0.5 second intervals, so that the bonus ratio management chip 207 counts the number of balls that have entered each winning slot for each winning slot every 0.5 seconds from when the power is turned on until the bonus ratio is calculated for the first time, or from when the bonus ratio was calculated last time until the bonus ratio is calculated next time, and also executes a process to count the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game). This makes it possible to suppress the processing load and power consumption in the bonus ratio management chip 207.

On the other hand, the MPU 201 counts the number of winning balls in each winning slot and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game) at 2 millisecond intervals when the timer interrupt process is executed, and monitors the winning balls in each winning slot and the balls guided to the ball discharge path. However, these monitoring processes are necessary for the main control of the game, such as the big win lottery and the prize ball judgment, and are originally processed at short time intervals of 2 milliseconds. In addition, since the launch interval of the balls launched into the game area by the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) in the pachinko machine 10 is about 0.6 seconds, the number of winning balls in each winning slot and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game), which are counted at 0.5 second intervals, is almost always 0 or 1 ball, or at most a few balls, so the amount of data required for the counters 203d to 203i provided in the RAM 203 may be small. This counting process can therefore prevent the capacity of RAM 203 from increasing. Therefore, there is no significant impact even if MPU 201 executes a process to count the number of balls that enter each winning port in 0.5 seconds for each winning port, and also to count the number of balls that are guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game).

The game status set by the processing of S155 includes, for example, a jackpot, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 being open, and an error. Whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open is determined by the MPU 201 referring to the door opening port 205g and checking the output of the door opening switch 208g.

Whether or not the game state is in an error state is based on the result determined by the processing of S112 of the timer interrupt processing. In the processing of S155, if it is determined in the processing of S112 that an error state is in effect, information indicating that the game state is in an error state is set in the role ratio management chip 207.

If the game state set by the processing of S155 includes a jackpot, jackpot information is stored in the jackpot buffer 262g, if the game state includes the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 being open, door open information is stored in the open buffer 262h, and if the game state includes an error, error information is stored in the error buffer 262i. Then, in the role ratio management chip 207, this information is finally recorded in the game state data 264d of the second reading and writing memory 264. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, information on the game state is transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with information on the role ratio. Therefore, when the inspection device 300 analyzes the role ratio of the pachinko machine 10 and finds an inexplicable trend in the role ratio, it can search for the cause by referring to the information indicating the game state.

After the processing of S155, an interrupt signal is sent to the bonus ratio management chip 207 (S156). Based on this interrupt signal, the bonus ratio management chip 207 executes the setting information reception process (see FIG. 19) described later, and based on the various information set in the buffer 262, counts the number of winning balls for each winning slot, counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., balls shot into the play area), and stores the number of balls in the first reading memory 263. At the same time, information regarding the play status of the pachinko machine 10 is also stored in the first reading memory 263.

After the process of S156, the start 1 counter 203d, start 2 counter 203e, normal 1 counter 203f, normal 2 counter 203g, and big prize counter 203h corresponding to each prize winning port, and the out counter 203i corresponding to the out switch 208f are initialized to 0 (S157), the switch reading process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. When these counters 203d to 203i are initialized to 0 by the process of S157, the number of balls that have won in each prize winning port in the next 0.5 seconds is counted by the counters 203d to 203h for each prize winning port, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game) is counted by the out counter 203i.

In the process of S154, if this process is executed for the first time after power is supplied to the main control device 110, it is assumed that 0.5 seconds have passed since the previous setting of winning information (values of each counter 203d-i and information on the game status of the pachinko machine 10) in the bonus ratio management chip 207 (S154: Yes), and the process proceeds to S155. As a result, the values of each counter 203d-203i in the RAM 203, which were detected before the power was cut off and were detected as the number of balls that had entered each winning slot or the number of balls that had been guided to the ball discharge path and were not set in the bonus ratio management chip 207 at the time of the power cut, can be set in the bonus ratio management chip 207 immediately after power is supplied, provided that they are retained during the power cut. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the bonus ratio management chip 207 from missing winning information or out information due to a power cut.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 12, the start winning process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110, will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S110). The start winning process determines whether a ball has entered either the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b (start winning), and if there is a start winning, executes a process to store (reserve) the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 in the reserved ball storage area 203b. It also executes a process to send the reserved values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 together with the number of reserved balls to the audio lamp control unit 113.

When the MPU 201 executes this start winning process, it first determines whether the ball has won (start winning) in the first start hole 64a or the second start hole 64b (S201). Here, the result of the presence or absence of winning in the first start hole 64a or the second start hole 64b, determined by the process of S151 of the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) based on the output signal of the first start hole switch 208a that detects winning in the first start hole 64a and the second start hole switch 208b that detects winning in the second start hole 64b, is used.

When it is determined that a ball has entered the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b (a start entry has occurred) (S201: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N for the variable performance reserved in the main control unit 110) is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S202). Then, if there is no entry into either the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b (S201: No), or if there is a entry into the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b but the number of reserved balls N is not less than 4 (S202: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, if there is a winning entry into the first start hole 64a or the second start hole 64b (S201: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N is less than 4 (S202: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved ball number N) is incremented by 1 (S203). Then, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7), and are reserved (stored) in the first winning random number counter storage area 203b1, the first winning type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variable type counter storage area 203b4, which correspond to the value indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a, among the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S204).

Specifically, if the value of reserved ball counter 203a after the addition in the process of S203 is "1", the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of reserved area 1. Also, if the value of reserved ball counter 203a after the addition is "2", the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of reserved area 2, if the value of reserved ball counter 203a after the addition is "3", the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of reserved area 3, and if the value of reserved ball counter 203a after the addition is "4", the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of reserved area 4.

Next, in order to send a reserved ball number command including the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition in the process of S203 (reserved ball number N) and the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 stored (reserved) in the reserved ball storage area 203b in the process of S204 to the voice lamp control device 113, the reserved ball number command is set in a command sending ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S205). As a result, the reserved ball number command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

By receiving the reserved ball count command, the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display the reserved ball count pattern corresponding to the reserved ball count N in the reserved ball count display area Db (see FIG. 4). The sound lamp control device 113 also uses the values of the counters C1-C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball count command to read ahead before a variable performance based on each value is executed, and determines what the variable performance will be (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what the variable time will be, etc.) before the variable performance is executed. Then, based on the results of this read-ahead determination, it is possible to decide whether to execute various types of performance.

The values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball count command in the processing of S205 may be the values read from the counter buffer in the processing of S204, or the values stored (reserved) in the reserved ball storage area 203b in the processing of S204 may be read.

When processing of S205 is completed, the process returns to timer interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 13, we will explain the variable processing (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing this variable processing (S109). The variable processing (S109) controls the variable display in the first pattern display device 37 and the variable presentation performed in the third pattern display device 81.

In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is currently being won (S301). The jackpot period includes the period during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and the period during a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. If the determination results in a jackpot (S301: Yes), this process ends.

If the jackpot is not being won (S301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is not changing (S302: No), it is then determined whether a predetermined time has passed since the changing display on the first pattern display device 37 stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not passed since the changing stopped (S303: No), this process is terminated. As a result, the stopped patterns in the changing performance are displayed on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 for only the predetermined time, so that the stopped patterns can be visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation was stopped (S303: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N of the fluctuation display held in the main control unit 110) is greater than 0 (S304). As a result, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) is not 0 (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start executing the fluctuation performance, and first the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) is decremented by 1 (S305). This is because the fluctuation start processing (S307) starts the execution of one of the reserved fluctuation performances, thereby decreasing the number of reserved balls by one.

Then, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S306). This data shift process shifts the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the reserved ball storage area 203b sequentially toward the reserved ball execution area 203c, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → reserved ball execution area 203c, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, and so on.

After the data shift process of S306, a change start process is executed for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the data shift process (S307), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 14.

In the process of S304, if it is determined that the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (reserved ball count N) is 0 (S304: No), it is determined whether or not a demo performance is being performed in the third pattern display device 81, i.e., whether or not a demo is in progress (S308). In this determination process, after a demo command is sent to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, it is determined that a demo is in progress until it is determined that the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (reserved ball count N) is greater than 0.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S308: No), a demo command to be sent to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S309: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S101 in FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it instructs the display control device 114 to display a demo performance on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, the demo command is set when there are no reserved balls when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped. Therefore, if the fluctuation display does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped, a demo performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined in the process of S308 that the demo is not in progress (S308: No), a process may be further executed to determine whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped, and if the second predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped, the process of S309 may be executed to set a demo command. In this way, if there are no reserved balls after the fluctuation has stopped, the stopped symbols of the stopped fluctuation performance can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demo performance.

In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S310). The display time during which the first pattern display device 37 is changing is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (S310: No), the display of the first pattern display device 37 is updated (S311) and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

In this embodiment, from the start of the change until the change time has elapsed, the display mode is set so that, for example, if the currently lit LED of the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37 is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on; if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on; if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The variation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED color were to be changed each time the variation process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in the LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in the LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the variation process is executed, and when the counter reaches 200, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the LED color is changed.

On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S310: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbol is set in advance by the variation start process (S307) described later with reference to FIG. 14. In the variation start process, whether or not there is a jackpot is determined according to the value of the first win random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the process of S306, and if there is a jackpot, the value of the first win type counter C2 determines whether there is a 15R probability jackpot (a probability jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with 15 rounds), a 2R probability jackpot (a probability jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with 2 rounds), or a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after a jackpot with 15 rounds).

In this embodiment, if a jackpot is followed by a 15R guaranteed jackpot, a blue LED is turned on, if a 2R guaranteed jackpot is turned on, a red LED is turned on, and if a 15R normal jackpot is turned on, both the red and blue LEDs are turned on. Also, if there is a miss, both the red and green LEDs are turned on. Note that the LEDs are turned off when the next variation display starts, but they may be turned on for only a few seconds after the variation stops.

When the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 corresponding to the stopping pattern is set in the processing of S312, a confirmation command is set (S313) to confirm and display the stopping pattern of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81 in synchronization with the lighting of the LED in the first pattern display device 37, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it instructs the display control device 114 to stop the variable display of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 and to confirm and display the stopping pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 14, the change start process (S307), which is one of the change processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S307). This change start process (S307) draws a lottery for a "jackpot" or a "miss" (jackpot lottery) based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, and determines the presentation pattern (change pattern) of the change presentation performed by the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81.

In the fluctuation start process, first, a jackpot lottery (win/lose determination) process is performed to determine whether or not there is a jackpot based on the value of the first win random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the jackpot random number table 202a (see Figure 8 (a)) (S401).

Whether or not there is a jackpot is determined based on the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 and its relationship to the mode at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the possible game states (modes) of the pachinko machine 10 are in a normal low probability state, "7, 307, 582" are specified as the jackpot random number values. Also, when the possible game states (modes) of the pachinko machine 10 are in a high probability state, "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" are specified as the jackpot random number values.

In the process of S401, the value of the first win random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match, it is determined that there is a jackpot. If it is determined that there is a jackpot as a result of the process of S401 (S401: Yes), the display mode at the time of the jackpot is set based on the value of the first win type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 8(b)) (S402).

In this process, the jackpot type table 202b determines the jackpot type associated with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, i.e., whether it is a 15R guaranteed jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, a 15R normal jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, or a 2R guaranteed jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (illumination state of LED 37a) at the time of a jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is set.

In addition, in order to stop displaying various jackpot patterns corresponding to the jackpot type on the third pattern display device 81, the display mode at the time of a jackpot on the third pattern display device 81 is set by setting the jackpot type (15R special jackpot, 2R special jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) as the stop type.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the jackpot is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, the variation time until the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are stopped and displayed in the display mode at the time of the jackpot is determined. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the jackpot, first, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 8(c)) to be used is selected according to the number of reserved balls at that time indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a. Then, if a 15R sure-variable jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected in the "15R jackpot common" group of the selected jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. That is, in this case, one of the variation A, variation B, and variation C is selected.

In addition, if the jackpot type is set to 2R sure-variable jackpot in the processing of S402, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected in the "2R sure-variable jackpot only" group in the selected jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. In this embodiment, in this case, only 2R variation is selected. Note that the relationship between the variation pattern (Variation A, Variation B, Variation C, 2R variation) and the variation time is specified in advance by a table or the like.

On the other hand, if the process of S401 determines that the jackpot is not a jackpot (S401: No), the display mode for when the ball is lost is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the losing symbol, and the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to one of the following: front/rear miss reach, front/rear non-miss reach, or complete miss, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. In this embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type differs depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

Next, the variation pattern for the loss is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, the variation time until the loss symbol is displayed is determined in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. At this time, if the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal low probability state other than the time-saving state, the loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 8(d)) corresponding to the number of reserved balls at that time indicated by the reserved ball counter 203a is selected. Also, if the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state or a high probability state during a certain probability period, the loss (probability variable) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 8(e)) corresponding to the number of reserved balls at that time indicated by the reserved ball counter 203a is selected.

If a complete miss is set as the stop type in the processing of S404, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected in the "complete miss only" group of the selected variation pattern table for misses (normal) 202d2 or variation pattern table for misses (high probability) 202d3. That is, in this case, variation D or variation E is selected.

In addition, if the stop type is set to front/rear miss reach or front/rear non-miss reach in the processing of S402, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected in the "reach common" group of the selected fluctuation pattern table for miss (normal) 202d2 or fluctuation pattern table for miss (probable hit) 202d3. That is, in this case, fluctuation A, fluctuation B, or fluctuation C is selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time, which is previously specified by a table or the like.

In the process of S406, a variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern via the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern determined by the processes of S403 and S405 (S406). In addition, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S402 or S404 via the voice lamp control device 113 (S415), and the process returns to the variation process. These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) that is executed next. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command or stop type command, it generates a display variation pattern command or display type command based on the command and transmits it to the display control device 114.

Figure 15 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The NMI interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt process stores information about the power outage in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The MPU 201 then interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power outage information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power outage information (S501), and ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 213. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control currently being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 16, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the main control unit 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control units (peripheral control units such as the voice lamp control unit 113 and the dispensing control unit 111) to become operable (S602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S604), and if it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process proceeds to S614. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S605), and if it is not stored (S605: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, the process proceeds to S614.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S605: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S606). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S607: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of the power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process also proceeds to S614.

As will be described later in the process of S706 in FIG. 17, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in a working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S614, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S614). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 203, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S615, S616).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S615, S616) is executed. Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S615, S616) is executed. In the RAM initialization process (S615, S616), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S615), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S616). After the RAM 203 initialization process is executed, the process proceeds to S610.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), power outage information is stored (S605: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S607: Yes), the power outage information is cleared (S608) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Then, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power was cut off (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S610, an initialization signal is sent to the reel ratio management chip 207 (S610). As a result, upon receiving the initialization signal, the reel ratio management chip 207 executes an initial setting process such as initializing the buffer 262 and the first read/write memory 263 to all 0 (S711 in FIG. 18), and initializes the reel ratio management chip 207 so that it can manage reel ratios.

Next, the information in the prize ball count table 202e is sent to the bonus feature ratio management chip 207 (S611). As a result, in the bonus feature ratio management chip 207, the prize ball count table 202e is set in the prize ball count data setting area 265a, and the bonus feature ratio and consecutive bonus feature ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated based on the number of prize balls that would be awarded to each winning slot indicated by the prize ball count table 202e if a prize were awarded to each winning slot.

Here, the number of prize balls awarded when each winning slot wins is determined by the model of the pachinko machine, and conventionally, this information is stored in ROM 202. Each time power is supplied, information on the number of prize balls is sent to the bonus ball ratio management chip 207 from the prize ball number table 202e stored in ROM 202, and set in the bonus ball number data setting area 265a of the bonus ratio management chip 207. This eliminates the need to store information on the number of prize balls that differs for each model in the ROM of the bonus ratio management chip 207 during the manufacturing stage. This simplifies the manufacture of the bonus ratio management chip 207. Also, when the model of the pachinko machine is different, it is only necessary to change the ROM 202, and the bonus ratio can be accurately calculated even if the same bonus ratio management chip 207 is used between different models of pachinko machines.

Then, the information of the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the reel ratio management chip 207 (S612). As a result, in the reel ratio management chip 207, the trigger information data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b, and when the timing (trigger) for calculating the reel ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f arrives, the reel ratio and continuous reel ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated.

Here, since there is a physical limit to the memory capacity of the feature ratio management chip 207 that can record information related to the feature ratio, it is preferable that the timing (trigger) of calculating the feature ratio is determined by taking into consideration the probability of a big win and the probability of a special bonus in the pachinko machine 10, rather than being fixed by the feature ratio management chip 207. As in the present pachinko machine 10, trigger information data 202f that specifies the timing of calculating the feature ratio determined by taking into consideration the probability of a big win and the probability of a special bonus in the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the ROM 202, and the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the feature ratio management chip 207 from the ROM 202 each time power is supplied, so that the feature ratio management chip 207 can calculate the feature ratio and the consecutive feature ratio at a timing that matches the probability of a big win and the probability of a special bonus in the pachinko machine 10, and record the calculated ratio in the second reading and writing memory 264.

After processing in S612, interrupts are permitted (S613). Then, the process proceeds to the main processing described below.

Next, referring to FIG. 16, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned startup processing will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is broadly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main process, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S701). If information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (S701: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 and the power supply is not interrupted. In such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S702, S703).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S702). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment), the counter is cleared to 0. The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated in the same manner as in the processing of S108 (see FIG. 10) (S703), and the processing proceeds to S701.

While this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 10 is started and executed at a predetermined time interval (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during a jackpot, the opening and closing of the jackpot opening 65a is controlled, and if a ball passes through the through gate 67, the display of the second pattern by the second pattern display device 83 is controlled. In addition, in the jackpot lottery executed when starting the variable display on the first pattern display device 37, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the acquired first jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether the state is high probability or low probability. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process changes depending on the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes depending on the state of the game at each time.

The above-mentioned processes of S702 and S703, which are part of the main process, are executed within the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. In other words, the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed using this remaining time, so that the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, it is possible to provide randomness to the update of the first hit random number counter C1 and the second hit random number counter C2, which use these as the initial values for update.

In the process of S701, if the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701: Yes), the power is cut off due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 15 is executed, so the process at the time of power cut from S704 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S704), a power cut command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113), and power cut information is sent to the role ratio management chip 207 (S705). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (S706), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S707), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 203.

The processing of S701 is executed at the end of one cycle of the processing of S702 and S703, which are performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing. As a result, in the main processing of the main control unit 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing are completed, and the power outage occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when the updating of each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is completed. Therefore, when recovering from a power-off state, the processing can be started from the processing of S701 after the start-up processing is completed. In other words, the processing can be started from the processing of S701, just as when initialization is performed during the start-up processing.

Therefore, in processing when the power is cut off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 do not need to be saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer saved; instead, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting process (S601), and processing can start from S701. As a result, the control burden on the main control unit 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control unit 110 malfunctioning or going out of control.

In this embodiment, the case has been described where the processes to be executed periodically are executed by timer interrupt processing, and the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated in the main processing during the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing, but some or all of the processes executed by the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed every predetermined time (e.g., every 2 milliseconds) in the main processing. For example, some or all of the prize ball count signal, payout abnormality signal reading process (S102), large opening opening/closing process (S103), second pattern control process (S105), and switch reading process (S106) executed by the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main processing, rather than by timer interrupt processing.

In this case, a step may be provided in the main processing to determine whether a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed, and the processing to be performed at the predetermined time is executed only if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, and the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is executed regardless of whether the predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is executed in the remaining time of the processing to be executed at the predetermined time, but since the time required to execute the processing to be executed at the predetermined time changes depending on the state of the game, even with this configuration, each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 can be updated randomly.

Next, the control processes executed by the CPU 261 in the bonus ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to Figures 18 to 22. The processes of the CPU 261 can be broadly divided into a bonus ratio management main process that is started when the power is turned on, a setting information reception process that is executed based on an interrupt signal received from the MPU 201 after winning information and the like is set by the MPU 201, and an inspection result output process that is executed based on the connection of the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a.

First, referring to FIG. 18, the main process of the reel ratio management executed by the CPU 261 in the reel ratio management chip 207 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing this main process of the reel ratio management. This main process of the reel ratio management is started when power is supplied to the reel ratio management chip 207.

When the reel ratio management main process is executed, it is first determined whether an initialization signal has been received from the MPU 201 (S710). As long as it is determined that an initialization signal has not been received (S710: No), the determination of S710 is continued. Then, if it is determined that an initialization signal has been received (S710: Yes), the process proceeds to S711, where initial settings are performed (S711). As a result, the reel ratio management chip 207 waits until at least the initialization of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 is complete and the MPU 201 is ready to start controlling the game, before executing the initial settings of the reel ratio management chip 207.

In the initial setting of S711, when the operation of the feature ratio management chip 207 is started, the necessary initialization is performed for each device in the feature ratio management chip 207. For example, the buffer 262 and the first read/write memory 263 are all initialized to 0. As a result, even if there is a buffer in the buffer 262 that is not set by the MPU 201 for each of the buffers 262a to 262i, meaningless data can be suppressed from remaining in the buffer, and the meaningless data can be prevented from being stored in the first read/write memory 263. In addition, the first read/write memory 263 can cumulatively count the number of balls that have entered each winning hole and the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls that have been shot into the play area) from the time when power is supplied to the feature ratio management chip 207 until the time when the feature ratio is calculated, and can also store information regarding the game state during that time.

Next, it is determined whether or not information on the prize ball count table 202e has been received from the MPU 201 (S712). If not (S712: No), the process of S712 is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information has been received (S712: Yes), the received prize ball count table 202e is set in the prize ball count data setting area 265a (S713). As a result, the prize ball count table 202e is set in the prize ball count data setting area 265a in the prize ball ratio management chip 207, and the prize ball ratio and consecutive prize ball ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated based on the number of prize balls when each winning slot indicated by the prize ball count table 202e is won.

Next, it is determined whether or not trigger information data 202f has been received from the MPU 201 (S714). If not (S714: No), the process of S714 is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined that the trigger information data 202f has been received (S714: Yes), the received trigger information data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b. As a result, when the timing (trigger) for calculating the role ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b arrives in the role ratio management chip 207, the role ratio and continuous role ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated.

In this way, only the prize ball number table 202e and trigger information data 202f transmitted during the start-up process (so-called boot process) executed by the MPU 201 when the main control device 110 is powered on are configured to be set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a and trigger setting area 265b. This prevents fraudsters from setting false prize ball number tables and trigger information data in the prize ball number data setting area 265a and trigger setting area 265b.

Next, when the processes of S710 to S715 are completed, interrupt permission is set (S716). As a result, when an interrupt signal transmitted after the winning information, etc. is set by the MPU 201 is received thereafter, the setting information receiving process is executed, and the inspection result output process is executed by the interrupt signal generated based on the connection of the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a.

If an interrupt signal is input at the same time, the setting information reception process is executed with priority over the inspection result output process. This allows the latest winning information, out information, and information on the game status input from the MPU 201 to be accumulated and stored in the role ratio management chip 207, and then information on the role ratio, etc. can be sent to the inspection device 300, so that the inspection device 300 can perform analysis including the latest information. On the other hand, if an interrupt signal is input at the same time, the inspection result output process may be executed with priority over the inspection device output process. In this case, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, information on the role ratio, etc. can be sent to the inspection device 300.

Next, it is determined whether or not power-off information has been received from the MPU 201 (S717), and S717 is continued unless power-off information is received (S717: No). During that time, if the CPU 261 receives an interrupt signal from the MPU 201, it executes a setting information reception process in priority to the process of S717, and if it receives an interrupt signal generated based on the connection of the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a, it executes an inspection result output process.

If power-off information is received as a result of the processing of S717 (S717: Yes), the power to the main control device 110 (reel ratio management chip 207) is cut off due to a power outage or the like. In this case, the reel ratio calculation process is executed (S718), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process can no longer be executed. Details of the reel ratio calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21.

Next, the setting information reception process executed by the CPU 261 in the bonus ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to Figures 19 and 20. Figure 19 is a flow chart showing this setting information reception process. This setting information reception process is executed based on an interrupt signal received from the MPU 201 after winning information and the like are set by the MPU 201.

The setting information reception process is a process in which the winning information (values of the Start 1 Counter 203d, Start 2 Counter 203e, Normal 1 Counter 203f, Normal 2 Counter 203g, and Big Win Counter 203h) set in each buffer 262a to 262e by the MPU 201, the out information (value of the Out Counter 203i) set in the out buffer 262f, and the game status set in each buffer 262g to 262i are stored in the first reading memory 263. In addition, when it is time to calculate the ratio of the reel, the reel ratio and the consecutive reel ratio are calculated based on the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263, and the calculated ratio is recorded in the second reading memory 264 together with the number of balls fired and data on the game status.

First, refer to FIG. 19. In the setting information reception process, it is first determined whether or not there is door open information in the open buffer 262h (S720). If there is door open information in the open buffer 262h (S720: Yes), the door open information is set (added and stored) in the open data 263h together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S721).

If it is determined by the process of S720 that there is no door open information in the open buffer 262h (S720: No), and after the process of S721, it is then determined whether there is error information in the error buffer 262i (S722). If there is error information in the error buffer 262i (S722: Yes), the error information is set (added and stored) in the error data 263i together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S723).

If it is determined by the process of S722 that there is no error information in the error buffer 262i (S722: No), and after the process of S723, it is then determined whether the current time indicated by the RTC 266 is in the late night hours (between midnight and 6:00 a.m.) (S724). Since the late night hours are usually outside business hours, the fact that an interrupt signal was sent from the MPU 201 during this late night hours and this setting information receiving process was executed may suggest that some kind of fraudulent activity was performed during the late night hours. Therefore, if it is determined by the process of S724 that it is in the late night hours (S724: Yes), in order to leave a record of this fact, the after-hours information is set (added and stored) in the after-hours data 264j together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S725).

If it is determined by the process of S724 that it is not a late night time period (S724: No), and after the process of S725, it is then determined whether or not there is jackpot information in the jackpot buffer 262g (S726). If there is jackpot information in the jackpot buffer 262g (S726: Yes), the jackpot information is set (added and stored) in the jackpot data 263g together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S727).

If it is determined by the processing of S726 that there is no jackpot information in the jackpot buffer 262g (S726: No), and after the processing of S727, the values set in the buffers 262a to 262f corresponding to each winning slot and out switch 208f are added to the corresponding counters 263a to 263f of the first reading and writing memory 263 (S728).

Specifically, the value set in the Start 1 buffer 262a corresponding to the first start port 64a (i.e., the number of balls that entered the first start port 64a in 0.5 seconds) is added to the Start 1 counter 263a. As a result, the number of balls that entered the first start port 64a is accumulated in the Start 1 counter 263a. The value set in the Start 2 buffer 262b corresponding to the second start port 64b (i.e., the number of balls that entered the second start port 64b in 0.5 seconds) is added to the Start 2 counter 263b. As a result, the number of balls that entered the second start port 64b is accumulated in the Start 2 counter 263b.

The value set in the normal 1 buffer 262a corresponding to the first normal winning port 63a (i.e., the number of balls that won the first normal winning port 63a in 0.5 seconds) is added to the normal 1 counter 263a. As a result, the number of balls that won the first normal winning port 63a is accumulated in the normal 1 counter 263a. The value set in the normal 2 buffer 262b corresponding to the second normal winning port 63b (i.e., the number of balls that won the second normal winning port 63b in 0.5 seconds) is added to the normal 2 counter 263b. As a result, the number of balls that won the second normal winning port 63b is accumulated in the normal 2 counter 263b. The value set in the large winning port buffer 262e corresponding to the large winning port 65a (i.e., the number of balls that won the large winning port 65a in 0.5 seconds) is added to the large winning port counter 263e. This causes the number of balls that have entered the special prize opening 65a to be accumulated in the special prize opening counter 263e.

The counters 263a-264f and data 263g-264j of the first reading/writing memory 263 are initialized to 0 in the initial setting process (see FIG. 18) that is executed when power is supplied to the reel ratio management chip 207, and in S744 (see FIG. 21) that is executed when it is time to calculate the reel ratio, which will be described later. As a result, the first reading/writing memory 263 will again temporarily store, while accumulating, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 until it is time to calculate the reel ratio again.

Next, the explanation of the setting information winning process will be continued with reference to FIG. 20. After the process of S728, the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is referred to (S729). Then, if the trigger (timing) for calculating the role ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is the "number of shots" (S729: "number of shots"), it is determined whether the value of the out counter 263f (i.e., the number of balls shot into the play area) is equal to or greater than the "predetermined number of balls" (set value) included in the trigger information data 202f (S730). If the value of the out counter 263f is equal to or greater than the "predetermined number of balls" (S730: Yes), it is determined that it is time to calculate the role ratio, and the role ratio calculation process is executed (S733), and the process proceeds to S734. Details of the role ratio calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21. On the other hand, if the value of the out counter 263f is not equal to or greater than the "predetermined number of balls" (S730: No), the process proceeds directly to S734.

By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the feature ratio based on the number of balls fired, it is possible to calculate the feature ratio and consecutive feature ratio when a certain number of balls have been fired. This makes it possible to calculate the feature ratio and consecutive feature ratio at the stage when many balls have entered various winning slots and winning balls have been drawn, allowing for the calculation of average feature ratios and consecutive feature ratios. This makes it possible to eliminate fluctuations in feature ratios and consecutive feature ratios over a short period of time during normal play, making it easier for the inspection device 300 to analyze fraudulent activity.

In the process of S729, if the trigger (timing) for calculating the role ratio indicated in the trigger information data 202f is "time" (S729: "time"), it is determined whether the current time indicated by the RTC 266 has reached the "predetermined time" (set value) included in the trigger information data 202f (S731). Here, "reached" includes not only the case where the current time indicated by the RTC 266 matches the "predetermined time", but also the case where the "predetermined time" has been passed for the first time.

If the process of S731 determines that the current time indicated by the RTC 266 has reached the "predetermined time" (S731: Yes), it is determined that it is time to calculate the reel ratio, and the reel ratio calculation process is executed (S733) and the process proceeds to S734. On the other hand, if the current time indicated by the RTC 266 has not reached the "predetermined time" (S731: No), the process proceeds directly to S734.

By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the feature ratio based on the current time, the feature ratio and consecutive feature ratio can be reliably calculated at the arrival of a predetermined time even in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is not often played. Therefore, the reliably calculated feature ratio and consecutive feature ratio can allow the inspection device 300 to reliably analyze whether or not there is any fraudulent activity.

In the process of S729, if the trigger (timing) for calculating the role ratio indicated in the trigger information data 202f is "play time" (S729: "play time"), it is determined whether the cumulative time (play time) during which the player has played on the pachinko machine 10 has reached or exceeded the "predetermined time" included in the trigger information data 202f (S732).

Here, the play time can be calculated, for example, by the following method. That is, a play time counter is provided in the first read/write memory 263. The play time counter, like other counters and data stored in the first read/write memory 263, is initialized to 0 in the initial setting process (see FIG. 18) executed when power is supplied to the role ratio management chip 207, and in S744 (see FIG. 21) described later executed when it is time to calculate the role ratio. Then, in the setting information reception process, the value of the out buffer 262f is checked, and if a value of 1 or more is set, it means that a ball guided to the ball discharge path has been detected, that is, a ball has been released into the play area, so the play time counter is incremented by 1. The setting information reception counter is activated by an interrupt signal transmitted from the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals. Therefore, the play time can be calculated by accumulating 0.5 seconds to the value of the play time counter.

If it is determined by the processing of S732 that the game time is equal to or longer than the "predetermined time" (S732: Yes), it is determined that it is time to calculate the role ratio, and the role ratio calculation process is executed (S733) and the process proceeds to S734. On the other hand, if the game time is less than the "predetermined time" (S731: No), the process proceeds directly to S734.

The role ratio and consecutive role ratio are originally calculated by performing a test firing test of game balls for 10 hours. By specifying the trigger (timing) for calculating the role ratio based on the playing time, the role ratio management chip can calculate the role ratio and consecutive role ratio that are close to the original definition, so that the inspection device 300 can perform analysis using the role ratio and consecutive role ratio that are close to the original definition.

In the process of S734, all buffers 262 are initialized to 0 (S734). As a result, even if there is a buffer that is not set for each of buffers 262a to 262i when the winning information, out information, and game information are next set by the MPU 201, it is possible to prevent meaningless data from remaining in the buffer, and to prevent the meaningless data from being stored in the first reading and writing memory 263. After the process of S734, the setting information reception process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 21, the role ratio calculation process (S718, S733) executed by the CPU 261 in the role ratio management chip 207 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this role ratio calculation process. The role ratio calculation process is a process for calculating the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio from the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 and recording them in the second reading/writing memory 264, and is executed when the timing (trigger) for calculating the role ratio occurs (see FIG. 20), and is also executed when the power is cut off (see FIG. 18).

In the reel ratio calculation process, first, the reel ratio is calculated from the values of the counters 263a to 263f stored in the first reading/writing memory 263, and is added to the reel ratio data 264a together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 and recorded (S740). Next, the continuous reel ratio is calculated from the values of the counters 263a to 263f stored in the first reading/writing memory 263, and is added to the continuous reel ratio data 264b together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 and recorded (S741).

The ratio of the special feature and the ratio of the consecutive special features are calculated as follows. That is, the number of balls that have entered the first start port 64a indicated by the start 1 counter 263a stored in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls that have entered the second start port 64b indicated by the start 2 counter 263b, the number of balls that have entered the first normal winning port 63a indicated by the normal 1 counter 263c, the number of balls that have entered the second normal winning port 63b indicated by the normal 2 counter 263d, and the number of balls that have entered the large winning port 65a indicated by the large winning port counter 263e are multiplied by the number of prize balls associated with each winning port indicated in the prize ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and the number of balls paid out to each winning port in association with the winning of that winning port is calculated. Then, by adding these up, the total number of balls paid out to the player is calculated.

Then, the ratio of the sum of the number of balls paid out in association with winning the second start opening 64b and the number of balls paid out in association with winning the large winning opening 65a to the total number of balls paid out to the player is calculated to calculate the ratio of the number of balls paid out in association with winning the large winning opening 65a to the total number of balls paid out to the player, thereby calculating the ratio of the consecutive winning balls.

Normally, the feature ratio and continuous feature ratio refer to the above ratio when a test firing test of game balls is conducted for 10 hours, but in this embodiment, for each timing (trigger) at which the feature ratio is calculated, indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b, the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out in conjunction with winning into the second starting port 64b and the large prize port 65a to the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player from the time the power is turned on until that timing is reached for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing, is calculated as the feature ratio, and is recorded in the feature ratio data 264a together with the time at that time. In addition, the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out as a result of winning into the large prize opening 65a to the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player from when the power is turned on until the first time that timing is reached, or from the previous timing to the current timing, is calculated as the continuous feature ratio, and is recorded in the continuous feature ratio data 264b together with the time at that time.

Even if the power is cut off, the power stored in the capacitor 267 is used to calculate the role ratio and consecutive role ratio based on the number of balls (prize balls) paid out during the period from the timing (trigger) for calculating the most recent role ratio until it is determined that the power is cut off, and these are recorded together with the time in the role ratio data 264a or consecutive role ratio data 264b. As a result, after the role ratio and consecutive role ratio are calculated and recorded, the role ratio and consecutive role ratio can be calculated without omission even for the number of prize balls paid out before the power is cut off.

Next, the value of the out counter 263f, which indicates the total number of balls shot into the play area, is added to the shot ball count data 264c together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 and recorded (S742). Furthermore, the various jackpot information, door open information, error information, and out-of-hours information stored in the jackpot data 263g, open data 263h, error data 263i, and out-of-hours data 263j, and the times associated with each piece of information (the times the information was stored) are arranged (sorted) from the oldest information first, and added to the play status data 264d and recorded (S743).

In the processing of S743, for example, if jackpot information is stored in jackpot data 263g at intervals of less than one second, this means that jackpots are occurring consecutively as a gaming state, so only the oldest jackpot information and its time are recorded in gaming state data 264d. Similarly, for door open information, error information, and after-hours information, if each piece of information is stored in each data 263h-j at intervals of less than one second, only the oldest information and its time are recorded in gaming state data 264d. This makes it possible to keep the storage capacity required for gaming state data 264d small.

As described above, when the reel ratio management chip 207 receives winning information, out information, and information regarding the game status from the MPU 201, it accumulates and temporarily stores this information in the first read/write memory 263, and each time the timing (trigger) for calculating the reel ratio occurs, it calculates the reel ratio and continuous reel ratio based on the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 and adds and records it in the second read/write memory 264. This makes it possible to manage reel ratios, etc. with a small memory capacity and send information regarding the reel ratios, etc. to the inspection device 300.

In addition, the second reading memory 264 also stores the time when the ratio of the reel and the ratio of the consecutive reel are recorded in the second reading memory 264. In addition, the second reading memory 264 records not only the ratio of the reel and the ratio of the consecutive reel, but also information indicating the total number of balls shot into the play area together with the time when the information is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and further, information on the play state (jackpot information, door open information, error information, out of hours information) is stored in the second reading memory 264 together with the time when each information is stored in the first reading memory 263. Therefore, if the ratio of the reel or the ratio of the consecutive reel has changed significantly as a result of analyzing the ratio of the reel and the ratio of the consecutive reel in the inspection device 300, the cause of the change in the ratio of the reel or the ratio of the consecutive reel can be found by analyzing the total number of balls shot into the play area and the play state around the time when the ratio of the reel or the ratio of the consecutive reel is recorded in the second reading memory 264.

Here, the information on the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, and total number of balls shot into the play area that can be recorded in the role ratio data 264a, consecutive role ratio data 264b, and number of shot balls data 264c is each limited to a predetermined number (e.g., 1024). In addition, the total number of winning information, door open information, error information, and out-of-time information that can be recorded in the game status data 264d is also limited to a predetermined number (e.g., 16384). If a predetermined number of pieces of information have already been recorded in the role ratio data 264a, consecutive role ratio data 264b, number of shot balls data 264c, or game status data 264d, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is recorded in its place.

Specifically, the continuous feature ratio data 264b, the number of balls fired data 264c, and the game status data 264d are each configured as a ring buffer, and a memory is provided for each ring buffer to manage the position where information is written. Each time information is written, the writing position is shifted by one, thereby realizing a process in which the oldest information is erased and the latest information is recorded in its place.

In this way, by setting an upper limit on the amount of information that can be recorded for each data, it is possible to prevent the storage capacity of the second reading and writing memory 264 from increasing. Furthermore, when the amount of information that can be recorded for each data reaches the upper limit, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is recorded, allowing the inspection device 300 to perform analysis, including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10.

After the processing of S743, the first reading/writing memory 263 is initialized to all 0 (S744). As a result, the first reading/writing memory 263 will again temporarily store, while accumulating, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 until the next time the role ratio is calculated.

When processing of S744 is completed, the reel ratio calculation process is terminated.

Next, the inspection result output process executed by the CPU 261 in the role ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing this inspection result output process. This inspection result output process is executed based on an interrupt signal input to the CPU 261 when the connector of the cable connecting the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a is inserted. In the inspection result output process, the data in the second reading/writing memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300.

When the inspection result output process is executed, first, all the role ratios recorded in the role ratio data 264a and the time at which each role ratio was recorded in the second reading memory 264, which is associated with each role ratio, are output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest role ratio recorded (S751).

Specifically, if the upper limit (predetermined number) of information that can be recorded is not met in the reel ratio data 264a, the CPU 261 sequentially reads out the reel ratio information recorded from the position where the reel ratio information was first written in the reel ratio data 264a to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (i.e., the position where the reel ratio information at the latest time is recorded), and transmits it to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, if the upper limit (predetermined number) of information that can be recorded is met in the reel ratio data 264a, the CPU 261 shifts the read out position one by one in order from the next position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (i.e., the position where the reel ratio information at the oldest time is recorded), and sequentially reads out the information recorded up to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (i.e., the position where the reel ratio information at the latest time is recorded), and transmits it to the inspection device 300. As a result, the reel ratio information is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest information.

Next, all the consecutive role ratios recorded in the consecutive role ratio data 264b and the time at which each consecutive role ratio was recorded in the second reading and writing memory 264, which is associated with each consecutive role ratio, are output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest role ratio recorded (S752).

Specifically, if the continuous role ratio data 264b does not satisfy the upper limit (predetermined number) of recordable information, the CPU 261 sequentially reads out the continuous role ratio information recorded in the continuous role ratio data 264b from the position where the continuous role ratio information was first written to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (i.e., the position where the continuous role ratio information at the latest time is recorded), and transmits it to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, if the continuous role ratio data 264b satisfies the upper limit (predetermined number) of recordable information, the CPU 261 shifts the readout position one by one in order from the next position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (i.e., the position where the continuous role ratio information at the oldest time is recorded), and sequentially reads out the information recorded up to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (i.e., the position where the continuous role ratio information at the latest time is recorded), and transmits it to the inspection device 300. As a result, the continuous role ratio information is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest information.

Next, information regarding the number of balls (number of fired balls) fired into all play areas recorded in the fired ball count data 264c, and the time at which the information on the number of fired balls was recorded in the second reading memory 264, which is associated with the information on each number of fired balls, are output to the inspection device 300 in order of the ratio of features recorded oldest first (S753).

Specifically, if the number of shot balls data 264c does not meet the upper limit (predetermined number) of recordable information, the CPU 261 sequentially reads out the information on the number of shot balls recorded from the position where the information on the number of shot balls was first written in the number of shot balls data 264c to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (i.e., the position where the information on the number of shot balls at the latest time is recorded), and transmits it to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, if the number of shot balls data 264c meets the upper limit (predetermined number) of recordable information, the CPU 261 shifts the read out position by one, starting from the next position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (i.e., the position where the information on the number of shot balls at the oldest time is recorded), and sequentially reads out the information recorded up to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (i.e., the position where the information on the number of shot balls at the latest time is recorded), and transmits it to the inspection device 300. As a result, the information on the number of shot balls is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest information.

Next, all jackpot information, door open information, error information, and out-of-hours information recorded in the game status data 264d, as well as the time when the information was stored in the first reading memory 263, which is associated with each piece of information, are output to the inspection device 300 in order starting with the oldest piece of information (S754).

Specifically, if the upper limit (predetermined number) of recordable information is not met in the game status data 264d, the CPU 261 sequentially reads out information recorded from the position where information was first written in the game status data 264d to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written (i.e., the position where the information at the latest time is recorded) and transmits it to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, if the upper limit (predetermined number) of recordable information is met in the game status data 264d, the CPU 261 sequentially reads out information recorded up to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written (i.e., the position where the information at the latest time is recorded) by shifting the read out position by one, starting from the next position indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written (i.e., the position where the information at the latest time is recorded), and transmits it to the inspection device 300. As described above, in the game status data 264d, each piece of information related to the game status is arranged (sorted) from the oldest information and recorded in the game status data 264d. Therefore, information about the game status will be output to the inspection device 300 in order starting from the oldest time.

By processing S751 to S754, each piece of information is output in order from the oldest to the newest, so the inspection device 300 can easily analyze the changes over time in the ratio of reels, the ratio of consecutive reels, the number of balls fired, and the game state by analyzing each piece of information in the order in which it was output.

After processing S754, the test result output process ends.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, the main control device 110 is provided with a feature ratio management chip 207, which obtains winning information from the MPU 201 and calculates and records the feature ratio and consecutive feature ratio in the feature ratio management chip 207. Then, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the information relating to the feature ratio and consecutive feature ratio recorded in the feature ratio management chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300.

Here, some cheaters try to increase the number of winning balls at the second starting hole 64b by fraudulently opening the electric device at the second starting hole 64b in some way or by guiding balls to the second starting hole 64b, thereby increasing the chances of winning the jackpot. Also, some cheaters try to win many winning balls by fraudulently opening the opening and closing plate at the large winning hole 65a in some way or by guiding balls to the large winning hole 65a. When such fraudulent behavior occurs, the device ratio and consecutive device ratio become high.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 is configured as described above, so that by analyzing the ratio of reels and the ratio of consecutive reels in the inspection device 300, it is possible to detect any fraudulent activity that may be occurring.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, information regarding the number of balls shot into the play area and information regarding the play status are also recorded in the feature ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300. Therefore, if the feature ratio and continuous feature ratio are found to be high through analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause can be identified based on the information regarding the number of balls shot into the play area and information regarding the play status.

The reel ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110 and is stored in one board box 100 together with the MPU 201, ROM 202, etc. This makes it difficult for a fraudster to alter the winning information, etc., input to the reel ratio management chip 207. This makes it possible to maintain high reliability for the reel ratio and continuous reel ratio calculated and output by the reel ratio management chip 207.

In addition, instead of having the MPU 201 manage the ratio of the reels, etc., a dedicated reel ratio management chip 207 is provided to manage the ratio of the reels, etc., which prevents the MPU 201 from increasing its processing load and allows the MPU 201 to focus on the main control of the game.

The bonus feature ratio management chip 207 is provided with a prize ball number data setting area 265a, and when power is supplied, the bonus feature ratio management chip 207 sets the prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 in the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and calculates the bonus feature ratio and the consecutive bonus feature ratio using the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a. This eliminates the need to store information on the number of prize balls, which differs for each model, in the ROM of the bonus feature ratio management chip 207 during the manufacturing stage. This simplifies the manufacture of the bonus feature ratio management chip 207. In addition, if the model of the pachinko machine is different, it is sufficient to change the ROM 202, and the bonus feature ratio can be accurately calculated even if the same bonus feature ratio management chip 207 is used between different models of pachinko machines.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to Figures 23 to 27. The processes of the MPU 221 are broadly divided into start-up processes that are started when the power is turned on, and main processes that are executed after the start-up processes.

First, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was started during the power-off processing of S915 (see FIG. 24) due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (S802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S912 in FIG. 24), it executes the power-off processing of S915. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of S915 is in progress can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S802: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing of S915 was completed, or the process was started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been corrupted (S803).

The confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of S806. Therefore, the data stored in that specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, but conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S803: Yes), the process proceeds to S804, and initialization of RAM 223 begins. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S803: No), the process proceeds to S808.

If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 has been destroyed (S803: Yes) and the process proceeds to S804. On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the power cut process of S915 is completed, or if the startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so the data in RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S803: No) and the process proceeds to S808.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S802: Yes), this startup process was started after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of S915 was in progress. In this case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct, since the power-off processing is in progress. Therefore, in this case, control cannot continue, so the process proceeds to S804, and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In the process of S804, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (S804). The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of the RAM 223 (S805: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S806). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data destruction has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of the RAM 223 (S805: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S807) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S808, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S915 is executed (see S914 in FIG. 24). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S915 is executed, so the process of S808 will be reached with the power-off flag on if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of S915 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S808: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared (S809) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S810), interrupt permission is set (S811), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the working area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, when the power-off flag is off and S808 is reached, the process goes from S804 to S806 and reaches S808 because the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or the process was started because only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S808: No), S809, which is the process of clearing the working area of RAM 223, is skipped and the process proceeds to S810, where the initial values of RAM 223 are set (S810), interrupt permission is set (S811), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S809 is that when the process proceeds from S804 to S806 and then to S808, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S804, and when only MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, control of voice lamp control device 113 can be continued by storing the data in the working area of RAM 223 without clearing it.

Next, referring to FIG. 22, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the processing of S901 was executed last time (S901), and if 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S901: No), the processing of S902 to S908 is not executed and the processing proceeds to S910. The reason for determining whether or not 1 millisecond has passed in the processing of S901 is that, while S902 to S908 do not need to be executed in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), the variable display processing of S910 and the command determination processing of S911 are processes that are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S911 at short intervals, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control device 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S910 at short intervals, it is possible to set up the variable performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination process.

If it is determined in the process of S901 that one millisecond or more has passed since the process of S901 was last executed (S901: Yes), the process proceeds to S902. Note that if the process of S901 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 21, the process proceeds directly to S902.

In the process of S902, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S903 to S911 are sent to the display control device 114 (S902). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set to the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S906 described later (S903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S904). The power-on notification process notifies the user that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. In addition, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify the user that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S905 without notifying the user by the power-on notification process.

Next, a frame button input monitoring/effect process is executed (S905). This frame button input monitoring/effect process monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and sets up a corresponding effect when input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period when the change performance is not being executed or during a high-speed change period, a process to change the stage is performed, and a back image change command is set for the display control device 114 instead of the frame button operation command. By including information regarding the type of back image corresponding to the changed stage in this back image change command, the display control device 114 performs a process to change the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. In addition, when a preview character appears at the start of the change display, pressing the frame button 22 can display the expected value of a jackpot due to this change, or pressing the frame button 22 during a reach performance can change the performance to one that gives a sense of expectation for a jackpot, or the frame button 22 can be used as a decision button to select one of multiple reach performances. Note that if the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S905 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process (S905) is completed, then the lamp editing process is executed (S906), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S907). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing S907, the LCD performance execution management process is executed (S908). In the LCD performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S906 is executed based on the time set in this LCD performance execution monitoring process, and the sound editing/output process of S907 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. After processing S908, the process moves to S910.

In the processing of S910, in order to display a variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, a variable display process is executed, which is a process of generating a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 and setting up to send the command to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26. Then, after the variable display process, a command determination process is executed (S911) in which processing is performed according to the command received from the main control device 110. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

When the processing of S911 is completed, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the work RAM 233 (S912). Information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored when a power outage command is received from the main control unit 110. If information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the processing of S912 (S912: Yes), both the power outage flag and the power outage processing in progress flag are turned on (S914), and the power outage processing is executed (S915). After the power outage processing is executed, the power outage processing in progress flag is turned off (S916), and the processing then loops infinitely. In the power outage processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. The stored information on the occurrence of a power outage is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the process of S912 (S912: No), it is determined whether or not RAM 223 has been corrupted based on the keyword stored in RAM 223 (S913), and if RAM 223 has not been corrupted (S913: No), the process returns to S901 and the main process is executed repeatedly. On the other hand, if RAM 223 has been corrupted (S913: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

If it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process will not be executed, and the display on the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. This allows the player to know that an abnormality has occurred, and he or she can call a hall staff member or the like to have the pachinko machine 10 repaired. Furthermore, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S911) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S911). This command determination process (S911) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1001). Then, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S1001: Yes), a variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1002), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is used in the variation display process described below (see FIG. 26) when setting a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control unit 114 of the start of the variation performance and its variation pattern.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1001: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1003). If it is determined that a stop type command has been received (S1003: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1004), the fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S1005), and the process returns to the main processing.

The stop type command is a command that is always sent by the main control device 110 after the main control device 110 sends a variation pattern command when starting a variation presentation, as a command indicating the stop type of the variation presentation whose variation pattern is indicated by the variation pattern command. By setting the variation start flag to on by the processing of S1005, in the variation display processing that is executed later, a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command that notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern and stop type are generated based on the variation pattern extracted from the previously received variation pattern command and the stop type extracted from the stop type command, and processing is executed to send these to the display control device 114.

If it is determined as a result of the processing of S1003 that a stop type command has not been received (S1003: No), then it is determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1006). Then, if it is determined that a reserved ball number command has been received (S1006: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110 contained in the reserved ball number command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the reserved variable performance) is extracted and stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control unit 113 (S1007).

The reserved ball count command is sent from the main control unit 110 when a ball enters either the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b (start winning), so each time there is a start winning, the value of the reserved ball count stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control unit 113 can be adjusted to the value of the reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control unit 110 by the processing of S1007. Therefore, even if the value of the reserved ball count of the voice lamp control unit 113 deviates from the value of the reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control unit 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., when the start winning is detected, the value of the reserved ball count counter 223a of the voice lamp control unit 113 can be corrected to match the value of the reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control unit 110.

Next, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 contained in the received reserved ball count command are extracted and stored in the RAM 223 (S1008).

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball count command are obtained from the counter buffer in the main control unit 110 when the balls enter the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b (start entry). The voice lamp control unit 113 is able to execute pre-reading processing by referencing the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the RAM 223. In other words, it is able to determine before the execution of the reserved variable performance what the result of the variable performance will be when it is executed (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what the variable time will be, etc.), and decide to execute various types of performances.

Next, a display reserved ball count command is set (S1009) to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball count value stored in RAM 223 by the processing of S1007, and the process returns to the main processing. The display reserved ball count command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing. As a result, the display control device 114 executes processing to cause the third pattern display device 81 to display a reserved ball count pattern corresponding to the reserved ball count.

If it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1006 (S1006: No), then it is determined whether or not a confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1010). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable performance being executed on the third pattern display device 81. If it is determined that this confirmation command has been received (S1010: Yes), a display confirmation command for notifying the display control device 114 of the reception of the confirmation command is set (S1011), and the process returns to the main processing. The display confirmation command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main processing. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display confirmation command, the variable performance being executed on the third pattern display device 81 is stopped, and the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type previously indicated by the display stop type command is displayed, thereby causing the confirmation display.

If it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1010 (S1010: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and processing corresponding to the received command is executed (S1012), and the process proceeds to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command to be used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is executed, and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command to be used by the display control device 114, the command is set so that the command is sent to the display control device 114. The demo command received from the main control device 110 is set as a display demo command by the processing of S1013, temporarily stored in a command sending ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing.

Next, the variable display process (S910) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this variable display process (S910).

This variable display process (S910) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, is a process that generates a display variable pattern command and a display stop type command based on the variable pattern command and stop type command received from the main control device 110 in order to display a variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, and sets these commands to be sent to the display control device 114.

In the fluctuation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag stored in RAM 223 is on (S1101). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (i.e., it is off) (S1101: No), since a stop type command has not been received from the main control unit 110, the fluctuation display process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S1101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1102), and the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation performance extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the processing of S1002 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 25) is obtained from the RAM 223 (S1103). The fluctuation pattern extracted here is the fluctuation time. In the voice lamp control device 113, multiple detailed fluctuation patterns are prepared for each fluctuation time, and one detailed fluctuation pattern is determined by lottery from the multiple detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for the extracted fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), and a display fluctuation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the determined detailed fluctuation pattern (S1104).

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is then transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. Upon receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern variation display device 81 displays the third pattern variation in the detailed variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command.

Next, the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command in the processing of S1004 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 23) is obtained from the RAM 223 (S1105). Then, a display stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the extracted stop type (S1104). The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in a command sending ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing. When the display control device 114 is to confirm and display the variable performance executed by the display variable pattern command set in the processing of S1105, it sets a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command.

Next, as the reserved balls are consumed (i.e., the variable display corresponding to the reserved balls is set) in accordance with the setting of the display variable pattern command, the reserved ball count value in RAM 223 is decremented by 1 (S1107), and a reserved ball count command for display is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated reserved ball count value (S1108). Then, the process returns to the main process.

The reserved ball count command set by the processing of S1108 is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing. The display control device 114 executes processing to cause the third pattern display device 81 to display a number of reserved ball number symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the reserved ball number command for display. Thus, the player can recognize the number of reserved balls by counting the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, referring to FIG. 27, the various controls executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processes of the MPU 231 are broadly divided into main processing, which is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing, which is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and V interrupt processing, which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 236 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of a command or the detection of a V interrupt signal. Note that if the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, referring to FIG. 27(a), the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 27(a) is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is started when the power is turned on, and continues to be executed until the power is turned off.

When the power is turned on and the MPU 231 executes the main processing, first, an initial setting process is executed (S1401). Specifically, first, the MPU 231 is initialized, and the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 235 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the video RAM 234. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 234, and the extracted character information is written in a frame buffer area prepared in an area of the video RAM 234 different from the area in the video RAM 234 where the decompressed character information is stored. In addition, other settings necessary for initialization are performed.

When the initial setting process is completed, interrupt permission is then set (S1402), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after interrupt permission is set by the process of S1402, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to FIG. 27(b), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 27(b) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored sequentially in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1501), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described below, and processing according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to FIG. 27(c), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 27(c) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is identified, and the image controller 236 is instructed to draw and display the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 236 is detected. This V interrupt signal is generated in the image controller 236 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 236 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the image controller 236 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process of the image is completed, so it is possible to prevent starting to draw a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 27(c), first, a command determination process (S1602) is executed. In this command determination process (S1602), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. For example, if a display variation pattern command has been stored, control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the variation performance is executed by the third pattern display device 81 according to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern table command.

If a display stop type command has been stored, the third pattern being displayed is replaced during high speed fluctuation (while the third pattern is being displayed so that the content of the third pattern cannot be recognized by the player) so that the variable performance executed by the third pattern display device 81 is stopped and displayed with the stop pattern indicated by the display stop type command. If a display confirmation command has been stored, image drawing and display are controlled so that a confirmed display is performed in the variable performance executed by the third pattern display device 81.

Now, in this command determination process (S1602), all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable performance, it is highly likely that a display variable pattern command, a stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 and other performances, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that state is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

When the command determination process (S1602) is completed, a display setting process (S1603) is then executed. In the display setting process (S1603), the content of one frame of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is specifically identified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 determined by the command determination process (S1602) etc.

After the display setting process (S1603) is executed, task processing is then executed (S1064). In this task processing, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third display device 281, as specified by the display setting process (S1603), the type of characters (sprites, displayed objects) that make up the image are identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each character (sprite).

Then, the drawing process is executed (S1504). In this drawing process, the types of various characters that make up one frame and the parameters required for drawing each character, which were determined in the task process (S1503), are sent to the image controller 236. As a result, the image controller 236 executes the image drawing process according to this information, and controls the transmission of the image data to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal so that the image drawn according to the information received 1V ago is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

After that, other necessary processing, such as updating various counters provided in the display control device 114, is performed (S1505), and the V interrupt processing is terminated.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the main control device 110 is provided with a feature ratio management chip 207, which obtains winning information from the MPU 201 and calculates and records the feature ratio and consecutive feature ratio in the feature ratio management chip 207. Then, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the information related to the feature ratio and consecutive feature ratio recorded in the feature ratio management chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300.

Here, some cheaters try to increase the number of winning balls at the second starting hole 64b by fraudulently opening the electric device at the second starting hole 64b in some way or by guiding balls to the second starting hole 64b, thereby increasing the chances of winning the jackpot. Also, some cheaters try to win many winning balls by fraudulently opening the opening and closing plate at the large winning hole 65a in some way or by guiding balls to the large winning hole 65a. When such fraudulent behavior occurs, the device ratio and consecutive device ratio become high.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 is configured as described above, so that by analyzing the ratio of reels and the ratio of consecutive reels in the inspection device 300, it is possible to detect any fraudulent activity that may be occurring.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, information regarding the number of balls shot into the play area and information regarding the play status are also recorded in the feature ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300. Therefore, if an analysis by the inspection device 300 indicates that the feature ratio and continuous feature ratio are high, the cause can be identified based on the information regarding the number of balls shot into the play area and information regarding the play status.

Next, referring to Figures 28 to 30, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the timing for calculating the role ratio is reached, the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio are calculated based on the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263, and the values are recorded in the second reading memory 264. In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the trigger (timing) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, the values of the counters 263a to 263e recorded in the first reading memory 263 are recorded as they are in the second reading memory 264, and the values of the counters 263a to 263e recorded in the second reading memory 264 are output to the inspection device 300 as they are.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals as in the first embodiment, and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Figure 28 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. The electrical configuration of the main control device 110 of the second embodiment differs from that of the first embodiment in that the second read/write memory of the reel ratio management chip 207 records winning counter data 264e instead of the reel ratio data 264a and consecutive reel ratio data 264b of the first embodiment.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the meaning of the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is different from that in the first embodiment. That is, in the second embodiment, the trigger information data 202f indicates a trigger (timing) for recording the values of each of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 in the second reading/writing memory 264. Note that only the meaning of the trigger information data 202f is different from that in the first embodiment, and the content itself is the same as in the first embodiment.

In other words, the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating either the "number of shots," "time," or "play time" as a trigger (timing) for recording the values of each counter 263a to 263e stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 in the second reading/writing memory 264.

When the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating the "number of shots," it also specifies information indicating the "predetermined number of balls" that is the timing for calculating the ratio of the bonus items. For example, if the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating the "number of shots" and information indicating 500 balls as the "predetermined number of balls," the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 are recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 each time the number of shots reaches 500 balls.

When the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating "time", it also specifies information indicating a "predetermined time" that is the timing for calculating the role ratio. For example, if the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating "time" and information indicating 12:00, 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00 as the "predetermined times", the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 are recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 at the timings of 12:00, 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00.

When trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating "play time", it also specifies information indicating a "predetermined time" that is the timing for calculating the role ratio. For example, if trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating "play time" and information indicating two hours as the "predetermined time", the values of counters 263a to 263e stored in first reading memory 263 are recorded in second reading memory 264 every time two hours of play time have elapsed.

The winning counter data 264e is data recorded, for each timing (trigger) at which the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 are recorded in the second reading memory 264, including the total number of balls that have entered the first starting port 64a counted by the first 1 counter 263a of the first reading memory 263, the total number of balls that have entered the second starting port 64b counted by the first 2 counter 263b, the total number of balls that have entered the first normal winning port 63a counted by the normal 1 counter 263c, the total number of balls that have entered the second normal winning port 63b counted by the normal 2 counter 263d, and the total number of balls that have entered the large winning port 65a counted by the large winning port counter 263e, together with the time at which they are recorded.

The total number of balls that have entered each winning slot from the time the power is turned on until the timing is reached for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing, is indicated by the counters 263a-263e corresponding to each winning slot. When the time comes to record the values of each counter 263a-263e stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 to the second reading/writing memory 264, the value of each counter 263a-263e at that time is recorded in the winning counter data 264e together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266.

The winning counter data 264e may be associated with a single time and record the total number of balls that have won the first starting gate 64a, the total number of balls that have won the second starting gate 64b, the total number of balls that have won the first regular winning gate 63a, the total number of balls that have won the second regular winning gate 63b, and the total number of balls that have won the large winning gate 65a at that time.

The winning counter data 264e may also be configured to include an area for recording the total number of balls that have entered the first starting port 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls that have entered the second starting port 64b, an area for recording the total number of balls that have entered the first normal winning port 63a, an area for storing the total number of balls that have entered the second normal winning port 63b, and an area for recording the total number of balls that have entered the large winning port 65a. When the timing (trigger) for recording the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 to the second reading memory 264 occurs, the winning port counter data 264e may be configured to record the total number of balls that have entered the corresponding winning port for each area together with the time at that timing.

Here, the information on the total number of balls that have won each winning port that can be recorded in the winning counter data 264e is limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). For example, when the winning counter data 264e is configured to record the total number of balls that have won the first starting port 64a, the total number of balls that have won the second starting port 64b, the total number of balls that have won the first normal winning port 63a, the total number of balls that have won the second normal winning port 63b, and the total number of balls that have won the large winning port 65a at one time in association with one time, if a predetermined number of pieces of information have already been recorded in the winning counter data 264e, the information of the oldest time is erased and the latest information is recorded there. For example, the winning counter data 264e can be configured like a ring buffer, a memory that manages the position where information is written on the ring buffer is separately prepared, and the writing position is shifted by one each time information is written, thereby erasing the oldest information and recording the latest information there. In this way, by setting an upper limit on the amount of information that can be recorded in the winning counter data 264e, it is possible to prevent the storage capacity of the second reading and writing memory 264 from increasing. Furthermore, when the amount of information recorded in the winning counter data 264e reaches the upper limit, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is recorded, allowing the inspection device 300 to perform an analysis, including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10.

When the winning counter data 264e is configured by providing an area for recording the total number of balls that have entered the first starting port 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls that have entered the second starting port 64b, an area for recording the total number of balls that have entered the first normal winning port 63a, an area for storing the total number of balls that have entered the second normal winning port 63b, and an area for recording the total number of balls that have entered the large winning port 65a, a ring buffer may be configured for each area, and an upper limit may be set for the amount of information that can be recorded in each area, and the above control may be performed. In this way, when the amount of information to be recorded in each area reaches the upper limit, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is recorded, allowing the inspection device 300 to perform analysis, including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10.

When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt is generated for the CPU 261, and the CPU 261 transmits the winning counter data 264e, the number of shot balls data 264c, and the game status data 264d recorded in the second reading and writing memory 264 to the inspection device 300 in that order. When transmitting each piece of data 264e, 264c, and 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 reads each piece of information recorded in each piece of data 264e, 264c, and 264d (including the recorded time information associated with each piece of information) in the order in which they were recorded, and transmits them to the inspection device 300.

Specifically, if the data to be transmitted to the inspection device 300 does not satisfy the upper limit number of recordable information (the above-mentioned specified number) set for each piece of data, the CPU 261 sequentially reads out the information recorded from the position where information was first written to the data to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written (i.e., the position where the information at the latest time is recorded) and transmits it to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, if the data to be transmitted to the inspection device 300 satisfies the upper limit number of recordable information (the above-mentioned specified number) set for each piece of data, the CPU 261 shifts the read out position by one, starting from the next position (i.e., the position where the information at the oldest time is recorded) indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written, and sequentially reads out the information recorded up to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written (i.e., the position where the information at the latest time is recorded), and transmits it to the inspection device 300. As a result, information is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest information.

In addition, if the winning counter data 264e is configured with an area for recording the total number of balls that have entered the first starting gate 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls that have entered the second starting gate 64b, an area for recording the total number of balls that have entered the first normal winning gate 63a, an area for storing the total number of balls that have entered the second normal winning gate 63b, and an area for recording the total number of balls that have entered the large winning gate 65a, by reading out the information for each area as described above, the total number of balls that have entered each winning gate will be output to the inspection device 300 in order starting from the oldest time information.

Next, referring to FIG. 29, the winning information storage process (S718, S733) executed by the CPU 261 in the role ratio management chip 207 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this winning information storage process. In the first embodiment, when the timing (trigger) for calculating the role ratio is reached (see FIG. 20) or when the power is cut off (see FIG. 18), a role ratio calculation process is executed in which the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are calculated from the information stored in the first reading memory 263 and recorded in the second reading memory 264 (see FIG. 21). In the second embodiment, when the timing (trigger) for recording each information stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264 is reached (see FIG. 20) or when the power is cut off (see FIG. 18), instead of the role ratio calculation process, a winning information storage process is executed. This winning information storage process is a process for recording each information stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264.

In the winning information storage process, first, the values of each counter 263a to 263e corresponding to the winning slots stored in the first reading and writing memory 263 are combined with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 and added to the winning counter data 264e in the second reading and writing memory 264 and recorded (S761). As a result, for each winning timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b, the total number of balls that have entered the first starting port 64a counted by the start 1 counter 263a of the first reading memory 263, the total number of balls that have entered the second starting port 64b counted by the start 2 counter 263b, the total number of balls that have entered the first normal winning port 63a counted by the normal 1 counter 263c, the total number of balls that have entered the second normal winning port 63b counted by the normal 2 counter 263d, and the total number of balls that have entered the large winning port 65a counted by the large winning port counter 263e are additionally recorded in the second reading memory 264 during the period from when the power is turned on until the first time that timing is reached, or between the previous timing and the current timing.

In addition, even if the power supply is cut off, the power stored in the capacitor 267 is used to additionally record in the second reading memory 264 the total number of balls that have entered the first starting port 64a counted by the start 1 counter 263a of the first reading memory 263, the total number of balls that have entered the second starting port 64b counted by the start 2 counter 263b, the total number of balls that have entered the first normal winning port 63a counted by the normal 1 counter 263c, the total number of balls that have entered the second normal winning port 63b counted by the normal 2 counter 263d, and the total number of balls that have entered the large winning port 65a counted by the large winning port counter 263e, during the period when it is determined that the power supply is to be cut off from the timing (trigger) of the most recent recording to the second reading memory 264. This allows the total number of winning balls that have won at each winning slot to be recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 for each winning slot, without missing any winning balls that have won at each winning slot between the timing (trigger) of the most recent recording in the second reading/writing memory 264 and the time when it is determined that the power will be turned off.

Then, in steps S742 to S744, the same processing as steps S742 to S744 of the role ratio calculation processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 21) is executed, and the winning information storage processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 30, the inspection result output process executed by the CPU 261 in the role ratio management chip 207 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing this inspection result output process. As in the first embodiment, this inspection result output process is executed based on an interrupt signal input to the CPU 261 when the connector of the cable connecting the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a is inserted. In the inspection result output process, data in the second reading/writing memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300.

When the inspection result output process in the second embodiment is executed, first, the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a is output to the inspection device 300 (S771). Next, all information indicating the total number of winning balls at each winning slot recorded in the winning counter data 264e, together with the time at which the information was recorded in the second reading memory 264, which is associated with each piece of information, is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest recorded information (S772). In S753 and S754, which are executed following the process of S772, the same processes as S753 and S754 in the inspection result output process in the first embodiment are executed, and the inspection result output process is terminated.

The inspection device 300 calculates the ratio of winning devices and the ratio of consecutive winning devices based on the information indicating the total number of winning balls at each winning slot output in S772 and the winning ball number table 202e output in S771, and analyzes the calculated ratio of winning devices and the ratio of consecutive winning devices. If the analysis by the inspection device 300 indicates that the ratio of winning devices and the ratio of consecutive winning devices are high, the cause can be found based on the information on the number of balls shot into the play area and the information on the play status. In addition, the processing of S772 outputs the information indicating the total number of winning balls at each winning slot in order from the oldest to the newest, so the inspection device 300 can easily analyze the change in the ratio of winning devices and the ratio of consecutive winning devices over time by analyzing each piece of information in the order in which it was output.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the role ratio management chip 207, each time the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f stored in the trigger setting area 265b occurs, the values of the counters 263a to 263e that count the total number of winning balls for each winning slot stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 are sequentially recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading/writing memory 264. Then, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the information indicating the total number of winning balls for each winning slot recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading/writing memory 264 is sent to the inspection device 300 together with the prize ball number table 202e.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the total number of balls that have entered each winning slot is calculated for each winning slot and recorded in the second reading and writing memory 264. Therefore, compared to the first embodiment, in which the calculated role ratio and consecutive role ratio are recorded in the second reading and writing memory 264, the storage capacity required for the second reading and writing memory 264 is larger, but since the total number of winning balls for each winning slot is transmitted to the inspection device 300, if the analysis by the inspection device 300 reveals a large change in the role ratio or consecutive role ratio, the inspection device 300 can refer to the total number of winning balls for each winning slot to more accurately determine the cause.

In addition, the information indicating the total number of balls that entered each winning slot, which is sent to the inspection device 300, is associated with the time at which the information was recorded in the second reading and writing memory 264, and is sent to the inspection device 300. Therefore, in the inspection device 300, if the result of analyzing the role ratio and consecutive role ratio based on the information indicating the total number of balls that entered each winning slot shows a large change in the role ratio or consecutive role ratio, the time at which the total number of balls that entered each winning slot used to calculate the changed role ratio or consecutive role ratio was recorded in the second reading and writing memory 264 is identified, and the total number of balls that entered each winning slot, the total number of balls that were shot into the play area, or the play state around that time is analyzed, and the cause of the change in the role ratio or consecutive role ratio can be found.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can provide the same effects as those obtained by that configuration.

Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Figures 31 to 34. In the pachinko machines 10 according to the first and second embodiments, a role ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110, and the role ratio management chip 207 is used to manage information relating to role ratios in the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment uses the MPU 201 to manage information relating to role ratios. The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment also has a role ratio display device 400, and displays information relating to role ratios on the role ratio display device 400.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first or second embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first or second embodiment are given the same reference numerals as those of the first or second embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 31 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machines 10 of the first and second embodiments in that the configuration of the main control device 110 is different. The rest of the configuration is the same as the pachinko machine 10 of the first and second embodiments.

As described above, the main control device 110 of the third embodiment does not have a reel ratio management chip 207, and the management of information related to reel ratios is performed by the MPU 201. Specifically, the reel ratio management main process executed by the CPU 261 of the reel ratio management chip 207 of the first or second embodiment is executed in a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201. At this time, the counters and data stored in the first reading and writing memory 263 of the reel ratio management chip 207 are stored in the RAM 203 in the third embodiment.

The second read/write memory 264 provided in the role ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110, connected to the input/output port 205. In the third embodiment, the RTC 266 provided in the role ratio management chip 207 in the first and second embodiments is an RTC built into the MPU 201 (not shown).

Furthermore, the inspection terminal 207a to which the inspection device 300 is connected is connected to the input/output port 205. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a via a cable and connector, the MPU 201 executes the inspection result output process, and information regarding the role ratio and other information regarding the inspection is sent to the inspection device 300.

The role ratio display device 400 is also connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110. This role ratio display device 400 is, for example, composed of multiple 7-segment displays, and is disposed on the main board that constitutes the main control device 110. In other words, it is assembled so that the display screen of the role ratio display device 400 can be seen when looking at the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. It should be noted that it may also be assembled so that the display screen of the role ratio display device 400 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

The role ratio display device 400 displays the role ratio, the consecutive role ratio, or information related to the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio (for example, base value, etc.). The information on the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio displayed on the role ratio display device 400 may be, for example, information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning for each winning port, or information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning in all winning ports, the total number of balls paid out by winning in the winning ports where the role is activated (the second start port 64b and the large winning port 65a), and the total number of balls paid out by winning in the winning port where the role is activated continuously (the large winning port 65a). In addition, information indicating the total number of balls fired into the play area (the number of fired balls) may be included in the information on the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio displayed on the role ratio display device 400. Instead of a seven-segment display, the role ratio display device 400 may be configured with a liquid crystal display with a specified number of pixels, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, or the like, and the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, or information related to the role ratio and consecutive role ratio may be displayed on it.

The MPU 201 has a built-in ROM 202 and RAM 203, as well as multiple registers 200 that store various data at the level closest to the ALU (Arithmetic Logic Unit), which is the heart of the MPU 201. The multiple registers 200 include various registers such as general-purpose registers that are used in a variety of situations without a specific purpose, such as temporarily holding values during calculations or storing memory addresses required for processing, and accumulator registers that accumulate and sum up the results of ALU calculations.

The multiple registers 200 also include a flag register 200a (also called a status register) that is composed of flags indicating overflow due to ALU operations and flags indicating the state of an interrupt. Due to the nature of the register, the contents of the flag register 200a can be updated each time an instruction is executed.

The RAM 203 is provided with an area 203x within the used area and an area 203y outside the used area, each of which is provided with a work area (inner work area 203x1, outer work area 203y1) and a stack area (inner stack area 203x2, outer stack area 203y2).

This is because, when the MPU 201 is configured to perform the main control of the game while also managing information related to the ratio of roles, it is necessary to prevent the various counters and data stored in the RAM 203 and used for the main control of the game from being accidentally destroyed by the various counters and data stored in the RAM 203 and used for managing information related to the ratio of roles. In other words, the various counters and data used for the main control of the game must be protected as a priority in order to protect the interests of the player. In addition, data saved in the stack area of the RAM 203 when performing the main control of the game must also be protected reliably so that the main control of the game can be continued without problem again after processing related to the management of information related to the ratio of roles has been performed midway.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 stores various counters and data used for the main control of the game in the inner working area 203x1 of the area within the use area 203x, and also evacuates data that should be saved to the stack area when performing the main control of the game to the inner stack area 203x2 of the area within the use area 203x. On the other hand, the MPU 201 stores various counters and data used for managing information related to the role ratio in the outer working area 203y1 of the area outside the use area 203y, and also evacuates data that should be saved to the stack area when managing information related to the role ratio to the outer stack area 203y2 of the area outside the use area 203y. This ensures that the various counters and data used for the main control of the game and the data saved to the stack area when performing that control are protected.

Next, referring to FIG. 32, a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment is shown. The timer interrupt processing is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. The MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt processing, thereby performing various processes that should be executed periodically.

In this timer interrupt process, first, a game process that mainly controls the game is executed (S2001). For example, the processes such as S101 to S111 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 described in the first embodiment are executed in the process of S2001. That is, the main control of the game includes the lottery for a big win, the setting of the variable display, the opening and closing control of the big winning opening (large opening) 65a at the time of a big win, and the lottery for a win of the second symbol display device 83. As described above, while executing the process of S2001, the MPU 201 uses the area 203x (the inner working area 203x1 and the inner stack area 203x2) in the used area in the RAM 203.

Next, a role ratio process is executed to manage information related to the role ratio (S2002). Details of the role ratio process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. After the process of S2002, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

In this way, in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, the game processing is performed first, and then the role ratio processing is performed, so that the main game control, which is an important control, is executed with priority.

Next, referring to FIG. 33, the details of the role ratio processing (S2002) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the role ratio processing. In this role ratio processing, first, interrupts are prohibited (S2011), then the flag register 200a is saved to the internal stack area 203x2 with a PUSH command (S2012), and then a subroutine program that executes the role ratio main processing is read with a CALL command, and the role ratio main processing is executed (S2013). Details of the role ratio main processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. Note that in the processing stages of S2011 and S2012, the MPU 201 executes the processing using the area 203x in the usage area of the RAM 203.

When the processing of S2013 ends and the subroutine program of the role ratio main processing returns to this role ratio processing, the flag register 200a saved in the internal stack area 203x2 is restored by a POP command (S2015), an interrupt is permitted (S2016), and then the role ratio processing ends. Note that the MPU 201 also executes the processing of S2015 and S2016 using the area 203x in the used area of the RAM 203.

In addition, in the process of S2012, the flag register 200a may be saved to the internal work area 200x1 using a load (LD) command, and in the process of S2014, the flag register 200a saved to the internal work area 200x1 may be restored using a load (LD) command.

Next, referring to FIG. 34, the details of the role ratio main processing (S2013) that is executed by reading a subroutine program by the role ratio processing (S2002) (see FIG. 33) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the role ratio main processing.

In the role ratio main processing, first, a load (LD) command is used to set the stack pointer (not shown) of the MPU 201 to the start position of the outer stack area 203y2 (S2021). As a result, in subsequent processing, data is saved to the outer stack area 203y2. In addition, after this processing, the MPU 201 uses the outer work area 203y1 as the work area of the RAM 203. In other words, the MPU 201 uses the outer work area 203y1 to store various counters and data, and also uses the outer stack area 203y2 as necessary.

Next, the registers 200 (excluding the flag register 200a) used in the process related to the reel ratio are individually saved to the respective areas of the outer working area 203y1 by a load (LD) command (S2022). Then, the process related to the reel ratio is executed (S2023).

In the process of S2023, for example, the same process as the main role ratio management process (see FIG. 18) executed by the CPU 261 of the role ratio management chip 207 in the first or second embodiment is executed, and a process for controlling the display of the role ratio display device 400 is executed. In addition, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, a process similar to the inspection result output process (see FIGS. 22 and 30) executed by the CPU 261 of the role ratio management chip 207 in the first or second embodiment may be executed in the process of S2023.

When the processing of S2023 is completed, the stack pointer (not shown) of the MPU 201 is then set to a fixed address in the internal stack area 203x2 by a load (LD) command (S2024). As a result, data is again started in the internal stack area 203x2 in the subsequent processing.

The role ratio processing (S2002) in which this role ratio main processing (S2013) is executed is performed after the game processing (S2001) that executes the main control of the game in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 31 has been completed. Also, the timer interrupt processing is read and executed when the counter update processing (S702-S703) is not being executed in the infinite loop (loop of S701-S703) of the main processing (FIG. 17) executed by the MPU 201.

When the processing of S2024 is executed, the data saved when the main processing is switched to the timer interrupt processing and the flag register 200a saved by the processing of S2012 are saved in the inner stack area 203x2 (however, if the flag register 200a is saved to the inner working area 200x1 by a load command, it does not exist in the inner stack area 203x2), and the number of saved data is fixed. Therefore, when the stack pointer is specified to a position stacked in the inner stack area 203x2 in the processing of S2012, the position can be reliably specified by simply setting the fixed address to the stack pointer. And, since it is not necessary to save the value of the stack pointer indicating the inner stack area 203x2 before the stack pointer is moved from the inner stack area 203x2 to the outer stack area 203y2 (before the processing of S2012 is executed), it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 due to the saving.

Next, the values of each register 200 that were individually saved to a specified area of the external work area 203y1 by the processing of S2022 are restored by reading them from the corresponding specified area of the external work area 203y1 with a load (LD) command and setting them in the corresponding register 200 (S2025). Then, after the processing of S2025, the role ratio main processing is terminated and the process returns to the role ratio processing. Also, after the processing of S2025 is completed, the MPU 201 uses the internal work area 203x1 as the working area of the RAM 203. That is, the MPU 201 uses the internal work area 203x1 to store various counters and data, and also uses the internal stack area 203x2 as necessary.

In this way, when the MPU 201 executes the process related to the role ratio (S2023), it executes each process using the area outside the use area 203y (the outer working area 203y1 and the outer stack area 203y2). At the stage of moving to the process of S2023 using the area outside the use area 203y, the registers 200 provided in the MPU 201 that are used in this process related to the role ratio are individually saved to the outer working area 203y1 of the RAM 203. Then, before the process of S2023 ends and the MPU 201 returns to the process using the area inside the use area 203x, the registers 200 saved in the outer working area 203y1 are restored to the corresponding registers 200. After that, the game process that mainly controls the game is executed using the area inside the use area 203x (the inner working area 203x1 and the inner stack area 203x2).

Here, when the game processing for the main control of the game using the area within the use area 203x is changed to the processing for the role ratio using the area outside the use area 203y, and then the game processing for the main control of the game using the area within the use area 203x is returned to. In order to protect the interests of the player and to ensure that the main control of the game continues without any problems, the game processing for the main control of the game must not be affected by the processing for the role ratio. For this reason, the RAM 203 is divided into the area within the use area 203x used for the processing for the main control of the game and the area outside the use area 203y used for the processing for the role ratio. However, the capacity of the register 200 is smaller than that of the RAM 203, and there are also registers 200 with specific uses, so it is impossible or difficult to separate the register 200 used for the processing for the main control of the game and the processing for the role ratio.

There is also a demand to ensure that the game processing that mainly controls the game is not affected by the processing related to the device ratio executed in between by making the contents of register 200 the same before and after the processing related to the device ratio is executed, in other words, at the stage of transition from the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area within the use area 203x to the processing related to the device ratio that uses the area outside the use area 203y, and at the stage of transition from the processing related to the device ratio that uses the area outside the use area 203y to the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area within the use area 203x.

On the other hand, it is also possible to use a PUSH command to evacuate the contents of all registers 200 to the outer stack area 203y2 all at once before performing processing related to the role ratio that uses the area outside the use area 203y, and then use a POP command to restore all registers 200 from the outer stack area 203y2 all at once after performing processing related to the role ratio. However, in this case, in order to evacuate the contents of all registers 200, it is necessary to set the capacity of the outer stack area 203y2 large in advance, which means that either the capacity of the outer working area 200y1 is reduced or the RAM 203 must be made larger.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when transitioning from game processing that mainly controls the game using the area within the use area 203x to processing related to the role ratio that uses the area outside the use area 203y, the registers 200 provided in the MPU 201 that are used in this processing related to the role ratio are individually saved to the external work area 203y1 of the RAM 203, and after execution of the processing related to the role ratio processing, when transitioning (returning) from the processing related to the role ratio that uses the area outside the use area 203y to game processing that mainly controls the game using the area within the use area 203x, the registers 200 that were saved to the external work area 203y1 are individually restored. This allows the contents of register 200 to be the same at the stage of transition from game processing that mainly controls games using area within use 203x to processing related to the device ratio that uses area outside use 203y, and at the stage of transition from processing related to the device ratio that uses area outside use 203y to game processing that mainly controls games using area within use 203x, so it can be reliably guaranteed that the game processing that mainly controls games will not be affected by processing related to the device ratio that was executed in between.

In addition, at the stage of transition from the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area within the use area 203x to the processing related to the role ratio that uses the area outside the use area 203y, and at the stage of transition from the processing related to the role ratio that uses the area outside the use area 203y to the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area within the use area 203x, the contents of only some of the registers 200 used in the processing related to the role ratio are saved/restored, rather than saving/restoring the contents of all of the registers 200. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the RAM 203 (external working area 203y1) required to save the contents of the registers. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the RAM 203 and to secure a large area in the external working area 203y1 for storing other data, etc.

Regarding the registers 200 that are not used in the processing related to the role ratio, they are not affected by the processing related to the role ratio in the first place, and their contents continue to be retained before and after the processing related to the role ratio is executed. Therefore, by simply saving/restoring the contents of only some of the registers 200 that are used in the processing related to the role ratio, without saving/restoring the contents of the registers 200 that are not used in the processing related to the role ratio, it is possible to reliably guarantee that the game processing that mainly controls the game will not be affected by the processing related to the role ratio that was executed in between.

However, because the flag register 200a is a register used for all commands executed by the MPU 201, it is naturally also used for processing related to the ratio of winning combinations. However, in the processing of S2022, the flag register 200a is exceptionally not saved. This is because the contents of the flag register 200a change simply by reading the main ratio processing (S2013) in the ratio of winning combinations processing shown in FIG. 33, and the value of the flag register at the time the game processing that executes the main control of the game is completed when the transition is made to the processing related to the ratio of winning combinations cannot be saved in the processing stage of S2022.

Therefore, in this embodiment, before reading out the role ratio main processing (S2013) in the role ratio processing shown in FIG. 33, only the flag register 200a is saved to the internal stack area 203x2, and after the role ratio main processing (S2013) is completed, only the flag register 200a is restored from the internal stack area 203x2. This ensures that the value of the flag register at the time the game processing is completed is restored after the processing related to the role ratio is executed.

In addition, the saving/restoring of the registers 200 at the stage of transitioning from the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area within the use area 203x to the processing related to the role ratio that uses the area outside the use area 203y, and at the stage of transitioning from the processing related to the role ratio that uses the area outside the use area 203y to the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area within the use area 203x, is performed individually for each register, so that only the registers 200 that need to be saved/restored (i.e., only the registers 200 used for the processing related to the role ratio) can be individually specified and saved/restored to ensure that the game processing that mainly controls the game is not affected by the processing related to the role ratio executed in between.

In addition, since the register 200 is evacuated to the external working area 203y1 instead of the external stack area 203y2, the capacity required for the external stack area 203y2 can be reduced, and the capacity of the external working area 203y1 can be increased. In addition, some MPUs 201 specify the stack area and working area in advance depending on the model (type). Some such MPUs 201 have a function that clears (initializes to 0) the contents of the RAM 203 itself when data is further evacuated and stacked beyond the area of the pre-specified stack area. In contrast, by evacuating the register 200 to the external working area 203y1 instead of the external stack area 203y2, it is possible to prevent the external stack area 203y2 from immediately becoming full with stacked data. Therefore, in an MPU 201 having such a function, it is possible to prevent the RAM 203 from being cleared because data is further stacked beyond the pre-specified area of the external stack area 203y2.

In addition, since register 200 is saved using a load (LD) command rather than a PUSH command/POP command, the location where it is saved can be fixed by the program. Therefore, by programming the program to use outer work area 203y1 and clearly avoid the area where register 200 is saved while processing related to the role ratio is being performed, the contents of register 200 used in the game processing that mainly controls the game can be reliably protected.

When all of the registers 200 are used in the processing related to the role ratio, all of the registers 200 may be individually saved/restored to a specified area of the external work area 203y1 using a load (LD) command. This also provides the same effect as when the registers 200 are saved to the external work area 200y1.

In addition, when some of the registers 200 used in the processing related to the role ratio are to be saved, they may be saved individually to a specified area of the outer stack area 203y2 using a PUSH command, and the registers 200 saved to the specified area of the outer stack area 203y2 may be restored individually using a POP command. This reduces the capacity of the RAM 203 required to save the contents of the registers. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the RAM 203 and ensure a large area for storing the outer working area 203y1. In this case, when the registers 200 saved using the POP command are to be restored, it is necessary to use the LIFO method, that is, to first restore the registers 200 saved later using the PUSH command using the POP command.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first and second embodiments can provide the same effects as those obtained by that configuration.

Next, a fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Figures 35 and 36. In the third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, in the main control device 110, at the stage of transition from game processing that mainly controls the game using the area within the use area 203x to processing related to the role ratio that uses the area outside the use area 203y, the registers 200 used in the processing related to the role ratio are individually saved, and after the processing related to the role ratio is completed, at the stage of transition from the processing related to the role ratio that uses the area outside the use area 203y to the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area within the use area 203x, the saved registers 200 are individually restored. In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the main control device 110, during the processing using the area within the use area 203x in the role processing (S2002) executed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 32), when the role main processing (S2013) that executes the processing related to the role ratio using the area outside the use area 203y is read by a CALL command, the registers 200 used in the processing related to the role ratio are individually cleared to 0, and the role main processing (S2013) is read by a CALL command. Also, in the role main processing (S2013), when the role main processing (S2013) that uses the area outside the use area 203y is terminated and the processing returns to the processing using the area within the use area 203x, the registers 200 used in the processing related to the role ratio are individually cleared to 0, and the processing returns to the role ratio processing.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the same configurations and processes as the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments are given the same reference numerals as the first to third embodiments, and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Compared to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of this fourth embodiment differs in a part of the processing of the role ratio processing (S2002), which is a part of the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and a part of the processing of the role ratio main processing (S2013), which is a part of the role ratio processing (S2002).

Figure 35 is a flowchart showing the role ratio processing (S2002) in the fourth embodiment. In this role ratio processing, first, the same processing of S2011 and S2012 as in the third embodiment is executed, and then all registers 200 (except for the flag register 200a) used in the processing related to the role ratio are individually cleared to 0 using a load (LD) command. Then, the process proceeds to S2013, where a subroutine program that executes the role ratio main processing using the outside use area 203y is read out with a CALL command, and the role ratio main processing is executed. Then, the same processing of S2014 and S2015 as in the third embodiment is executed, and then the role ratio processing is terminated.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the role ratio main processing (S2013) in the fourth embodiment. In this role ratio main processing, first, the same S2021 processing as in the third embodiment is executed, then the same S2023 processing as in the third embodiment (i.e., processing related to the role ratio) is executed, and then the registers 200 used in the processing related to the role ratio are individually cleared to 0 (S2041). Then, the same S2024 processing as in the third embodiment is executed to end the role ratio main processing using the outside use area 203y, and return to the role ratio processing to execute processing using the inside use area 203x.

In this fourth embodiment, in the register 200 used in the processing related to the role ratio using the outside area 203y, the value is changed by the processing related to the role ratio, and the value is left as it is in the corresponding register 200, and even if the MPU 201 executes the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area 203x in the use area, it is assumed that the game processing is not affected. In this case, at the stage of shifting from the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area 203x in the use area to the processing related to the role ratio using the area 203y outside the use area, the register 200 used in the processing related to the role ratio among the registers 200 provided in the MPU 201 is saved, and after the processing related to the role ratio is executed, at the stage of shifting from the processing related to the role ratio using the area 203y outside the use area to the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area 203x in the use area, there is no problem even if the saved register 200 is not restored. However, this means that the value of register 200 will change before and after processing of the reel ratio, so an outsider cannot determine whether or not this is really okay.

Therefore, as in this embodiment, first, in the role ratio processing, at the stage of transition from the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area within the use area 203x to the processing related to the role ratio that uses the area outside the use area 203y, i.e., before reading out the subroutine program that executes the role ratio main processing with the CALL command, all registers 200 used in the processing related to the role ratio performed in the role ratio main processing are individually cleared to 0. Then, after executing the processing related to the role ratio in the role ratio main processing, at the stage of transition from the processing related to the role ratio that uses the area outside the use area 203y to the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area within the use area 203x, all registers 200 used in the processing related to the role ratio (i.e., the same registers 200 as the registers 200 cleared to 0 before executing the role ratio main processing) are individually cleared to 0. This allows the contents of the register 200 to be seemingly the same at the stage of transition from the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area within the use area 203x to the processing related to the role ratio that uses the area outside the use area 203y (the stage of reading the role ratio main processing) and the stage of transition from the processing related to the role ratio that uses the area outside the use area 203y to the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area within the use area 203x (the stage of returning from the role ratio main processing to the role ratio processing). Therefore, it is possible to reliably guarantee that the game processing that mainly controls the game is not affected by the processing related to the role ratio that was executed in between. Note that the contents of the register 200 that is not used in the processing related to the role ratio do not change before and after the processing related to the role ratio and continue to be held, so that this unused register 200 is the same at both stages even if it is not cleared to 0.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, the registers 200 used in the processing related to the role ratio are individually cleared to 0 in the processing of S2031 and S2041, but it is not necessary to clear them to 0. For example, the above effect can be obtained even if the same predetermined value is stored in the processing of S2031 and S2041. However, in view of the fact that all registers are initialized to 0 immediately after the power is turned on and the reset input to the MPU 201 is released (at a stage where software initialization is not performed), it is desirable to individually clear (initialize) the registers 200 used in the processing related to the role ratio to 0 in the processing of S2031 and S2041. Also, by individually clearing the registers 200 used in the processing related to the role ratio to 0, it is possible to know at a glance that the registers 200 have been cleared to 0.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machines 10 of the first to third embodiments can provide the same effects as those obtained by that configuration.

Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Figs. 37 to 44. In this pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, instead of the role ratio display device 400 provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third or fourth embodiment, a base display device 401 (see Fig. 38(a)) is provided that is made up of four seven-segment displays (including a dot segment provided on the lower right side of the seven-segment portion) 401a, 401b, 401c, and 401d. This base display device 401 displays the base value of the pachinko machine 10 as one piece of information related to the role ratio.

The base value is the number (ratio) of balls paid out (awarded) per 100 balls during normal play, excluding jackpots, high probability (high probability) play, and time-saving play. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, every time the number of out balls guided from the play area to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls shot into the play area, in other words, the number of balls used in play; hereafter referred to as the "total number of outs") reaches 60,000, the base value for those 60,000 balls is measured and stored.

The base display device 401 displays the base value (hereinafter referred to as the "real-time base value") measured in real time during the period until the total number of outs reaches 60,000, the base value (hereinafter referred to as the "last base value") measured the previous (most recent) time when the total number of outs reached 60,000, the base value (hereinafter referred to as the "second-previous base value") measured the time before the previous time (the time before last) when the total number of outs reached 60,000, and the base value (hereinafter referred to as the "second-previous base value") measured the time before the time before last when the total number of outs reached 60,000. These are displayed by switching between them every predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). By displaying the base values (last base value, second-previous base value, second-previous base value) from multiple times in the past in addition to the real-time base value, it becomes possible to more accurately determine whether or not there has been any misconduct, and it is also possible to predict to a certain extent the time when the misconduct occurred.

In the fifth embodiment, each time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, immediately after the power is turned on, all segments (including dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are lit for a predetermined period (five seconds in this embodiment). If some segments of the base display device 401 are not lit due to a fault such as a broken wire, the base value and the like cannot be displayed correctly, and there is a risk of an erroneous judgment being made as to whether or not there has been fraudulent activity. By lighting all segments of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 for a predetermined period each time the power is turned on, it is possible to check whether all segments can be lit normally, and it is easy to judge whether the display on the base display device 401 is normal.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up in a manufacturing factory, or when a used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used machine, etc., the display of the base display device 401 is displayed in a special display mode different from the normal base value display until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) at the beginning of the new start of the pachinko machine 10. When the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, the balls may be manually put into each winning hole and the prize balls may be paid out during shipping inspection for quality confirmation of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the base value at this time is significantly different from the base value of the actual pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, the display of the base display device 401 is displayed in a special display mode different from the normal base value display until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) at the beginning of the new start of the pachinko machine 10, so that it can be shown that the base value being displayed is not the regular base value. Furthermore, this display can indicate that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new startup state.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the same configurations and processes as the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fourth embodiments are given the same reference numerals as the first to fourth embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 37 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment in that, whereas in the third embodiment, the winning ratio display device 400 is connected to the main control device 110, in the fifth embodiment, a base display device 401 is connected to the main control device 110. As described above, this base display device 401 is for displaying the base value of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, the role ratio display device 400 in the third embodiment may be configured to switch and display the base value of the pachinko machine 10 at predetermined intervals along with the role ratio of the pachinko machine 10. Also, in this embodiment, it is not necessary to provide the inspection terminal 207a, and it is not necessary to configure the inspection device 300 to output information regarding the role ratio. Also, if information regarding the role ratio is not output to the inspection device 300, the second reading memory 264 may be omitted.

Now, with reference to FIG. 38, the details of the base display device 401 will be described. First, FIG. 38(a) is a schematic diagram showing the base display device 401. This base display device 401 is configured with four seven-segment displays 401a to 401d arranged in a horizontal row, and is disposed on the main board that constitutes the main control device 110. In other words, it is assembled so that the display screen of the base display device 401 can be seen when looking at the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, and four-digit numbers or English letters can be confirmed. It should be noted that it may also be assembled so that the display screen of the base display device 401 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Each of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d has a seven-segment section as well as a dot segment provided on the lower right side of the seven-segment section. Of the four seven-segment displays 401a to 401d, the base display device 401 uses the two left seven-segment displays 401a and 401b as identification segments and the two right seven-segment displays 401c and 401d as ratio segments. The identification segments are used to indicate identification information for specifying the content to be displayed in the ratio segment. The ratio segment is used to display the ratio of the content specified by the identification information shown in the identification segment.

Figure 38 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents on the base display device 401. As described above, the base display device 401 switches between displaying the real-time base value measured in real time during the period until the total number of outs reaches 60,000, the previous base value measured the previous (most recent) time the total number of outs reached 60,000, the previous-before-previous base value measured the time before the previous time when the total number of outs reached 60,000, and the time before-previous base value measured the time before the time before the previous time when the total number of outs reached 60,000.

When the base display device 401 displays the real-time base value, it displays "bL." in the identification segment and displays the real-time base value being measured in two digits in the ratio segment. By displaying "bL." in the identification segment, the viewer can recognize that the number displayed in the ratio segment is the real-time base value.

When the base display device 401 displays the previous base value, it displays "b1." in the identification segment and displays the previous base value in two digits in the ratio segment. By displaying "b1." in the identification segment, the viewer can recognize that the number displayed in the ratio segment is the previous base value.

When the base display device 401 displays the base value before last, it displays "b2." in the identification segment and displays the base value before last in two digits in the ratio segment. By displaying "b2." in the identification segment, the viewer can recognize that the number displayed in the ratio segment is the base value before last.

When the base display device 401 displays the base value from the previous time, it displays "b3." in the identification segment and displays the base value from the previous time in two digits in the ratio segment. By displaying "b3." in the identification segment, the viewer can recognize that the number displayed in the ratio segment is the base value from the previous time.

In this way, the base display device 401 displays the base values for the past several times (the previous base value, the base value before the previous time, and the base value before the previous time) in addition to the real-time base value. Here, the real-time base value is the base value measured in real time during the period until the total number of outs reaches 60,000, as described above. Here, in general, in a hall, about 10,000 to 20,000 balls are shot per day into one pachinko machine 10 and played. In other words, the previous base value, the base value before the previous time, and the base value before the previous time measured for 60,000 balls indicate the base values over several days, about 3 to 6 days. If the real-time base value were not displayed on the base display device 401, it would take about 3 to 6 days for the base value for 60,000 balls to be measured, so even if it is the previous base value, it may be the base value from 3 to 6 days ago. Therefore, if any kind of cheating occurs after the last measurement of the base value, there is a risk that the cheating will not be discovered for 3 to 6 days, when the base values for the next 60,000 balls are measured and displayed on the base display device 401. In contrast, by displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, the current base value can be shown as a flash value, so that if any kind of cheating occurs, the possibility of that cheating can be discovered immediately from the real-time base value.

On the other hand, as described above, the real-time base value is a base value measured in real time when the total number of outs is less than 60,000. As described above, the base value is the number (proportion) of balls paid out (awarded) per 100 balls during normal times, so the real-time base value may fluctuate depending on how the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has changed (for example, the normal state happens to continue for a long time, the jackpot state happens to occur frequently, the special state happens to continue for a long time, etc.). Therefore, if only the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, it may be difficult to determine whether or not fraud has occurred.

In contrast, the previous base value, the base value before previous base value, and the base value before previous base value measured for 60,000 balls indicate base values over several days, such as 3 to 6 days, so no matter what game state the pachinko machine 10 was in over the corresponding several days, the previous base value, the base value before previous base value, and the base value before previous base value can be averaged. Therefore, by displaying not only the real-time base value but also base values measured for 60,000 balls, such as the previous base value, on the base display device 401, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not fraud has occurred.

On the other hand, if only the previous base value is displayed as the base value measured for 60,000 balls, and a player who happens to be accustomed to the pachinko machine 10 plays during the period in which the previous base value was measured, the base value will generally be low. Therefore, even if only the real-time base value and the previous base value are displayed on the base display device 401, it may be difficult to determine whether or not fraud has occurred. In contrast, by displaying multiple base values, such as the previous base value and the base value before the previous time, as well as the previous base value, as the base value measured for 60,000 balls, it is possible to determine whether or not there has been a change in the base value for each base value based on the accustomedness of the player who played the game. This allows for a more accurate determination of whether or not fraud has occurred.

In this embodiment, the real-time base value, previous base value, previous-second-last base value, and previous-second-last base value are switched and displayed on the base display device 401 every 5 seconds. However, for example, the number of 7-segment displays may be increased, and the real-time base value and previous base value may be displayed simultaneously, and the previous-second-last base value and previous-second-last base value may be displayed simultaneously, switched at predetermined intervals. In addition, the real-time base value, previous base value, previous-second-last base value, and previous-second-last base value may all be displayed simultaneously on the base display device 401.

In addition, in this embodiment, the base display device 401 displays three base values measured for 60,000 balls: the previous base value, the base value before last, and the base value before last. However, two base values may be displayed, or in addition to the previous base value, the base value before last, and the base value before last, the base value before last measured when the total number of outs reached 60,000 before the base value before last (the before last time). In other words, any number of base values greater than or equal to two may be displayed as the base values measured for 60,000 balls to be displayed on the base display device 401.

Returning to Figure 37, we will continue the explanation. The base display device 401 is connected to a base display device control circuit 402 provided in the main control device 110 and connected to the input/output port 205. The base display device control circuit 402 drives and controls each of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d of the base display device 401 based on drive and control signals from the MPU 201, to perform various displays as shown in Figure 38(b).

The process for displaying the base value on the base display device 401 is performed using the outside use area 203y of the RAM 203. That is, the information required for displaying the base value on the base display device 401 is stored in the outside work area 203y1 of the outside use area 203y. Here, with reference to FIG. 39, the details of the information required for displaying the base value on the base display device 401, which is stored in the outside work area 203y1, will be described. First, FIG. 39(a) is a schematic diagram showing the information required for displaying the base value, which is stored in the outside work area 203y1 of the RAM 203.

At least the following information is stored in the external work area 203y1 and is required to display the base value: total out counter 203j, low probability payout counter 203k, real-time base value data 203l, previous base value data 203m, base value data before last 203n, base value data before last 203o, new start flag 203p, and display type counter 203q.

Of these, the total out counter 203j, the low probability payout counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the previous-before-last base value data 203n, the previous-before-last base value data 203o, and the new start flag 203p are not initialized (cleared) and the information continues to be held even if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 122 is operated. As a result, even if the RAM clear switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on, the measurement of the real-time base value that has been performed before the operation continues, and the measured real-time base value can be displayed on the base display device 401. In addition, the previous base value, the previous-before-last base value, and the previous-before-last base value that were held before the RAM clear switch 122 was operated can be displayed on the base display device 401.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, a RAM all-clear switch (not shown) is provided in the board box 100 in which the main board is stored, and only when the power is turned on while the RAM all-clear switch is operated, the RAM 203 is initialized (cleared), including the total out number counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the time before last base value data 203n, the time before last base value data 203o, and the new start-up flag 203p. When the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up in a manufacturing factory, or when a used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used machine, etc., when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, the total out number counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the base value data before last 203n, the base value data before last 203o, and the new start flag 203p can be initialized by turning on the power while operating the RAM all erase switch, and the measurement of the base value can be newly started from there. Also, by making it possible to initialize (clear) these pieces of information when a used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used machine, even if a fraudulent act was committed in the previous hall and the base value changed, the information continues to be displayed in the next hall, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of suspicion that a fraudulent act was committed in the next hall. In addition, the RAM erase switch is provided inside the board box 100, which is connected in an unopenable manner, so it cannot be operated unless the connection of the board box 100 is broken and opened. This prevents fraudsters from erasing information necessary for displaying the base value, and ensures that this information is protected.

Instead of the RAM erase switch, a keyhole or other hole may be provided, and only when a key or other key that fits the hole is inserted, the total out counter 203j, low probability payout counter 203k, real-time base value data 203l, previous base value data 203m, base value data before last 203n, base value data before last 203o, and new start flag 203p may be initialized. This prevents fraudsters from erasing information necessary for displaying the base value, and ensures that this information is protected.

The total out counter 203j is a counter for counting the total number of outs, which is the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game). The total out counter 203j is initialized to zero when the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch, and when a ball is detected by the out switch 208g, one is added to the counter, assuming that a ball has been guided to the ball discharge path. Then, when the total out counter 203j reaches 60,000, the MPU 201 determines that the total number of outs has reached 60,000, executes a predetermined process described below, and initializes the total out counter 203j to zero. This causes the total out counter 203j to count the total number of outs again until the total number of outs reaches 60,000.

The low probability payout number counter 203k is a counter for counting the number of prize balls paid out during normal play except during jackpots, high probability (high probability) play, and time-saving play. The low probability payout number counter 203k is initialized to zero when the power is turned on while operating the RAM full erase switch. Then, when balls are paid out (prize balls) during normal play, the number of balls paid out is added to the low probability payout number counter 203k.

For example, in this embodiment, when the first start port switch 208a, the first normal winning port switch 208c, and the second normal winning port switch 208d detect that a ball has entered the first start port 64a, which is the so-called "navel" whose opening is always open, or the first normal winning port 63a and the second normal winning port 63b, which are the general winning ports, during normal times, the number of prize balls set for the corresponding winning port is determined by the number of prize balls table 202e (see Figures 6 and 9), and the number of prize balls is added to the low probability payout number counter 203k.

In the pachinko machine 10, if a "small win" is provided as one form of "miss" and the large prize opening 65a is configured to be opened for several seconds when a "small win" occurs, when the game is in a normal state, if a ball enters the large prize opening 65a and a prize ball is awarded in conjunction with the opening of the large prize opening 65a in a "small win", the number of prize balls may be added to the low probability payout number counter 203k. Also, when the game is in a normal state, if a ball enters the second start opening 64b and a prize ball is awarded, the number of prize balls may be added to the low probability payout number counter 203k.

The number of winning balls is added to the low probability payout number counter 203k until the total out number counter 203j reaches 60,000. In other words, when the total out number counter 203j reaches 60,000, the value of the low probability payout number counter 203k is the number of balls paid out when the game is in normal play, out of the 60,000 balls shot into the game area.

When the total out counter 203j reaches 60,000 balls, the low probability payout counter 203k is initialized to zero along with the total out counter 203j. As a result, the low probability payout counter 203k counts the number of balls paid out in the normal game state again for the period until the total out reaches 60,000 balls.

The MPU 201 calculates the real-time base value at each predetermined period (for example, every 4 milliseconds when a timer interrupt process is executed) using the following formula (1).
Real-time base value = value of low-probability payout counter 203k / value of total out counter 203j × 100 (1)
The real-time base value calculated by equation (1) is stored as real-time base value data 203l.

That is, the real-time base value data 203l is data indicating the measured (calculated) real-time base value. The previous base value data 203m is data indicating the previous base value, the previous-before-last base value data 203n is data indicating the previous-before-last base value, and the previous-before-last base value data 203o is data indicating the previous-before-last base value.

Now, referring to FIG. 39(b), the configurations of the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the base value data before last 203n, and the base value data before last 203o will be described. FIG. 39(b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of each of the base value data 203l to 203o.

As shown in FIG. 39(b), each base value data 203l-203o is composed of 8 bits (1 byte), with the 7th bit (most significant bit) on the MSB side being a valid data flag, and the remaining 0th to 6th bits (lowest 7 bits) storing a base value. When the valid data flag of each base value data 203l-203o is 1, this means that a valid base value is stored in the 0th to 6th bits. On the other hand, when the valid data flag of each base value data 203l-203o is 0, this means that no valid base value is stored in the 0th to 6th bits.

When the power is turned on while the RAM clear all switch is being operated, all of the valid data flags and base values of the base value data 203l to 203o are initialized to zero. In other words, immediately after the power is turned on while the RAM clear all switch is being operated, no valid data is stored in any of the real-time base value, previous base value, previous-before base value, and previous-before base value.

After that, until the total out number counter 203j reaches 300, the real-time base value is stored as the base value of the real-time base value data 203l, with the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l remaining at 0. In this case, when the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, "88." is flashed (or lit) in the identification segment, and the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is flashed (or lit) in the ratio segment.

As described above, the RAM erase switch is operated when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, such as when the pachinko machine 10 is completely new at the manufacturing factory or when a used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used machine. When the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, the balls may be manually put into each winning hole and the prize balls may be paid out during shipping inspections for quality checks of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the base value at this time is significantly different from the base value of the actual pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, the display of the base display device 401 during the first period until the total number of outs reaches 300 is displayed in a special display mode different from the normal base value display, in which "88." is flashed (or lit) in the identification segment and the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is flashed (or lit) in the ratio segment, thereby making it possible to indicate that the base value being displayed is not a regular base value (valid base value). Furthermore, this display can suggest that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new startup state. In this special display mode, the "88." in the identification segment and the real-time base value of the ratio segment may both be lit or flashed. Also, the "88." in the identification segment may be lit and the real-time base value of the ratio segment may be flashed, or conversely, the "88." in the identification segment may be flashed and the real-time base value of the ratio segment may be lit.

When the total out number counter 203j reaches 300, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 1. This makes the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l a valid base value. Therefore, based on the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l becoming 1, the identification segment of the base display device 401 lights up "bL." and the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is displayed in the ratio segment, thereby notifying the user of the valid real-time base value.

Meanwhile, at this stage, the valid data flags for the previous base value data 203m, the second previous base value data 203n, and the second previous base value data 203o all remain at 0. At this time, when switching every predetermined period to display the previous base value, the second previous base value, and the second previous base on the base display device 401, the identification segment displays the corresponding base value, while the ratio segment lights up with "--". This makes it possible to indicate that valid base values have not been obtained for the previous base value, the second previous base value, or the second previous base.

When the total out number counter 203j reaches 60,000, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l at that time becomes the base value for the total out number of 60,000. Therefore, the base value data before last 203n is shifted to the base value data before last 203o, the previous base value data 203m is shifted to the previous base value data 203n, and then the real-time base value data 203l is shifted to the previous base value data 203m. As a result, the base value measured when the total out number reached 60,000 is held as the previous base value.

When data is shifted to the previous base value data 203m, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to be shifted is set to "1", and the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m after the shift also becomes "1". Therefore, from this point on, when the previous base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the previous base value data 203m is displayed in the ratio segment as the valid base value.

In addition, when shifting the previous base value data 203m to the base value data before last 203n, if the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is "1" (corresponding to the case where the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time after the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch and all initialization of the RAM 203 is performed), the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203n after shifting becomes "1". Therefore, from this point on, when displaying the previous base value on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the previous base value data 203n is displayed in the ratio segment as a valid base value.

Furthermore, when shifting the previous-previous base value data 203n to the previous-previous base value data 203o, if the valid data flag of the previous-previous base value data 203n is "1" (corresponding to the case where the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time after the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch and all initialization of the RAM 203 is performed), the valid data flag of the previous-previous base value data 203o after shifting becomes "1". Therefore, from this point on, when displaying the previous-previous base value on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the previous-previous base value data 203o is displayed in the ratio segment as the valid base value.

When the total out counter 203j reaches 60,000 and the real-time base value data 203l is shifted to the previous base value data 203m, the total out counter 203j is initialized to 0, and the real-time base value data 203l is also initialized to 0, including the valid data flag. The valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is then held at 0 until the total out counter 203j again reaches 300, at which point a 1 is stored in the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l. Thereafter, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is held at 1 until the total out counter 203j reaches 60,000.

When the total number of outs is small, the measured real-time base value is greatly affected by the game content at that time, so even if it is displayed, it will be a meaningless base value, which may have a negative effect on the judgment of fraudulent behavior. Therefore, when the total number of outs is between 0 and 300, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 0, and when the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, "bL." indicating the real-time base value is lit in the identification segment, while "--" is lit in the ratio segment. This makes it possible to show that a valid real-time base value has not been obtained because the total number of outs is small. In this case, the identification segment may flash "bL." indicating the real-time base value, and the ratio segment may display the base value of the real-time base value data 203l. This makes it possible to show that a valid real-time base value has not been obtained because the total number of outs is small, and also makes it possible to notify the real-time base value at that time for reference.

On the other hand, after the total number of outs reaches 300, by setting the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 1, when the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment lights up "bL." indicating the real-time base value, while the ratio segment displays the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l as the valid base value.

Returning to FIG. 39(a), the new start-up flag 203p is a flag indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up period, such as when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up at the manufacturing factory, or when a used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another parlor as a used machine. When the new start-up flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up period, and when it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a new start-up period.

The new start-up flag 203p is initialized to on when the power is turned on while operating the RAM erase switch, which is operated when starting up the pachinko machine 10, and indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period. The new start-up flag 203p is kept on until the total out number counter 203j reaches 300, and when the total out number counter 203j differs by 300, the new start-up flag 203p is set to off. Thereafter, the new start-up flag 203p remains off.

When the new start-up flag 203p is on, the base display device 401 displays the real-time base value in the special display mode described above, i.e., by flashing (or lighting) "88." in the identification segment and flashing (or lighting) the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l in the ratio segment. In addition, this display can suggest that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up state.

The display type counter 203q is a counter for determining the type of base value to be displayed on the base display device 401. When the display type counter 203q is 0, the base display device 401 displays the real-time base value, when the display type counter 203q is 1, the base display device 401 displays the previous base value, when the display type counter 203q is 2, the base display device 401 displays the base value before last, and when the display type counter 203q is 3, the base display device 401 displays the base value before last.

The display type counter 203q is initialized to 0 when the new start-up flag 203p is set to off, that is, when the total number of outs reaches 300 after the new start-up of the pachinko machine 10 and the new start-up period ends. The display type counter 203q then counts up by 1 every 5 seconds, and if the value of the display type counter 203q is 3 when counting up, it is returned to 0. As a result, the base value displayed on the base display device 401 changes every 5 seconds in the order of real-time base value, previous base value, previous-previous base value, and previous-previous base value, and after displaying the previous-previous base value, it returns to the real-time base value, and the display of the real-time base value, previous base value, previous-previous base value, and previous-previous base value is repeated, switching every 5 seconds.

Next, referring to FIG. 40, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the main control unit 110 is powered on in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. Here, the start-up process will be described with a focus on the differences from the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 16). As mentioned above, the same reference numerals are used for the parts where the same processes as those in the start-up process of the first embodiment are executed, and their description will be omitted.

First, if it is determined by the processing of S604 that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S604: Yes), if it is determined by the processing of S605 that no information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: No), or if it is determined by the processing of S607 that the calculated RAM judgment value is abnormal (S607: No), a payout initialization command is sent to the payout control device 111 (S614), and then the areas in the used area of the RAM 203, excluding the total out number counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the base value data before last 203n, the base value data before last 203o, and the new start flag 203p, which are information necessary for displaying the base value, are cleared to 0 (S3001), and the cleared area of the RAM 203, excluding the information necessary for displaying the base value, is set to an initial value (S3002).

As a result, even if the RAM clear switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on, the measurement of the real-time base value that has been taking place before the operation continues, and the measured real-time base value can be displayed on the base display device 401. Also, the previous base value, the base value before last, and the base value before last that were held before the RAM clear switch 122 were operated can be displayed on the base display device 401. And even if a fraudster operates the RAM clear switch 122 in an attempt to erase evidence, the information necessary for displaying the base values continues to be held, so it is possible to prevent evidence of fraud from being erased.

If it is determined by the process of S604 that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604), it is then determined whether or not the RAM all erase switch is turned on (S3003). If the RAM all erase switch is not turned on (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S605.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is on (S3003: Yes), a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111 (S3004), similar to the process of S614, and then a full initialization process of the RAM 203 (S3005, S3006) is executed. In the full initialization process of the RAM 203 (S3005, S3006), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S3005), including the total out number counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the base value data before last 203n, the base value data before last 203o, and the new start flag 203p, which are information necessary for displaying the base value, and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S3006).

As described above, the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up at the manufacturing factory, or when a used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used machine, and the like, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up. Then, by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch, the total out number counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the base value data before last 203n, the base value data before last 203o, and the new start flag 203p can be initialized, and the measurement of the base value can be newly started from there. In addition, by making it possible to initialize (clear) this information when a used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used machine, even if fraudulent acts have been committed in the previous hall and the base value has changed, the information continues to be displayed in the next hall, and this can prevent suspicions that fraudulent acts have been committed in the next hall from arising. In addition, the RAM erase switch is provided inside the board box 100, which is connected in an unopenable manner, so it cannot be operated unless the connection of the board box 100 is broken and opened. This prevents fraudsters from erasing information necessary for displaying the base value, and ensures that this information is protected.

When any of the processes S609, S3002, and S3006 has been executed, all segments (including dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are then lit (S3007), and a wait process is executed in this state for five seconds (S3008). As a result, every time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, all segments (including dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are continuously lit for at least five seconds.

If some segments of the base display device 401 are not lit due to a fault such as a broken wire, the base value and other information cannot be displayed correctly, which may lead to an erroneous judgment as to whether or not fraud has occurred. By lighting all segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 for at least 5 seconds each time the power is turned on, it is possible to check whether all segments are lit normally and easily determine whether the display on the base display device 401 is operating normally.

During the five seconds that the light is on, the startup process is suspended and normal game processing is awaited. This prevents the game from continuing without determining whether or not cheating has occurred if the base display device 401 is in a state where it cannot display the base value correctly, and prevents any disadvantage to the player or the hall, etc., from occurring if cheating has occurred.

In this embodiment, each time the power is turned on, the game is stopped from progressing for five seconds while all segments of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are lit, but while the lights are on, normal game processing may be started to allow the game to progress. In this case, the real-time base value may be measured in accordance with the progress of the game, while only the display of the base value on the base display device 401 is put on hold. This allows the player to immediately resume play even if a momentary power outage occurs and processing is performed to light up all segments of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401.

During the startup process, after processing S3008, the process moves to processing S613.

Next, referring to FIG. 41, the base value processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the base value processing. This base value processing is executed as one process of the role ratio processing (S2002) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 shown in the third embodiment, and calculates (measures) the base value and displays the base value.

In this base value process, first, a base value calculation process is executed (S3101), and the real-time base value is calculated (measured). When the total number of outs reaches 60,000, shifting process between each of the base value data 203l to 203o is executed. Details of this base value calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

Next, it is determined (S3102) whether or not one second has passed since the base value display process (S3103) was last executed. If it is determined that one second has passed since the base value display process (S3103) was last executed (S3102: Yes), the base value display process is executed (S3103) and the base value is displayed on the base display device 401. Details of the base value display process will be described later with reference to Figures 43 and 44.

When the processing of S3103 is completed, the base value processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing of S3102 that one second has not passed since the last time the base value display processing (S3103) was executed (S3102: No), the base value display processing (S3103) is skipped and the base value processing is terminated. As a result, the base value display processing (S3103) is executed at one-second intervals, and the display of the base display device 401 is driven and controlled every second.

In the judgment process of S3102, if the process of S3102 is executed for the first time after the main control device 110 is powered on (i.e., after the start-up process shown in FIG. 40 is executed), the system does not check whether one second has passed since the last time the base value display process (S3103) was executed, but instead makes a positive judgment (S3102: Yes) and executes the base value display process (S3103). This allows the drive control process of the base display device 401 to be executed promptly after the start-up process shown in FIG. 40 is executed.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned base value calculation process (S3101), which is one process of the base value process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the base value calculation process.

In the base value calculation process (S3101), first, at least the output of each switch of the first start port switch 208a, the first normal winning port switch 208c, the second normal winning port switch 208d, and the out switch 208g is read, and the presence or absence of winning in the first start port 64a, the first normal winning port 63a, and the second normal winning port 63b, and the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path are judged, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved (S3201). In addition, the judgment of one winning ball and one ball guided to the ball discharge path is performed over three timer interrupt processes based on the output of each switch 208a, 208c, 208d, and 208g.

Next, it is determined whether the out switch 208g is on (S3201), and if it is determined that the out switch 208g is on and that a ball has been guided to the ball discharge path (S3201: Yes), 1 is added to the total out number counter 203j (S3203). As a result, the total out number, which is the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls shot out), is counted by the total out number counter 203j.

After the process of S3203, or by the process of S3201, if it is determined that the out switch 208g is not on and that no balls have been guided to the ball discharge path (S3201: No), then it is determined whether the game state is not a jackpot, is in a low probability state, and is not in a time-saving state, i.e., is in a normal state (S3204). Then, if it is determined that the game state is not a jackpot, is in a low probability state, and is not in a time-saving state, i.e., is in a normal state (S3204: Yes), the process of S3205 is executed.

In other words, in the process of S3205, if any of the first start port 64a, the first normal winning port 63a, and the second normal winning port 63b is determined to have had a winning entry based on the winning detection information saved in the process of S3201, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning port where the winning entry occurred (i.e., the number specified by the prize ball number table 202e) is added to the low probability payout number counter 203k. As a result, the number of prize balls paid out during normal play except for jackpots, high probability (high probability) play, and time-saving play is counted by the low probability payout number counter 203k.

After the processing of S3205, or if the processing of S3204 determines that the gaming state is a jackpot, a high probability (high probability) state, or a time-saving state, i.e., the gaming state is not normal (S3204: No), then the real-time base value is calculated using the above formula (1), and the calculated real-time base value is stored as the base value of the real-time base value data 203l (S3206). This processing allows the measurement of the base value to be performed in real time.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the total out number counter 203j is 60,000, i.e., whether the total out number has reached 60,000 (S3207). As a result, if the total out number has not reached 60,000 (S3207: No), the process skips S3208 to S3210 and proceeds to S3211. On the other hand, if the total out number has reached 60,000 (S3207: Yes), the process executes S3208 to S3210 and proceeds to S3211.

In the process of S3208, first, the second-previous base value data 203n is shifted to the second-previous base value data 203o, the previous base value data 203m is shifted to the second-previous base value data 203n, and then the real-time base value data 203l is shifted to the previous base value data 203m (S3208). As a result, the real-time base value measured when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 is held as the previous base value, and thereafter, this base value is displayed on the base display device 401 as the previous base value. In addition, the base values that have been displayed as the previous base value and the second-previous base value are displayed on the base display device 401 as the second-previous base value and the second-previous base value.

Each base value may be stored in a ring buffer of the FIFO (First In First Out) type. In this case, the address (ring buffer pointer) for storing the real-time base value may be updated in the process of S3208. However, when the base value is stored in the FIFO type ring buffer, if the ring buffer pointer is once corrupted by some influence such as noise, there is a risk that the base value may not be correctly stored in the RAM 203 or displayed thereafter. In contrast, as in this embodiment, the area of the RAM 203 for storing the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value before the previous base value, and the base value before the previous base value are fixed, and the data is shifted between them every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, thereby avoiding the above problem that may occur when the base value is stored in the FIFO type ring buffer.

Furthermore, in the processing of S3208, these shift processes are performed with a single LDIR command. The LDIR command enables block transfer of data simply by setting the starting address (HL) of the data to be transferred, the starting address (DE) of the transfer destination, and the number of bytes to be transferred (BC). That is, data is transferred from (HL) to (DE), and both (HL) and (DE) are incremented by 1, while (BC) is decremented by 1. This process is then repeated until (BC) becomes 0. Therefore, by storing the two-to-last base value data 203o at address (AA) (AA is an address in RAM 203), storing the two-to-last base value data 203n at address (AA+1), storing the previous base value data 203m at address (AA+2), and storing the real-time base value data 203l at address (AA+3), setting the top address (HL) of the data to be transferred as (AA), setting the destination address as (AA+1), and setting the number of bytes to be transferred as 3, and executing a single LDIR command, the shift process of S3208 can be easily realized.

In the next process of S3209, the base value and the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l are initialized to 0 (S3209). As a result, a new base value is measured in real time again until the total number of outs reaches 60,000, while the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is maintained at 0 until the total number of outs reaches 300. When the total number of outs is small, the measured real-time base value is greatly influenced by the game content at that time, so even if it is displayed, it will be a meaningless base value, which may have a negative effect on the judgment of fraudulent behavior. Therefore, when the total number of outs is between 0 and 300, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 0, and when the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, "bL." indicating the real-time base value is lit in the identification segment, while "--" is lit in the ratio segment. This makes it possible to show that a valid real-time base value is not currently obtained due to the small total number of outs.

In the next process of S3210, the total out counter 203j is initialized to 0 (S3210). This causes the total out counter 203j to count the total out again until the total out reaches 60,000.

In the process of S3211, it is determined whether the value of the total out number counter 203j is 300, i.e., whether the total out number has reached 300 (S3211). As a result, if the total out number has not reached 300 (S3211: No), the processes of S3212 to S3215 are skipped and the base value calculation process ends. On the other hand, if the total out number has reached 300 (S3211: Yes), the processes of S3212 to S3215 are executed, and then the base value calculation process ends.

In the process of S3212, it is determined whether the new start-up flag 203p is on (S3212). As a result, if the new start-up flag 203p is on (S3212: Yes), this means that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up period because the power was turned on while the RAM erase switch was being operated. Then, as a result of the previous process of S3211, the total number of outs has reached 300, so it is time to end the new start-up period, and the new start-up flag 203p is set to off (S3213). Then, the display type counter 203q is initialized to zero (S3214). Thereby, from then on, the real-time base value, previous base value, previous-previous base value, and previous-previous base value are displayed on the base display device 401 in a switching manner every 5 seconds.

After the processing of S3214, or if it is determined by the processing of S3212 that the new start flag 203p is off (S3212: No), then the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 1. As a result, after the total number of outs reaches 300, by setting the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 1, when the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment lights up "bL." indicating the real-time base value, while the ratio segment displays the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l as the valid base value.

Next, referring to Figures 43 and 44, the details of the above-mentioned base value display process (S3103), which is one process of the base value process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 and is executed at one-second intervals, will be described. Figures 43 and 44 are flowcharts showing the base value calculation process (S3103).

First, referring to FIG. 43, when the base value calculation process (S3103) is started, it is determined whether the new start-up flag 203p is on (S3301). Then, if the new start-up flag 203p is on (S3301: Yes), this means that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up period because the power was turned on while the RAM erase switch was being operated. Then, a control signal is sent to the base display device control circuit 402 to cause the identification segment of the base display device 401 to flash (or light up) "88." and the ratio segment to flash (or light up) the base value of the real-time base value data 203l (S3302). Then, the base value display process is terminated.

As described above, when a pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, balls may be manually inserted into each winning slot to dispense prize balls during shipping inspections for quality checks of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the base value at this time differs greatly from the base value of the actual pachinko machine 10. Therefore, during the new start-up period of the pachinko machine 10, the display of the base display device 401 is displayed in a special display mode different from the normal base value display, in which "88." is flashed (or lit) in the identification segment and the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is flashed (or lit) in the ratio segment, thereby indicating that the displayed base value is not a regular base value (valid base value). Furthermore, by displaying this, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing in S3302 is that the new launch flag 203p is off (S3301: No), then it is determined whether 5 seconds have passed since the display type counter was updated or initialized (S3303). As a result, if 5 seconds have passed (S3303: Yes), the display type counter 203q is updated (S3304) and the process proceeds to S3305 shown in FIG. 44. On the other hand, if the result of the processing in S3303 is that 5 seconds have not passed (S3303: No), the process skips S3304 and proceeds to S3305 shown in FIG. 44.

When updating the display type counter 203q in S3304, if the display type counter 203q is other than 3, 1 is added to the display type counter 203q. Also, if the display type counter 203q is 3, the display type counter 203q is initialized to 0. By updating the display type counter 203q every 5 seconds, the type of base value displayed on the base display device 401 is switched every 5 seconds in the following order: real-time base value, previous base value, previous-before-last base value, previous-before-last base value, real-time base value, previous base value, ...

Referring to FIG. 44, in the process of S3305, the value of the display type counter 203q is judged (S3305). If the display type counter 203q is 0 (S3305: "0"), it is a period in which the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401. Then, it is judged whether the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is 1 (S3306), and if the valid data flag is 1 (S3306: Yes), a control signal is sent to the base display device control circuit 402 so that "bL." is displayed on the identification segment of the base display device 401 and the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is displayed on the ratio segment (S3307). As described above, if the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is measured for a total number of outs of 300 or more, the base value is considered to be valid and the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 1. Therefore, the real-time base value measured as a valid base value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing in S3306 is that the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is 0 (S3306: No), a control signal is sent to the base display device control circuit 402 to light up the identification segment of the base display device 401 and light up the ratio segment with "bL." (S3308).

As described above, if the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is measured when the total number of outs is less than 300, the base value is not considered valid and the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 0. This makes it possible to indicate that a valid real-time base value is not currently available due to the small total number of outs.

Also, as a result of the processing of S3305, if the display type counter 203q is 1 (S3305: "1"), this is the period during which the previous base value is displayed on the base display device 401. Then, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is 1 (S3309), and if the valid data flag is 1 (S3309: Yes), a control signal is sent to the base display device control circuit 402 to light up the identification segment of the base display device 401 to display "b1." and light up the base value of the previous base value data 203m in the ratio segment (S3310). As a result, when a valid base value is stored in the previous base value data 203m, the valid previous base value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

In addition, when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 and the data is shifted to the previous base value data 203m, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to be shifted is set to "1", and the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m after the shift also becomes "1". Therefore, when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the first time after the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, the base value stored in the previous base value data 203m is displayed in the ratio segment as the valid base value.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing in S3309 is that the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is 0 (S3309: No), a control signal is sent to the base display device control circuit 402 to light up the identification segment of the base display device 401 to display "b1." and light up the ratio segment to display "--" (S3311). In this way, if a valid base value has not been obtained as the previous base value, it is possible to indicate that a valid previous base value has not been obtained by displaying "--" in the ratio segment.

If the result of the processing in S3305 is that the display type counter 203q is 2 (S3305: "2"), this is the period in which the base display device 401 displays the base value before last. Then, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the base value data before last 203n is 1 (S3312), and if the valid data flag is 1 (S3312: Yes), a control signal is sent to the base display device control circuit 402 to light up the identification segment of the base display device 401 to display "b2." and light up the base value of the base value data before last 203n in the ratio segment (S3313). As a result, when a valid base value is stored in the base value data before last 203n, the valid base value before last can be displayed on the base display device 401.

In addition, when shifting the previous base value data 203m to the base value data before last 203n, if the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is "1" (corresponding to the case where the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time after the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch and all initialization of the RAM 203 is performed), the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203n after shifting becomes "1". Therefore, from this point on, when the previous base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the previous base value data 203n will be displayed in the ratio segment as the valid base value.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S3312 is that the valid data flag of the second-previous base value data 203n is 0 (S3312: No), a control signal is sent to the base display device control circuit 402 to light up the identification segment of the base display device 401 to display "b2." and light up the ratio segment to display "--" (S3313). In this way, if a valid base value has not been obtained as the second-previous base value, it is possible to indicate that a valid second-previous base value has not been obtained by displaying "--" in the ratio segment.

If the result of the processing in S3305 is that the display type counter 203q is 3 (S3305: "3"), this is the period in which the base display device 401 displays the base value two times before last. Then, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the two times before last base value data 203o is 1 (S3315), and if the valid data flag is 1 (S3315: Yes), a control signal is sent to the base display device control circuit 402 to light up the identification segment of the base display device 401 to display "b3." and light up the base value of the two times before last base value data 203o in the ratio segment (S3316). As a result, when a valid base value is stored in the two times before last base value data 203o, the valid two times before last base value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

In addition, when shifting the previous-previous base value data 203n to the previous-previous base value data 203o, if the valid data flag of the previous-previous base value data 203n is "1" (corresponding to the case where the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time after the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch and all initialization of the RAM 203 is performed), the valid data flag of the previous-previous base value data 203o after shifting becomes "1". Therefore, from this point on, when displaying the previous-previous base value on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the previous-previous base value data 203o will be displayed in the ratio segment as the valid base value.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S3315 is that the valid data flag of the two-previous base value data 203o is 0 (S3315: No), a control signal is sent to the base display device control circuit 402 to light up the identification segment of the base display device 401 to display "b2." and light up the ratio segment to display "--" (S3317). In this way, if a valid base value has not been obtained as the two-previous base value, it is possible to indicate that a valid two-previous base value has not been obtained by displaying "--" in the ratio segment.

When any of the processes S3307, S3308, S3310, S3311, S3313, S3314, S3316, or S3371 is completed, the base value display process ends as shown in FIG. 43.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the base display device 401 switches between and displays the real-time base value (hereinafter referred to as the "real-time base value") measured in real time during the period until the total number of outs reaches 60,000, the previous base value (hereinafter referred to as the "last base value") measured when the total number of outs last (most recently) reached 60,000, the previous-before-last base value measured when the total number of outs reached 60,000 one time before the previous time (the time before last), and the previous-before-last base value measured when the total number of outs reached 60,000 one time before the time before last (the time before last). By displaying the base values for the past several times (the previous base value, the time before last base value, and the time before last base value) in addition to the real-time base value, it becomes possible to more accurately determine whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity, and it is also possible to predict to a certain extent the time when the fraudulent activity occurred.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, every time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, immediately after the power is turned on, all segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are lit for a predetermined period (five seconds in this embodiment). This makes it possible to check whether all segments are lit normally, and to easily determine whether the display on the base display device 401 is normal.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up in a manufacturing factory, or when a used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used machine, etc., the display of the base display device 401 is displayed in a special display mode different from the normal base value display until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) at the beginning of the new start of the pachinko machine 10. When the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, the balls may be manually put into each winning hole and the prize balls may be paid out during shipping inspection for quality confirmation of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the base value at this time is significantly different from the base value of the actual pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, the display of the base display device 401 is displayed in a special display mode different from the normal base value display until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) at the beginning of the new start of the pachinko machine 10, so that it can be shown that the base value being displayed is not the regular base value. Furthermore, this display can indicate that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new startup state.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fourth embodiments can provide the same effects as those obtained by that configuration.

Next, referring to Figs. 45 to 58, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described. In the pachinko machines 10 according to the first to fifth embodiments, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol are preset in the main control device 110, and the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol cannot be changed by hall personnel or the like. In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured so that the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol can be changed in multiple stages (in this embodiment, six stages of set values "1" to "6") by hall personnel or the like. And, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when changing the set value (hereinafter referred to as "probability set value") of the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol (hereinafter referred to as "setting change mode") or when checking the probability set value (hereinafter referred to as "setting check mode"), the probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401 provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured to be able to display the history of errors that have occurred in the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as the "error history") on the base display device 401.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the same configurations and processes as the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fifth embodiments are given the same reference numerals as the first to fifth embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 45 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the base display device 401 is disposed on the main board constituting the main control device 110, and as shown in Figure 45, is assembled so that the display screen of the base display device 401 can be seen when looking at the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. The base display device 401 displays the base value during normal times, while displaying the probability setting value in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode. The base display device 401 is also configured to be able to display error history.

The main board constituting the main control device 110 is also provided with a setting key 501 that is used to change the set probability setting value or check the set probability setting value, and an error display button 502 that is used to display the error history on the base display device 401. The setting key 501 and error display button 502 are provided protruding from the main board through holes provided in the board box 100, and can be operated by hall personnel, etc., without opening the board box 100.

Now, the setting key 501 will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46(a) is a front view of the setting key 501 when the setting key 501 is in the OFF state, and FIG. 46(b) is a front view of the setting key 501 when the setting key 501 is in the ON state. The setting key 501 is configured to be rotatable between two positions, the OFF side indicated by "OFF" and the ON side indicated by "ON", by inserting a dedicated key into a keyhole provided in the setting key 501. The setting key 501 is in the OFF state when positioned on the OFF side, and in the ON state when positioned on the WARM side.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the states of the RAM erase switch 122, the setting key 501, and the door open switch (not shown). The door open switch is a switch that detects when the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened (the door is open).

Figure 47 shows the start-up modes of the pachinko machine 10 and the respective states of the RAM erase switch 122, the setting key 501, and the door open switch (not shown) when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to start up the machine in each start-up mode.

The pachinko machine 10 has four startup modes: normal mode, RAM clear mode, setting change mode, and setting confirmation mode. The RAM clear mode is a mode for erasing (clearing) data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state. The setting change mode is a mode for changing the probability setting value that has been set. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the probability setting value that has been set.

Normal mode is a startup mode other than the RAM clear mode, setting change mode, and setting confirmation mode, and is a mode for resuming play on the pachinko machine 10 from the state before the power was cut by executing various startup processes while retaining the data stored in RAM 203, except when information about the power cut is not stored in RAM 203 or when the data stored in RAM 203 is corrupted.

When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on without turning on the RAM clear switch 122 and with the setting key 501 in the OFF state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in normal mode. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM clear switch 122 in the ON state and the setting key 501 in the OFF state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in RAM clear mode.

On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is turned on, the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, and the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 will start up in setting change mode, provided that the door open switch is on. Also, if the setting key 501 is turned on, and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off, and the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 will start up in setting confirmation mode, provided that the door open switch is on.

In this way, if the setting key 501 is turned off when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, hall personnel can select whether the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is to be the RAM clear mode, which is a start-up mode unrelated to the probability setting value, or the normal mode, depending on whether the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on or not.

On the other hand, when turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10, if the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened and the setting key 501 is turned on, hall personnel can select the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 as either a setting change mode related to the probability setting value or a setting confirmation mode, depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on or not.

In other words, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on, a startup mode unrelated to the probability setting value and a startup mode related to the probability setting value can be selected. When the startup mode unrelated to the probability setting value is selected, the startup mode can be selected as either the RAM clear mode or the normal mode depending on whether the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on, whereas when the startup mode related to the probability setting value is selected, the startup mode can be selected as either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode depending on whether the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on.

If the probability setting value is changed here, the probability of a jackpot and/or the probability of winning the second symbol during play will change, and so if play is continued by inheriting the game state before the power was turned off, there is a risk that the pachinko machine 10 will not be able to demonstrate the specified game performance. For this reason, when the probability setting value is changed in the setting change mode, the pachinko machine 10 erases (clears) the data stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, since the setting confirmation mode is a start-up mode that only confirms the probability setting value, the data stored in RAM 203 is retained (not cleared) so that play can be continued by inheriting the game state before the power was turned off.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in a setting change mode in which the data in the RAM 203 is cleared, the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened, and the setting key 501 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on and the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, whereas when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in a setting confirmation mode in which the data in the RAM 203 is not cleared, the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened, and the setting key 501 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is kept off and the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

In this way, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in a setting change mode or setting confirmation mode related to the probability setting value, the setting key 501 is turned on before turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10. Then, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in a RAM clear mode or setting change mode that clears the data stored in the RAM 203, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing (turning on) the RAM erase button 122. In other words, if hall personnel and the like understand the meaning of each startup mode, they can easily understand what operations are required for the pachinko machine 10 in order to operate the startup mode that is about to be started.

In addition, to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, a dedicated key that can be inserted into the setting key 501 is required, and this key is managed by the hall. This prevents players from arbitrarily checking the probability setting value to search for a pachinko machine 10 with a high jackpot probability and/or winning probability, or from arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability. In addition, the RAM erase switch 122 is located in a position that is normally not easily touched by players, so that in this respect also prevents players from arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability.

In addition, even when starting up in the setting operation mode, there are only two switches that need to be operated at the same time, and they can be easily operated with both hands, making for good operability. As a result, hall staff and others can easily and simply select the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 by selectively turning on and off the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501.

In this embodiment, when starting up in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the condition is that the door opening switch is on, i.e., the inner frame 14 is open, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

This is because, in order to change or check the probability setting value, the hall staff and the like need to visually confirm the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, so the inner frame 14 needs to be open. Therefore, if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without opening the inner frame 14 even though the setting key 501 is on, the pachinko machine 10 is not started up in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, and, as in the case where the setting key 501 is off, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the normal mode if the RAM erase switch 122 is off, and the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode if the RAM erase switch 122 is on. This makes it possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being powered up and starting up in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, and not starting a game in the pachinko machine 10, even though the inner frame 14 is closed with the setting key 501 still on. In addition, a dedicated key managed by the hall is required to open the inner frame 14. This prevents players from opening the inner frame 14 on their own, checking the probability setting value to search for a pachinko machine 10 with a high probability of winning the jackpot and/or winning, or from changing the probability setting value to a high probability on their own.

When starting up in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, it is not necessarily required that the door opening switch is on, i.e., the inner frame 14 is open, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In other words, if the setting key 501 is turned on while the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 may be started up in the setting change mode regardless of whether the door opening switch is on or not. Also, if the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 122 is turned off while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 may be started up in the setting confirmation mode regardless of whether the door opening switch is on or not.

Now, as one of the start-up modes, this pachinko machine 10 has a setting change mode and a setting confirmation mode for changing or checking the probability setting value. However, in this embodiment, the probability setting value can only be changed and checked when the pachinko machine 10 is started up (when the power is turned on) using this setting confirmation mode, and the probability setting value cannot be checked while a game is in progress. This is for the following reasons.

In other words, the display of the base value by the base display device 401, displays related to the role ratio, etc., as well as values representing game performance and game status, etc., must be displayed during play in principle in order to enable early detection of fraudulent activity. Therefore, at the very least, the probability setting value cannot be displayed while the player is playing.

If the setting key 501 were turned on so that the probability setting value could be displayed at times other than when the pachinko machine 10 was started up, it would be possible to stop the game if the player was playing. However, while the main control device 110 can stop the variable time by stopping the game, there is a risk that the variable performance will continue in the third pattern display device 81, which could cause inconsistencies between the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 and display control device 114.

In addition, if the setting key 501 is turned on so that the probability setting value can be displayed at times other than when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing even while playing and check the probability setting value on the base display device 401. However, since the inner frame 12 needs to be opened in order to check the display on the base display device 401, it is effectively difficult for the player to continue playing.

It is also possible to wait until all variable effects, including jackpots and reserved effects, have finished after the setting key 501 is turned on, and then display the probability setting value on the base display device 401. However, many of the variable effects have long variable times, some of which can last for around five minutes. Also, the variable time for normal symbols is set long when the game is in normal play mode, and it takes a long time for all of these reserved effects to be consumed, making it difficult to wait until the probability setting value is displayed.

Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to change or check the probability setting value, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off, the setting key 501 is turned on, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is then turned on again. This allows the probability setting value to be displayed on the base display device 401 when no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10, allowing the probability setting value to be reliably changed or checked by hall personnel and the like. Also, by once turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10, the state before the power was turned off is backed up in the RAM 203, and the start-up process is performed without clearing this backed-up state, so that even if the probability setting value is checked in the setting check mode, gameplay can be resumed from the state before the power was turned off.

In addition, by limiting the possibility of changing or checking the probability setting value to when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, it is possible to prevent players from arbitrarily checking or changing the probability setting value during normal play.

Figure 48 (a) shows the role of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 in the setting change mode. Also, Figure 48 (b) shows the role of the setting key 501 in the setting confirmation mode.

As shown in FIG. 48(a), when the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is updated. Also, when the setting key is turned off in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 at that time is confirmed as the probability setting value for the pachinko machine 10.

In this embodiment, the probability setting value can be set to "1" to "6", and the jackpot random number value and/or the winning random number value of the second symbol are stored in advance in ROM 202 for each probability setting value ("1" to "6"). The jackpot random number value and/or the winning random number value of the second symbol set for each probability setting value determines the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol at that probability setting value. In this pachinko machine 10, the jackpot random number value and/or the winning random number value of the second symbol are set for each probability setting value so that the smaller the probability setting value (closer to 1), the lower the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol, and the larger the probability setting value (closer to 6), the higher the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol.

The jackpot random number and/or the winning random number of the second symbol may be fixed, and the range of random numbers to be generated for the jackpot lottery and/or the range of random numbers to be generated for the winning lottery of the second symbol for each probability setting value ("1" to "6") may be stored in advance in RAM 202. The jackpot random number range and/or the winning random number range of the second symbol set for each probability setting value determines the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol for that probability setting value.

In the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is incremented by one each time the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on. However, when the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on when the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is "6", the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is updated to "1". In other words, in the setting change mode, each time the RAM clear switch 122 is pressed, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 loops between "1" and "6", incrementing by one.

When the setting key 501 is turned off in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 at that time is confirmed as the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10. After the data in the RAM 203 is cleared, the pachinko machine 10 controls the game thereafter using the confirmed probability setting value, and displays the base value on the base display device 401.

In the setting confirmation mode, as shown in FIG. 48(b), when the setting key 501 is turned off, the setting confirmation mode ends and the base value is displayed instead of the probability setting value that was displayed on the base display device 401.

Next, referring to FIG. 49, the display contents of the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing various examples of the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, and FIG. 49(a) is one example.

In the example shown in FIG. 49(a), in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, all segments of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b that make up the identification segment of the base display device 401 are turned off. In addition, of the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d that make up the ratio segment of the base display device 401, all segments of the left 7-segment display 401c are turned off, and only the right 7-segment display 401d is used to display the probability setting value (1 to 6).

As described in the fifth embodiment, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment displays letters (bL., b1., etc.) to identify the type of base value displayed in the ratio segment, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 49(a), in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, all segments of the identification segment are turned off. This allows the display state to be clearly differentiated between when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and when the probability setting value is displayed, so that at a glance, it is possible to know whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a base value or a probability setting value. In addition, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. That is, if the base value is, for example, "6", it is displayed as "06" in the ratio segment. In contrast, in the example shown in FIG. 49(a), in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, only the seven-segment display 401d to the right of the ratio segment is used to display the probability setting value, and all segments of the seven-segment display 401c to the left are turned off. Therefore, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, hall personnel and others can clearly understand that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability setting value by seeing that all segments of the seven-segment display 401c to the left of the ratio segment are turned off.

Figure 49 (b) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In the example shown in Figure 49 (b), in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, in the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b that constitute the identification segment of the base display device 401, only the middle horizontal bar segment is lit and the other segments are turned off. In other words, "- - " is displayed in the identification segment. Also, in the seven-segment displays 401c and 401d that constitute the ratio segment of the base display device 401, only the middle horizontal bar segment is lit in the left seven-segment display 401c, and the other segments are turned off. In other words, "- " is displayed in that segment as well. Then, only the seven-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment is used to display the probability setting value (1 to 6).

This also allows the display state of the identification segment to be clearly differentiated between when the base display device 401 displays the base value and when it displays the probability setting value, so that at a glance it is possible to know whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the base value or the probability setting value. Also, in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value is displayed using only the seven-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment, and a "-" is displayed on the seven-segment display 401c on the left side. Therefore, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit up, hall personnel and the like can clearly understand by looking at the display on the seven-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability setting value.

Figure 49 (c-1) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and Figure 49 (c-2) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. In this example, the display contents are also different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, the identification segment turns off all segments of the seven-segment displays 401a, 401b that make up the identification segment, as in Figure 49 (a). On the other hand, the ratio segment displays "H" indicating the setting change mode or "C" indicating the setting confirmation mode in the left seven-segment display 401c of the seven-segment displays 401c, 401d that make up the ratio segment, and displays the probability setting value (1 to 6) in the right seven-segment display 401d.

This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state of the identification segment when the base display device 401 displays a base value from when it displays a probability setting value, so that at a glance it is possible to understand whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a base value or a probability setting value.

When the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. That is, if the base value is, for example, "6", it is displayed as "06" in the ratio segment. In contrast, in the example shown in Figures 49 (c-1) and (c-2), in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment is used to display the probability setting value, and the 7-segment display 401c on the left side displays "H" in the setting change mode and "C" in the setting confirmation mode. As a result, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment displays "H" or "C" that is different from the numbers, allowing hall personnel and others to clearly understand that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability setting value.

In addition, by displaying different contents on the seven-segment display 401c to the left of the ratio segment for the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to clearly indicate whether the current mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Figure 49 (d-1) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display content of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and Figure 49 (d-2) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display content of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. In this example, as in Figures 49 (c-1) and (c-2), the display content is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, as in Figure 49 (b), in the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b that make up the identification segment, only the middle horizontal bar segment is lit and the other segments are turned off. In other words, the identification segment displays "- -". On the other hand, the seven-segment displays 401c and 401d that make up the ratio segment display "H" indicating the setting change mode or "C" indicating the setting confirmation mode on the left seven-segment display 401c, as in Figures 49(c-1) and (c-2), and display the probability setting value (1 to 6) on the right seven-segment display 401d.

This also allows the display state of the identification segment to be clearly differentiated between when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and when the probability setting value is displayed, so that at a glance, it is possible to know whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a base value or a probability setting value. Even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit up, the seven-segment display 401c to the left of the ratio segment will display "H" or "C" other than a number, allowing hall personnel and others to clearly understand that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a probability setting value. In addition, by displaying different display contents on the seven-segment display 401c to the left of the ratio segment in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to clearly indicate whether the current mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Figure 49 (e-1) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and Figure 49 (e-2) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. In this example, the display contents are also changed between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, but it differs from the examples of Figures 49 (c-1) and (c-2) and the examples of Figures 49 (d-1) and (d-2) in that the display contents are changed in the identification segment. Specifically, the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b that make up the identification segment display "SH." in the setting change mode and "SC." in the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, the ratio segment turns off all the segments of the seven-segment display 401c on the left side, and uses only the seven-segment display 401d on the right side to display the probability setting value (1 to 6).

As described above, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment displays characters (bL., b1., etc.) to identify the type of base value displayed in the ratio segment, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 49(a), in the setting change mode, "SH." is displayed to indicate the setting change mode, and in the setting confirmation mode, "SC." is displayed to indicate the setting confirmation mode. In this way, by displaying different display contents in the identification segment when the base value is displayed and when the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode are displayed, it is possible to clearly differentiate between the two. Therefore, at a glance, it is possible to know whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the base value or the probability setting value. In addition, by displaying different display contents in the identification segment when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are displayed, it is possible to clearly indicate whether the current mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In addition, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment, while in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, only the seven-segment display 401d to the right of the ratio segment is used to display the probability setting value, and all segments of the seven-segment display 401c to the left are turned off. Therefore, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit up, hall personnel and others can clearly understand that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is at least the probability setting value and not the base value by seeing that all segments of the seven-segment display 401c to the left of the ratio segment are turned off.

Returning to FIG. 45, the explanation will continue. The error display button 502 is a button for displaying the error history on the base display device 401. As described above, the base display device 401 is capable of displaying the error history, which is the history of errors that have occurred in the pachinko machine 10. This error history display is only displayed on the base display device 401 while the error display button 502 is being pressed. In other words, the base value continues to be displayed on the base display device 401 unless the error display button 502 is pressed.

There are cases where fraudulent acts are committed by applying impact to the pachinko machine 10 or bringing a magnet close to it, thereby changing the direction in which the balls flow and causing them to enter various winning holes, thereby intentionally obtaining prize balls or triggering a jackpot lottery, or by passing a ball through the through gate 67 to intentionally trigger a winning lottery for a normal symbol. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to detect impacts or the approach of a magnet, and if it detects these, it will stop play as it is a serious error. At this time, the base display device 401 will continue to display the base value rather than displaying the error history.

If the base display device 401 were configured to display the type of error when a serious error was detected, then someone who committed fraud by changing the base value, etc., could intentionally shock the pachinko machine 10 or bring a magnet close to it, causing a serious error in order to hide the base value displayed on the base display device 401, causing the base display device 401 to display the type of error and hide the base value.

In contrast, in the present pachinko machine 10, even if a serious error is detected, the base value continues to be displayed on the base display device 401, so that a person who has committed fraudulent acts that change the base value, etc., cannot hide the display of the base value after the fraudulent act, and fraudulent acts against the base value can be reliably detected.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the error display button 502 is pressed, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 only while the button is pressed. This displayed error history allows hall personnel and others to understand what type of error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. When the error display button 502 is released, the base value is displayed again on the base display device 401.

The error history may display only the most recent error type. Alternatively, the error history may display up to multiple error types (e.g., four errors) going back from the most recent error. When displaying up to multiple error types, the base display device 401 displays them for a predetermined period of time starting from the error that occurred most recently from the current time. If the error display button 502 is pressed when no error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 (or there is no record of an error), the base display device 401 may display a message indicating that no error has been recorded while the button is pressed, or may continue to display the base value.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 while the error display button 502 is being pressed, but if the error display button 502 is pressed once when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, and if the error display button 502 is pressed once when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value is re-displayed on the base display device 401.

Here, referring to Fig. 50, the display contents when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 will be described. Fig. 50 is a schematic diagram showing various examples of the display contents when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, and Fig. 50(a) is one example.

In the example shown in FIG. 50(a), when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, all segments of the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment of the base display device 401 are turned off. In addition, of the seven-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment of the base display device 401, the left seven-segment display 401c displays "E" indicating that the error history will be displayed, and only the right seven-segment display 401d is used to display the error type numerically. For example, if there is an impact detection error, "1" is displayed as the error type, and if there is a magnet detection error, "2" is displayed as the error type.

As explained in the fifth embodiment, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment displays letters (bL., b1., etc.) to identify the type of base value displayed in the ratio segment, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 49(a), all segments of the identification segment are turned off in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode. This allows the display state to be clearly differentiated between when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and when the error history is displayed, so that at a glance, it is possible to know whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the base value or the error history. In addition, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the ratio segment displays the base value in two digits. That is, if the base value is, for example, "6", it is displayed as "06" in the ratio segment. In contrast, in the example shown in FIG. 50(a), when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, only the seven-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment is used to display the probability setting value, and the seven-segment display 401c on the left side displays "E," indicating the display of the error history. Therefore, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit up, hall personnel and others can clearly understand that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the error history.

In addition, even if the display content of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode is as shown in Figure 49 (a), 49 (c-1), or (c-2), when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, an "E" indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the left seven-segment display 401c, so that the display state can be clearly differentiated between when the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 and when the error history is displayed, and it can be understood at a glance whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability setting value or the error history.

On the other hand, when the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode are as shown in FIG. 49(b), FIG. 49(d-1), (d-2), FIG. 49(e-1), (e-2), the display in the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between when the probability setting value is displayed and when the error history is displayed, and at a glance, it is possible to understand whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability setting value or the error history. Also, when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, an "E" indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the seven-segment display 401c on the left side, so that even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, hall personnel and the like can clearly understand that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the error history.

Figure 50(b) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display contents when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401. In the example shown in Figure 50(b), when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, only the middle horizontal bar segment is lit on the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b that make up the identification segment of the base display device 401, and the other segments are turned off. In other words, "- -" is displayed on the identification segment. Also, of the seven-segment displays 401c and 401d that make up the ratio segment of the base display device 401, the left seven-segment display 401c displays "E" indicating that the error history is to be displayed, and only the right seven-segment display 401d is used to display the error type as a number, as in Figure 50(a).

This also allows the display state to be clearly differentiated between when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and when the error history is displayed, so that at a glance it is possible to know whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the base value or the error history. Also, when the error history is displayed on the base display device 40, only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment is used to display the base history, and the 7-segment display 401c on the left side displays "E", indicating the display of the error history. Therefore, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, hall personnel and the like can clearly understand by looking at the display on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability setting value.

In addition, even if the display content of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode is as shown in Figure 49 (b), 49 (d-1), or (d-2), when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, an "E" indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the left seven-segment display 401c, so that the display state can be clearly differentiated between when the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 and when the error history is displayed, and it can be understood at a glance whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability setting value or the error history.

On the other hand, when the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode are as shown in FIG. 49(a), FIG. 49(c-1), (c-2), FIG. 49(e-1), (e-2), the display in the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between when the probability setting value is displayed and when the error history is displayed, and at a glance, it is possible to understand whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability setting value or the error history. Also, when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, an "E" indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the seven-segment display 401c on the left side, so that even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit up, hall personnel and the like can clearly understand that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the error history.

Fig. 50(c-1) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content when the most recent error type is displayed as the error history, and Fig. 50(c-2) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content when the second most recent error type is displayed as the error history. In the examples of Fig. 50(c-1) and (c-2), of the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment, the left seven-segment display 401a displays "E" indicating the display of the error history, and the right seven-segment display 401b displays a number indicating which error type is the most recent error in terms of time. In other words, when the identification segment displays "E1.", this indicates that the error type of the most recent error is displayed, and when the identification segment displays "E2.", this indicates that the error type of the second most recent error is displayed. Meanwhile, the ratio segment turns off all segments of the left 7-segment display 401c and uses only the right 7-segment display 401d to display the type of error.

In this way, by displaying different contents in the identification segment depending on whether the base value, the probability setting value, or the error history is displayed, it is possible to clearly differentiate between them. Therefore, at a glance, it is possible to understand whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a base value, a probability setting value, or an error history. In addition, by displaying a numerical value in the identification segment indicating the most recent error in time that occurred for the displayed error type, it is possible to clearly indicate the most recent error in time that occurred for the displayed error type.

When the base display device 401 displays the base value, the ratio segment displays the base value in two digits, whereas when the base display device 401 displays the error history, only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment is used to display the error type, and all segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side are turned off. Therefore, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, the hall personnel can clearly understand that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is not at least the base value by seeing that all segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment are turned off. And, when the pachinko machine 10 is not being started up, or the error display button 502 is being pressed, the hall personnel can easily understand that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the error history.

Next, referring to FIG. 51, the display mode of the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37 indicating that the base display device 401 is displaying the probability setting value in the setting change mode (hereinafter referred to as the "setting change in progress display") and the display mode indicating that the probability setting value is displaying in the setting confirmation mode (hereinafter referred to as the "setting confirmation in progress display") will be described.

First, FIG. 51(a) is a schematic diagram showing the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. As described above in the explanation of the first embodiment, multiple LEDs 37a are provided, and depending on the lighting state of the multiple LEDs 37a, a variable display is performed, a symbol according to the lottery result is displayed after the variable display, or a reserved series is displayed. Additionally, the LEDs 37a include seven round number notification LEDs 37a1 (first round number notification LED to seventh round number notification LED) for notifying the maximum number of rounds in a jackpot when the jackpot occurs.

This pachinko machine 10 uses the round count notification LED 37a1 to light up the round count notification LED 37a1 in a lighting pattern different from the notification of the maximum number of rounds, thereby notifying the player that a setting change is being displayed or that a setting confirmation is being displayed.

Figure 51 (b) shows the lighting pattern of the round count notification LED 37a1 when it indicates that the maximum number of rounds is 2, when it indicates that the maximum number of rounds is 15, when it indicates that the setting is being changed, and when it indicates that the setting is being confirmed.

When notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 2, the lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 is as follows: the first round number notification LED is "off", the second round number notification LED is "off", the third round number notification LED is "off", the fourth round number notification LED is "off", the fifth round number notification LED is "on", the sixth round number notification LED is "on", and the seventh round number notification LED is "on".

When notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 15, the lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 is as follows: the first round number notification LED is "on", the second round number notification LED is "on", the third round number notification LED is "on", the fourth round number notification LED is "on", the fifth round number notification LED is "off", the sixth round number notification LED is "off", and the seventh round number notification LED is "off".

When indicating that the setting is being changed, the lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 is as follows: the first round number notification LED is "on", the second round number notification LED is "off", the third round number notification LED is "on", the fourth round number notification LED is "on", the fifth round number notification LED is "on", the sixth round number notification LED is "off", and the seventh round number notification LED is "on".

When indicating that the setting confirmation display is in progress, the lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 is as follows: the first round number notification LED is "on", the second round number notification LED is "off", the third round number notification LED is "on", the fourth round number notification LED is "off", the fifth round number notification LED is "on", the sixth round number notification LED is "off", and the seventh round number notification LED is "on".

In this embodiment, the round number notification LED 37a1 is used not only to notify the maximum number of rounds in the event of a jackpot, but also to notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked using a different lighting pattern from the lighting pattern used for these notifications. However, LEDs other than the round number notification LED 37a1, such as an LED that notifies a jackpot symbol or an LED that notifies a winning symbol, or the entire LED 37a may be used to notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked using a lighting pattern that is not used for the original notification. This allows the first pattern display device 37 to notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked by software control alone, without changing the hardware configuration of the first pattern display device 37.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment in that the setting key 501 and the error display button 502 are connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110, and that the impact detection sensor 503 and the magnetic sensor 504 are connected to the input/output port 215 of the payout control device 111. Also, it differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment in that an error detection signal is output from the payout control device 111 to the main control device 110.

The setting key 501 outputs a signal indicating whether it is in the off or on state to the main control unit 110. The main control unit 110 grasps the state of the setting key 501 during the start-up process executed when the power is turned on, and also grasps the contents of the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253 in which the RAM erase switch 122 is provided, and the signal output from the door open switch, and determines the start-up mode based on the conditions shown in FIG. 47.

The error display button 502 outputs a signal indicating whether or not it has been pressed to the main control device 110. Based on the signal output from the error display button 502, the main control device 110 determines whether or not the error display button 502 has been pressed, and displays the error history on the base display device 401 while the button is being pressed.

The impact detection sensor 503 is a sensor for detecting that an impact has been applied to the pachinko machine 10. The magnetic sensor 504 is a sensor for detecting that a magnet has been brought close to the pachinko machine 10.

When the impact detection sensor 503 detects that an impact has been applied to the pachinko machine 10, the payout control device 111 determines that an impact has been applied to the pachinko machine 10 by a fraudster, and that the direction of the balls' flow may have been fraudulently changed. As a serious error has occurred, the payout control device 111 instructs the launch control device 112 to stop launching the balls, and outputs an error detection signal to notify the main control device 110 of the occurrence of the error.

In addition, when the magnetic sensor 504 detects that a magnet has been brought close to the pachinko machine 10, the payout control device 111 determines that a fraudster has brought a magnet close to the pachinko machine 10 and may have fraudulently changed the direction of the balls' flow, and as a serious error has occurred, it instructs the launch control device 112 to stop launching the balls and outputs an error detection signal to notify the main control device 110 of the occurrence of the error.

When the main control device 110 receives an error detection signal from the payout control device 110, it stops the progress of the game. This allows the game in the pachinko machine 10 to be stopped if there is a possibility that a serious error has occurred. The main control device 110 also stores the error type (impact detection error or magnet detection error) notified by the error detection signal received from the payout control device 110 in error data 203t (see FIG. 53) in the RAM 203, which will be described later. When the error display button 502 is pressed, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 based on the error type stored in the error data 203t.

Figure 53 is a schematic diagram showing the data stored in the external work area 203y1 of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. This external work area 203y stores at least base value data 203r, role ratio data 203s, and error data 203t.

The base value data 203r is data necessary for calculating the base value and displaying the calculated base value on the base display device 401, and is composed of, for example, the total out number counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the base value data before last 203n, the base value data before last 203o, and the new start flag 203p, as shown in FIG. 39(a).

The data for the reel ratio 203r is data necessary for calculating the reel ratio and displaying the calculated reel ratio on the base display device 401, and is composed of data equivalent to, for example, the start 1 counter 263a, start 2 counter 263b, normal 1 counter 263d, normal 2 counter 263e, big prize opening counter 263e, out counter 263f, reel ratio data 264a, and continuous reel ratio data 264b shown in FIG. 6, or similar data.

The error data 203t is data indicating the type of error that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. When an error detection signal is received from the payout control device 111, the error type indicated by the error detection signal is stored as the error data 203t. When the error display button 502 is pressed, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 based on the error type stored in the error data 203t.

Here, if the error history displayed on the base display device 401 is limited to the most recently occurring error type, only the most recent error type is always stored in the error data 203t. Specifically, when the main control device 110 receives an error detection signal from the dispensing control device 111, it overwrites the error data 203t with the error type indicated by the error detection signal. As a result, only the most recent error type is always stored in the base display device 401, and the error history displayed on the base display device 401 only shows the most recently occurring error type.

On the other hand, if the error history displayed on the base display device 401 includes the most recent error and displays up to multiple error types (e.g., four errors) going back from that error, the error data 203t stores multiple errors in order of occurrence from the error that occurred closest to the current time.

For example, the error data 203t has first error type data that stores the error type that occurred most recently in time, second error type data that stores the error type that occurred second most recently in time, third error type data that stores the error type that occurred third most recently in time, and fourth error type data that stores the error type that occurred fourth most recently in time, so that the error data 203t stores the four error types in order of occurrence from the one that occurred closest to the current time. Then, when the main control device 110 receives an error detection signal from the dispensing control device 111, it shifts the third error type data to the fourth error type data, shifts the second error type data to the third error type data, and shifts the first error type data to the second error type data, and stores the error type indicated by the received error detection signal as the first error type data. As a result, the error data 203t stores the four error types in order of occurrence from the most recent to the current time, and the base display device 401 displays up to a number of error types (for example, four), including the most recent error, going back from the error in question. Also, in this case, if an address is assigned to each error type data so that the shifting process can be performed with a single LDIR command, the shifting process can be performed with just one LDIR command.

In the case where the error history displayed on the base display device 401 includes the most recent error and displays up to a number of error types (e.g., four errors) going back from that error, the error data 203t may be configured as a FIFO (First In First Out) ring buffer to store the multiple error types. In this case, when the main control device 110 receives an error detection signal from the dispensing control device 111, it may update the address (ring buffer pointer) that stores the error type.

When the pachinko machine 10 is started up in RAM clear mode, it retains at least the base value data 203r, the bonus feature ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t without erasing them. As a result, even if the RAM clear button 203 is turned on, the base value data 203r, the bonus feature ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t cannot be erased, and so they can be displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, even if a fraudster turns on the RAM clear button 203 in an attempt to conceal their fraudulent activity, it is possible to prevent evidence from being concealed.

In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode and the probability setting value is changed, the data in the RAM 203 is erased, but the base value data 203r and the error data 203t are retained without being erased. This prevents evidence from being concealed even if a fraudster changes the probability setting value in an attempt to conceal the fraud. On the other hand, the role ratio data 203s is erased when the data in the RAM 203 is erased after the probability setting value is changed. This is because when the probability setting value is changed, the role ratio also changes, and if the role ratio data 203s based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the role ratio based on the changed probability setting value cannot be calculated correctly. On the other hand, the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed, so by retaining the base value data 203r and retaining past base values and information necessary for calculating the base value, it is possible to discover fraudulent acts that have been committed in the past without concealing them.

In this way, when erasing data from RAM 203 after the probability setting value has been changed, some of the data related to the display of the base display device 401 is retained and not erased, and the remaining data is erased, allowing data to be retained or erased according to the actual circumstances of each piece of data.

The external work area 203y1 may be divided into an area to be erased by erasing data from the RAM 203 after the probability setting value is changed, and an area to be retained without erasing, with the reel ratio data 203s stored in the area to be erased, and the base value data 203r and error data 203t stored in the area to be retained without erasing. This allows data including the reel ratio data 203s stored in the area to be erased to be easily erased by erasing data from the RAM 203 after the probability setting value is changed, and allows data including the base value data 203r and error data 203t stored in the area to be retained without erasing to be securely retained by erasing data from the RAM 203 after the probability setting value is changed.

Next, referring to FIG. 54, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In this startup process, first, the initial value setting process associated with power-on is executed (S4001). For example, a predetermined value is set to the stack pointer.

Next, the internal function register setting process is executed (S4002). In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58) that mainly controls the game is executed with the timer interrupt that occurs every 4 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as the "4 millisecond timer interrupt") as a trigger, and the base display control process (see FIG. 57) that controls the display contents to be displayed on the base display device 401 is executed with the timer interrupt that occurs every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as the "2 millisecond timer interrupt"). In the process of S4002, for example, these 4 millisecond timer interrupts and 2 millisecond timer interrupts are permitted. In addition, when the random number values required for the jackpot lottery and winning lottery are generated by a random number generating circuit (not shown) provided in the main control device 110, the range (maximum value) of the random number values to be generated is set in the process of S4002. In addition, in the process of S4002, access to the RAM 203 is permitted.

In particular, by allowing a 2 millisecond timer interrupt in this internal function register setting process, a 2 millisecond timer interrupt occurs every 2 milliseconds and the base display control process is executed, so that during this startup process, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

Note that it is not necessary to enable the 4 ms timer interrupt or set the range (maximum value) of the random number value in the process of S4002. If the 4 ms timer interrupt and/or the range (maximum value) of the random number value is not set in the process of S4002, the 4 ms timer interrupt and/or the range (maximum value) of the random number value, which was not set in the process of S4002, may be enabled and/or the range (maximum value) of the random number value, which was not set in the process of S4002, may be set in the other start-up process (S4013) described below, which is executed at the stage of transition from the start-up process to the main process.

Next, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 122 is on (S4003), and if it is on (S4003: Yes), it is determined whether the setting key 501 is on and the door open switch is on (S4004). If a positive determination is made in the processing of S4004 (S4004: Yes), the RAM clear switch 122 is on, the setting key 501 is on, and the door open switch is on, so as shown in FIG. 47, the start-up mode is changed to the setting change mode and the setting change processing is executed (S4005).

Here, the setting change process (S4005) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (S4005). The setting change process (S4005) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, and is a process for accepting and confirming changes to the probability setting value from hall personnel, etc.

In this setting change process (S4005), first, the start of displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set (S4101). By setting the start of displaying the probability setting value, the display of the probability setting value is started on the base display device 401 under the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 57) which is executed every 2 milliseconds. The display mode at this time will be one of the modes shown in FIG. 49 (a), (b), (c-1), (d-1), or (e-1).

The probability setting value displayed here may be fixed to a specific value. In other words, when the startup mode becomes the setting change mode, the base display device 401 may always start displaying a specific probability setting value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, "1", which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "4", which are intermediate values of the probability setting values, or "6", which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. This allows hall personnel, etc. to change the probability setting value from the specific probability setting value, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was cut off.

On the other hand, when the startup mode becomes the setting change mode, the base display device 401 may start displaying the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. This allows hall staff and others to change the probability setting value while taking into account the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off.

In addition, when the start-up mode becomes the setting change mode, the base display device 401 may start displaying the probability setting value as "3" if the probability setting value set before the power was turned off is 3 or more, and may start displaying the probability setting value set before the power was turned off if the probability setting value set before the power was turned off is less than 3. For example, when the probability setting value set before the power was turned off is high, such as "5" or "6", there are many cases where it is desired to reduce the probability setting value slightly (for example, by 1). In such a case, if the probability setting value starts displaying the probability setting value set before the power was turned off, the following problem occurs. That is, the probability setting value is updated by adding 1 each time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, and when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the probability setting value is "6", the probability setting value is returned to "1". Therefore, for example, if you want to change the probability setting value from "6" to "5", you must go through almost one cycle of the probability setting value while repeatedly turning on the RAM erase switch 122. In contrast, if the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is high, the probability setting value can be displayed starting at "3," thereby updating the probability setting value while minimizing the number of times the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting value is in the range of "1" to "6" (S4102), and if it is not in the predetermined range, i.e., the probability setting value is abnormal (S4102: No), the probability setting value is changed to the initial value (S4103) and processing proceeds to S4104. This initial value may be "1", which is the minimum value of the probability setting value ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "4", which are intermediate values of the probability setting value, or "6", which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of processing in S4102 that the probability setting value is in the range of "1" to "6" (S4102: Yes), processing in S4103 is skipped and processing proceeds to S4104.

In the process of S4104, it is determined whether the setting key 501 has been turned off (S4104). In the process of S4104, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state, it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off. This is because, as described below, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up without the RAM erase switch 122 being turned on, if the probability setting value is broken and not within the normal range (the range of "1" to "6"), this setting change process is executed, but at this time the setting key 501 is usually in the off state. If it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off by detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the off state, even if this setting change process is executed assuming that the probability setting value is broken and not within the normal range (the range of "1" to "6"), if the setting key 501 is in the off state, a positive determination is immediately made in the process of S4104, and as described below, the probability setting value is confirmed and the setting change process is terminated. Therefore, hall staff and the like will not be able to change the probability setting value. In contrast, if the processing of S4104 detects that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state, and it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off, unless the hall staff or the like operates the setting key 501 from the off state to once on and then back to the off state, a positive judgment will not be made in the processing of S4104, and the hall staff or the like will be able to change the probability setting value.

In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is started up without the RAM erase switch 122 being turned on, and the probability setting value is corrupted and not within the normal range (the range of "1" to "6"), but the setting change process is not executed (for example, when urging hall personnel to restart the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode), it may be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off by detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the off state.

If it is determined that the setting key is not in the OFF state as a result of the processing of S4104 (S4104: No), then it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on or not (S4105). If it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S4105: No), the process returns to S4102, and if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4105: Yes), the probability setting value is updated (S4106) and the process returns to S4102. As described above, the update of the probability setting value, which is the processing of S4106, is performed by adding 1 to the probability setting value if the previous probability setting value is "1" to "5", and by returning the probability setting value to "1" if the previous probability setting value is "6". The probability setting value updated by the processing of S4106 is displayed on the base display device 401 by control by the base display control processing (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds.

The loop process of S4102 → S4103 → S4104: No → S4105 (and S4106) → S4102 continues to be executed until it is determined by the process of S4104 that the setting key 501 has been turned on (S4104: Yes). Then, when it is determined by the process of S4104 that the setting key 501 has been turned on (S4013; Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is confirmed as the probability setting value to be used in the upcoming game (S4107). Then, the end of the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set (S4108), and the setting change process is terminated. Due to the end setting of the display of the probability setting value by the process of S4108, the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is terminated by the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds, and the display of the base value is started on the base display device 401.

Returning to FIG. 54, the explanation of the start-up process will continue. When the setting change process of S4005 is completed, a setting change RAM clear process is then executed (S4006). In this setting change RAM clear process, of the data stored in the RAM 203, the data used to control the game (all data stored in the internal working area 203x1) and the bonus ratio data 203s are erased (cleared), while the base value data 203r and error data 203t are not erased and are retained. By erasing the data used to control the game (all data stored in the internal working area 203x1), a new game can be started using the newly set probability setting value.

As mentioned above, when the probability setting value is changed, the role ratio also changes, so if the role ratio data 203s based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the role ratio based on the changed probability setting value cannot be calculated correctly. By erasing the role ratio data 203s in the setting change RAM clear process, the role ratio based on the changed probability setting value can be calculated correctly.

On the other hand, since the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed, by retaining the base value data 203r in the setting change RAM clearing process and retaining past base values and information necessary for calculating the base value, it is possible to make it possible to discover fraudulent acts that have been committed in the past without concealing them. Furthermore, by also retaining the error data 203t in the setting change RAM clearing process, even if a fraudster who caused an error starts up the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode, the error history cannot be erased, and concealment of fraudulent acts can be prevented.

After processing in S4006, other startup processes are executed (S4013) and the process moves to the main process.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in the processing of S4004 (S4004: No), the RAM clear switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is off or the door open switch is off. When the RAM clear switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is off, as shown in FIG. 47, the start-up mode is set to the RAM clear mode and normal RAM clear processing is executed (S4007). Also, even if the RAM clear switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is on, if the door open switch is off (i.e., the inner frame 14 is closed), the start-up mode is set to the RAM clear mode rather than the setting change mode and normal RAM clear processing is executed (S4007). This makes it possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being powered on and starting up in the setting change mode even though the inner frame 14 is closed with the setting key 501 still on.

In the normal RAM clear process (S4007), the data stored in RAM 203 that is used to control the game (all data stored in the internal work area 203x1) is erased (cleared), while base value data 203r, bonus ratio data 203s, and error data 203t are not erased and are retained. By erasing the data used to control the game (all data stored in the internal work area 203x1), a new game can be started using the newly set probability setting value.

On the other hand, by retaining the base value data 203r, the role ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t rather than deleting them, these can be displayed on the base display device 401 even if the RAM erase button 203 is turned on and the data in the RAM 203 is erased. Therefore, even if a person committing fraud turns on the RAM erase button 203 in an attempt to conceal their fraudulent activity, the fraudulent activity can be discovered from the base value, role ratio, error history, etc. displayed on the base display device 401.

After processing in S4007, other startup processes are executed (S4013) and the process moves to the main process.

If it is determined as a result of the processing of S4003 that the RAM clear switch 122 is off (S4003: No), then it is determined whether or not information about the power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S4008). If it is not stored (S4008: No), it is possible that the processing at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, the process proceeds to S4007 and normal RAM clear processing is executed (S4007).

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S4008: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated, and it is judged whether the calculated RAM judgment value is normal or not, that is, whether the calculated RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of the power outage (S4009). The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at a working area address of RAM 203. In this embodiment, the probability setting value saved in RAM 203 is also used to calculate the checksum value.

If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S4009: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data in RAM 203 has been destroyed. In this case, it is first determined whether the probability setting value saved in RAM 203 is within the normal range (range of "1" to "6") (S4010). If the probability setting value is within the normal range (S4010: Yes), the process proceeds to S4007 and normal RAM clear processing is executed. Needless to say, the probability setting value is not erased and continues to be retained in the normal RAM clear processing and the setting change RAM clear processing.

On the other hand, if the probability setting value is not within the normal range, for example "7" (S4010: No), the process proceeds to S4005, where the setting change process shown in FIG. 55 is executed to have hall personnel etc. reset the probability setting value. At this time, the third pattern display device may display a message encouraging the user to change the probability setting value, or the audio output device 226 may output an alarm or voice to notify the user of this. In addition, an external terminal (not shown) provided on the main control device 110 may notify the hall computer that the probability setting value is not within the normal range. This allows hall personnel etc. to be notified that they need to reset the probability setting value.

If the result of the processing in S4009 is that the calculated RAM judgment value is normal (S4009: Yes), it is then determined whether the setting key 501 is in the ON state and the door open switch is on (S4011). If a positive determination is made in the processing in S4011 (S4011: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is off, the setting key 501 is in the ON state, and the door open switch is on, so as shown in FIG. 47, the start-up mode is set to the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation process is executed (S4012).

Here, the setting confirmation process (S4012) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process (S4012). The setting confirmation process (S4012) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting confirmation mode, and is a process for displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401.

In this setting confirmation process (S4012), first, the start of displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set (S4201). By setting the start of displaying the probability setting value, the display of the probability setting value is started on the base display device 401 under the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 57) which is executed every 2 milliseconds. The display mode at this time will be one of the modes shown in FIG. 49 (a), (b), (c-2), (d-2), or (e-2).

Next, it is determined whether the setting key 501 has been turned off (S4202). In the process of S4202, if it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state, it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off. Note that it may also be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off by detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the off state.

If the result of the processing of S4202 is that the setting key is not in the OFF state (S4202: No), S4202 is repeatedly executed and awaits that the setting key is in the OFF state. During this time, the base display device 401 continues to display the probability setting value. Then, if the setting key is in the OFF state (S4202: Yes), the end of the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set (S4203), and the setting confirmation processing is terminated. As a result of the processing of S4203, the end of the display of the probability setting value is set, and the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is terminated under control of the base display control processing (see FIG. 57), which is executed every 2 milliseconds, and the display of the base value is started on the base display device 401.

This setting confirmation process (S4012) is executed after it has been determined whether the RAM judgment value (checksum) is normal or not. This is because, if the RAM judgment value is abnormal, the RAM clear process should be executed before checking the probability setting value. However, if the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the confirmed setting mode, the setting confirmation process may be executed before it is determined whether the RAM judgment value (checksum) is normal or not.

Returning to FIG. 54, the explanation of the startup process will continue. Once the setting confirmation process of S4012 is completed, other startup processes are executed (S4013) and the process moves to the main process.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in the processing of S4011 (S4011: No), the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is off or the door open switch is off. If the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is off, as shown in FIG. 47, the startup mode is set to normal mode, the setting confirmation processing of S4012 is skipped, other startup processing of S4013 is executed, and the process proceeds to the main processing. Also, if the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is on but the door open switch is off (i.e., the inner frame 14 is closed), the startup mode is set to normal mode instead of the setting confirmation mode, the setting confirmation processing of S4012 is skipped, other startup processing of S4013 is executed, and the process proceeds to the main processing. This prevents the pachinko machine 10 from being powered on and starting up in setting confirmation mode, preventing play from starting on the pachinko machine 10, even though the setting key 501 is still on and the inner frame 14 is closed.

Next, referring to FIG. 57, the base display control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. As described above, this base display control process is a process for controlling the display content displayed on the base display device 401, and is executed in response to a 2-millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 2 milliseconds.

In the base display control process, first, various setting processes are executed to cause the base display device control circuit 402 to control the display of the base display device 401 (S4301). Next, it is determined whether or not the setting of the probability setting value is being changed in the setting change mode (S4302). If it is determined that the setting is being changed (S4302: Yes), setting change segment data including the probability setting value being changed is set as segment data (S4303), and the segment data is output to the base display device control circuit 402 (S4309), and this base display control process is terminated. As a result, the probability setting value is displayed in the base display device 401 in any of the display modes shown in Figure 49 (a), (b), (c-1), (d-1), or (e-1).

If it is determined as a result of the processing of S4302 that the setting is not being changed (S4302: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting of the probability setting value is being confirmed in the setting confirmation mode (S4304). As a result, if it is determined that the setting is being confirmed (S4304: Yes), setting confirmation segment data including the probability setting value being confirmed is set as segment data (S4305), and the segment data is output to the base display device control circuit 402 (S4309), and this base display control processing ends. As a result, the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 in any of the display modes shown in Figure 49 (a), (b), (c-2), (d-2), or (e-2).

If it is determined that the setting is not being confirmed as a result of the processing in S4304 (S4304: No), then it is determined whether the error history is being displayed based on the error display button 502 being pressed (S4306). As a result, if it is determined that the error history is being displayed (S4306: Yes), error history segment data including the error type is set as segment data (S4307), and the segment data is output to the base display device control circuit 402 (S4309), and this base display control processing ends. As a result, the error history is displayed in the base display device 401 in any of the display modes shown in Figures 50(a), (b), (c-1), and (c-2).

If it is determined as a result of the processing of S4306 that the error history is not being displayed (S4306: No), normal game segment data including the base value or the feature ratio is set as the segment data (S4308), the segment data is output to the base display device control circuit 402 (S4309), and this base display control processing ends. As a result, during normal times, the base value or feature ratio is displayed on the base display device 401.

Next, referring to FIG. 58, the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. As described above, this timer interrupt process is a process that performs the main control of the game, and is executed in response to a 4 millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 4 milliseconds.

In this timer interrupt process, first it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range ("1" to "6") (S4401). By determining whether the probability setting value is within the normal range each time the timer interrupt process is executed, even if the probability setting value is corrupted for some reason, this can be discovered early on.

If the result of the processing of S4401 is that the probability setting value is within the normal range (S4401: Yes), normal game processing that performs the main control of the game is executed (S4402), and then role ratio processing (base processing) that performs processing to manage information regarding role ratios and base values, such as calculating role ratios and base values, is executed (S4403), and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

In the game process (S4402), for example, the timer interrupt process S101 to S111 (see FIG. 10) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 described in the first embodiment is executed. That is, the main control of the game includes the lottery for the big win, the setting of the variable display, the opening and closing control of the big prize opening (large opening) 65a at the time of the big win, and the lottery for the win of the second symbol display device 83. Note that while executing the process of S4402, the MPU 201 uses the area 203x (the inner working area 203x1 and the inner stack area 203x2) in the RAM 203. Meanwhile, while executing the process of S4403, the MPU 201 uses the area 203y (the outer working area 203y1 and the outer stack area 203y2) outside the use area in the RAM 203.

At this time, in the processing of S4403, as described in the third embodiment, when transitioning from game processing that mainly controls the game using the area within the use area 203x to processing related to the role ratio and base value that uses the area outside the use area 203y, among the registers 200 provided in the MPU 201, the registers 200 used in this processing related to the role ratio are individually saved to the external work area 203y1 of the RAM 203, and when transitioning (returning) from the processing related to the role ratio that uses the area outside the use area 203y to the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area within the use area 203x after the processing related to the role ratio and the base processing is executed, the registers 200 saved to the external work area 203y1 may be individually restored.

Also, as explained in the fourth embodiment, when a process using the area within the use area 203x is being executed, at the stage where a process for executing a process related to the role ratio or base value using the area outside the use area 203y is read out by a CALL command, the registers 200 used in the process related to the role ratio or base value may be individually cleared to 0, and the process for executing a process related to the role ratio or base value may be read out by a CALL command. Then, at the stage where the process using the area outside the use area 203y read out by the CALL command is terminated and the process returns to the process using the area within the use area 203x, the registers 200 used in the process related to the role ratio may be individually cleared to 0, and the process may return to the role ratio process (base process).

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S4401 is that the probability setting value is not within the predetermined range (S4401: No), the processing does not proceed to the game processing (S4402), but sets a notification command (S4404) and transmits the notification command to the sound and lamp control device 113. In response to this notification command, the sound and lamp control device 113 outputs a notification sound or voice from the sound output device 226 to prompt the hall staff to restart the pachinko machine 10 and change the probability setting value, or outputs a command to the display control device 114 to cause the third pattern display device 81 to display a message prompting the hall staff to call. In addition, an external terminal (not shown) provided on the main control device 110 may notify the hall computer that the probability setting value is not within the normal range. As a result, the hall staff can restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode and perform the process of changing the probability setting value.

Following the processing of S4404, an instruction to stop ball firing is sent to the payout control device 111 (S4405). This stops the firing of balls. After processing of S4405, the timer interrupt processing is terminated. Then, while the probability setting value is not within the normal range (S4401: No), even if the timer interrupt processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, the game processing (S4402) is not executed, and the game is completely stopped. This makes it possible to prevent any disadvantage to the player caused by continuing to play with an abnormal probability setting value.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a start-up mode unrelated to the probability setting value and a start-up mode related to the probability setting value can be selected depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on. When the start-up mode unrelated to the probability setting value is selected, the start-up mode can be selected as either the RAM clear mode or the normal mode depending on whether the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on, while when the start-up mode related to the probability setting value is selected, the start-up mode can be selected as either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode depending on whether the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on. In this way, if hall personnel and the like understand the meaning of each start-up mode, they can easily understand what operations are required for the pachinko machine 10 for the start-up mode to be started.

In addition, the configuration mentioned in the description of the sixth embodiment provides the above-described effects. Also, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fifth embodiments can provide the same effects as those provided by that configuration.

Next, referring to FIG. 59, a pachinko machine 10 according to a seventh embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described. In the fifth embodiment, a case was described in which, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on to update the probability setting value, and the probability setting value is confirmed when it is detected that the setting key has been turned off. In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the setting change switch (not shown) is turned on to update the probability setting value, and the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on to confirm the probability setting value.

The setting change switch is a switch for updating the probability setting value by being operated during the setting change mode, and like the error display button 502, it is provided protruding from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, and can be operated by hall personnel, etc., without having to open the board box 100. The setting change switch normally outputs an OFF signal, and outputs an ON signal when pressed.

The following describes the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. In the following description of the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the same configurations and processes as the pachinko machines 10 of the first to sixth embodiments are given the same reference numerals as the first to sixth embodiments, and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Figure 59 is a flow chart showing the setting change process (S4005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment during the start-up process (see Figure 54). The setting change process (S4005) is executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, as in the sixth embodiment, and is a process for accepting and confirming changes to the probability setting value from hall personnel, etc.

In the setting change process according to the seventh embodiment, first, the same processes of S4101 to S4103 as in the sixth embodiment are executed, and then it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on (S4111). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S4111: No), it is then determined whether the setting change switch is turned on (S4112).

As a result, if it is determined that the setting change switch is not turned on (S4112: No), the process returns to S4102, and if it is determined that the setting change switch is turned on (S4112: Yes), the probability setting value is updated (S4106) in a manner similar to S4106 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 55), and the process returns to S4102. The probability setting value updated by the process of S4106 is displayed on the base display device 401 under the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds.

The loop process of S4102 → S4103 → S4111: No → S4112 (and S4106) → S4102 continues to be executed until it is determined by the process of S4111 that the RAM clear switch 122 has been turned on (S4111: Yes). Then, when it is determined by the process of S4111 that the RAM clear switch 122 has been turned on (S4111: Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is confirmed as the probability setting value to be used in the upcoming game (S4107). When the probability setting value is confirmed, the data in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared) as described above in the sixth embodiment. Therefore, by having the hall staff or the like turn on the RAM clear switch 122 to confirm the probability setting value, the hall staff or the like can be made strongly aware that the data in the RAM 203 will be erased thereafter.

After the processing of S4107, it is then determined whether or not the setting key 501 has been turned on (S4113). In the processing of S4113, if it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off, or it may be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off by detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the off state.

As a result of the processing of S4113, while it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the OFF state (S4113: No), the processing of S4113 is repeatedly executed. Then, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the OFF state (S4113: Yes) as a result of the processing of S4113, the end of the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set (S4108), and the setting change processing is terminated. As a result of the processing of S4108, the end of the display of the probability setting value is set, and the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is terminated under control of the base display control processing (see FIG. 57), which is executed every 2 milliseconds, and the display of the base value is started on the base display device 401.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above form, and it can be easily imagined that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the spirit of the present invention. For example, each embodiment may be modified by adding a part or parts of the configuration of another embodiment to that embodiment, or by replacing a part or parts of the configuration of that embodiment. Furthermore, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it is of course possible to adopt other numerical values.

In the above embodiments, the case where the reel ratio and consecutive reel ratio are calculated, recorded, and output to the inspection device 300 has been described. However, instead of or in addition to the reel ratio and consecutive reel ratio, information indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 10, such as the base value, the number of balls sucked in for 100 balls fired (= 100 - base value), the average number of outs until a jackpot is reached, etc. may be calculated, recorded, and output to the inspection device 300.

In the above embodiments, a counter is provided in the first reading/writing memory 263 to count the number of winning balls for each winning slot, but the number of balls paid out for each winning slot may be counted by a counter provided in the first reading/writing memory 263. In the first embodiment, when it is time to calculate the role ratio, the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio may be calculated based on the number of balls paid out for each winning slot counted by the first reading/writing memory 263, and may be accumulated and recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264. In the second embodiment, when it is time to calculate the role ratio, the number of balls paid out for each winning slot counted by the first reading/writing memory 263 may be accumulated and recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264. In this case, when the number of winning balls for each winning port in 0.5 seconds is stored in the buffer 262, the CPU 261 may multiply the number of winning balls for each winning port by the number of winning balls for the corresponding winning port to calculate the number of balls paid out due to winning during that 0.5 seconds, and add the calculated number of paid out balls to a counter for the corresponding winning port provided in the first reading/writing memory 263, thereby counting the number of balls paid out due to winning for each winning port. Also, when the MPU 201 detects that a winning port has been won, it writes information indicating the winning port at which the winning port was won into the buffer 262, and when the information indicating the winning port at which the winning port was won is written into the buffer 262, the CPU 261 may add the number of balls paid out due to winning at that winning port to the counter for the corresponding winning port obtained in the first reading/writing memory 263, thereby counting the number of balls paid out due to winning for each winning port. In addition, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls paid out as a result of a winning entry into each winning slot every 0.5 seconds (or every specified time) and stores the number in buffer 262.When the CPU 261 writes to buffer 262, it adds the number of balls paid out as a result of a winning entry into that winning slot in 0.5 seconds, which was written to buffer 262, to a counter for the corresponding winning slot obtained in first reading and writing memory 263, thereby counting the number of balls paid out as a result of a winning entry into each winning slot. Also, when the MPU 201 detects that a prize has been won at one of the winning slots, it stores the number of balls paid out as a result of the winning in an area of the buffer 262 corresponding to the winning slot where the prize has been won, and when the CPU 261 writes into the buffer 262, it may add the number of paid out balls written into the buffer 262 to the counter of the first reading and writing memory 263 corresponding to the winning slot in which the number of paid out balls has been stored, thereby counting the number of balls paid out as a result of the winning for each winning slot. In this way, even if the counter provided in the first reading and writing memory 263 is configured to count the number of balls paid out as a result of the winning for each winning slot, the ratio of the role and the ratio of consecutive roles can be calculated from the counted number of balls paid out as a result of the winning for each winning slot, and fraudulent acts can be discovered by analyzing the calculated ratio of the role and the ratio of consecutive roles. In addition, when the number of balls paid out due to winning is stored in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201, it is not necessary to send the prize ball number table 202e to the prize ratio management chip 207, and the prize ratio and consecutive prize ratio can be calculated from the number of balls paid out due to winning for each prize slot stored in the buffer 262. In addition, in order to calculate the prize ratio and consecutive prize ratio in the inspection device 300, the number of balls paid out due to winning counted for each prize slot may be sent to the inspection device 300. In this case, the prize ratio and consecutive prize ratio can be calculated in the inspection device 300 without sending the contents of the prize ball number table 202e to the inspection device 300.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the reel ratio data 264a and the continuous reel ratio data 264b are recorded in the second read/write memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described, but only the reel ratio data 264a may be recorded in the second read/write memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300, or only the continuous reel ratio data 264b may be recorded in the second read/write memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. The inspection device 300 can analyze fraudulent activity by analyzing the reel ratio or continuous reel ratio transmitted from the reel ratio management chip 207.

In the above embodiments, the first reading/writing memory 263 is configured as a volatile memory, but the first reading/writing memory 263 may be configured as a non-volatile memory (e.g., flash memory, FeRAM, MRAM, ReRAM, etc.). In addition, the first reading/writing memory 263 may be configured to supply a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 to the first reading/writing memory 263 even while the power is turned off. In this case, in the process of S711 (see FIG. 18) executed by the CPU 261 when power is supplied to the role ratio management chip 207, initialization of the first reading/writing memory 263 may not be executed. This allows the counters 263a to 263f and the data 263g to 263j stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 to be held even while the power is turned off. Therefore, even if the reel ratio calculation process or winning information storage process is not executed when the power supply to the reel ratio management chip 207 is cut off, the reel ratio and the like can be calculated without missing any winnings at each winning slot that occurred between the timing (trigger) of the most recent recording to the second read/write memory 264 before the power supply was cut off and the timing when it was determined that the power supply was cut off, and the total number of winnings can be recorded to the second read/write memory 264. Therefore, in this case, the capacitor 267 may not be necessary.

In the above embodiments, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the inspection result output process is executed and the information recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 is output. However, in addition to the information, the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 may also be output. The information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 is information that has not been used to calculate the role ratio and continuous role ratio recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 because the timing (trigger) for recording to the second reading/writing memory 264 has not yet been reached, or the information is not recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264. Therefore, by transmitting the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 can perform analysis using the latest information.

In the first embodiment, the reel ratio and consecutive reel ratio calculated by the reel ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300 as information recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264. However, by also transmitting the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 can grasp the raw information before calculating the reel ratio and consecutive reel ratio, that is, the total number of balls that have won in each winning slot, although it is short-term information. Therefore, the analysis in the inspection device 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

As a modified example of the first embodiment, when the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 is transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the calculated feature ratio and consecutive feature ratio calculated by the feature ratio management chip 207 as information recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264, the prize ball number table 202e may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 can use the prize ball number table 202e to calculate and analyze the latest feature ratio and consecutive feature ratio from the total number of winning balls for each winning slot transmitted from the first reading/writing memory 263. Note that the feature ratio and consecutive feature ratio calculated here are calculated based on the total number of winning balls for each winning slot in a short period of time before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b, so the calculated feature ratio and consecutive feature ratio are not necessarily accurate values, but can be used as reference values for the analysis of the inspection device 300.

In addition, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the CPU 261 may calculate the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio based on the information stored in the first reading and writing memory 263, and output the calculated role ratio and consecutive role ratio together with the information recorded in the second reading and writing memory 264 to the inspection device 300. This allows the inspection device 300 to easily analyze fraudulent behavior using the role ratio and consecutive role ratio output from the role ratio management chip 207. In this case, the information stored in the first reading and writing memory 263 may also be output to the inspection device 300. This allows the inspection device 300 to perform a deeper analysis using information related to the latest winning. In this case, the prize ball number table 202e may also be sent to the inspection device 300. This allows the inspection device 300 to perform a deeper analysis while referring to the prize ball number table 202e.

In each of the above embodiments, the reel ratio management chip 207 is provided with a volatile first reading/writing memory 263 and a non-volatile second reading/writing memory 264, and the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 while accumulating until the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, and when that timing is reached, the reel ratio and continuous reel ratio are calculated based on the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 and recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264, or various information accumulated and stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 until that timing is reached is recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264. In response to this, the role of the reel ratio management chip 207 is provided with a non-volatile memory having at least a first reading area that plays the role of the first reading memory 263 and a second reading area that plays the role of the second reading memory 264, and the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored in the first reading area while accumulating until the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached. When the timing is reached, the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio are calculated based on the information temporarily stored in the first reading area and recorded in the second reading area, or various information accumulated and stored in the first reading area until the timing is reached may be recorded in the second reading area. This can reduce the number of parts in the memory, thereby suppressing the increase in cost of the role ratio management chip 207.

In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have won at each winning slot within 0.5 seconds for each winning slot, and also counts the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path, and the number of balls counted for each winning slot, the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path, and information regarding the game status at that time are set in the buffer 262 of the device ratio management chip 207 every 0.5 seconds, and each time this setting is made in the buffer 262, the number of balls that have won at each winning slot set in the buffer 262, the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path, and information regarding the game status are cumulatively stored in the first reading and writing memory 263. In response to this, in the MPU 201, in the timer interrupt processing executed every 2 milliseconds based on the output of various switches, when a winning entry at the first start port 64a is detected by the output of the first start port switch 208a, the start 1 buffer 262a is turned on, when a winning entry at the second start port 64b is detected by the output of the second start port switch 208b, the start 2 buffer 262b is turned on, when a winning entry at the first normal winning port 63a is detected by the output of the first normal winning port switch 208c, the normal 1 buffer 262c is turned on, and when a winning entry at the first normal winning port 63a is detected by the output of the second normal winning port switch 208d, the normal 1 buffer 262c is turned on. When a winning entry at the second normal winning port 63b is detected by the output of the large winning port switch 208, the normal 2 buffer 262d is turned on, when a winning entry at the large winning port 65a is detected by the output of the large winning port switch 208, the large winning port buffer 262e is turned on, and when a ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected by the out switch 208f, the out buffer 262f is turned on, and the corresponding jackpot buffer 262g, open buffer 262h, and error buffer 262i are turned on depending on the game status at that time, and an interrupt signal may then be sent to the device ratio management chip 207. In the setting information receiving process executed in response to an interrupt signal, the bonus ratio management chip 207 counts up the start 1 counter 263a by one if the start 1 buffer 262a is turned on, counts up the start 2 counter 263b by one if the start 2 buffer 262b is turned on, counts up the start 2 counter 263b by one if the normal 1 buffer 262c is turned on, counts up the normal 1 counter 263c by one if the normal 2 buffer 262d is turned on, counts up the normal 2 counter 263d by one if the large prize opening buffer 262e is turned on, counts up the large prize opening counter 263e by one if the out buffer 262f is turned on. The out counter 263f is counted up by one, and when the jackpot buffer 262g is on, the jackpot information is added to the jackpot data 263g together with the time at that time and stored. When the open buffer 262h is on, the door open information is added to the open data 263h together with the time at that time and stored. When the error buffer 262i is on, the error information is added to the error data 263i together with the time at that time and stored. Also, when the time when the setting information reception process is being executed is in the late night hours, the overtime information is added to the overtime data 263j together with the time at that time and stored. This eliminates the need for the MPU 201 to count the number of balls that have entered each winning hole or the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds, and therefore the processing load of the MPU 201 can be suppressed from increasing. Therefore, much of the processing capacity of the MPU 201 can be allocated to the main control of the game that should be performed by the MPU 201.

In this case, the first start port switch 208a, the second start port switch 208b, the first normal winning port switch 208c, the second normal winning port switch 208d, the big winning port switch 208e and the out switch 208f may be directly input to the bonus ratio management chip 207. The bonus ratio management chip 207 may be configured to determine whether or not a prize has been won in the first start port 64a, the second start port 64b, the first normal winning port 63a, the second normal winning port 63b, and the large winning port 65a, and whether or not a ball has been guided to the ball discharge path, based on the outputs of the first start port switch 208a, the second start port switch 208b, the first normal winning port switch 208c, the second normal winning port switch 208d, the large winning port switch 208e, and the out switch 208f. If a prize has been won, the counters 263a to 264e of the first read/write memory 263 corresponding to the winning start port are counted up by one, and if a ball has been guided to the ball discharge path, the out counter 263f is counted up by one. This allows the bonus ratio management chip 207 to immediately reflect the situation when a prize has been won in a winning port or when a ball has been guided to the ball discharge path. Also, the door opening switch 208g may be directly input to the role ratio management chip 207, and the role ratio management chip 207 may determine whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open based on the output of the door opening switch 208g. If the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open, the role ratio management chip 207 may be configured to add and store the door open information together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time to the open data 263h. This allows the role ratio management chip 207 to immediately reflect the situation when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened.

In each of the above embodiments, in the role ratio management chip 207, the number of balls that have entered each winning slot by the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is counted by each counter 263a to 264e of the first reading/writing memory 263, and the number of balls that have been discharged to the ball discharge path by the timing (trigger) is counted by the out counter 263f of the first reading/writing memory 263. However, the first reading/writing memory 263 may be configured to sequentially store the values of the start 1 buffer 262a, start 2 buffer 262b, normal 1 buffer 262c, normal 2 buffer 262d, large winning slot buffer 262e, and out buffer 262d (i.e., the number of balls that have entered each winning slot within 0.5 seconds, and the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path within 0.5 seconds) set by the MPU 201 every 0.5 seconds, together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio are calculated from each value stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 and recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264, or the total number of balls that have entered each winning slot until that timing is reached may be calculated for each winning, and the total number of balls that have been discharged to the ball discharge path until that timing is reached may be calculated and recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264. By this means, the information recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 can be transmitted to the inspection device 300, whereby the inspection device 300 can determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity from the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio. In this case, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263, i.e., the number of balls that entered each winning slot during 0.5 seconds, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path during 0.5 seconds, and the time associated with these numbers of balls (i.e., the time when the number of balls was stored in the first reading/writing memory 263) may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. This allows the inspection device 300 to grasp detailed information such as information on how many balls entered which winning slot and at what time every extremely short time of 0.5 seconds, and how many balls were guided to the ball discharge path and at what time every extremely short time of 0.5 seconds (i.e., how many balls were launched into the play area). Therefore, the analysis in the inspection device 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

As a modified example of the first embodiment, when the information stored in the second reading/writing memory 264 is configured to transmit the role ratio and consecutive role ratio calculated by the role ratio management chip 207 to the inspection device 300 and also transmit the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 to the inspection device 300, the prize ball number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 can calculate the total number of winning balls for each winning slot from the number of balls that have won each winning slot every 0.5 seconds transmitted from the first reading/writing memory 263, and then use the prize ball number table 202e to calculate and analyze the latest role ratio and consecutive role ratio. The combination ratio and consecutive combination ratio calculated here are calculated based on the total number of balls that entered each winning slot within a short period of time before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Therefore, the calculated combination ratio and consecutive combination ratio are not necessarily accurate values, but can be used as reference values for analysis by the inspection device 300.

In addition, when the first reading/writing memory 263 stores the number of balls that entered each winning slot during 0.5 seconds, the number of balls that were guided to the ball discharge path during 0.5 seconds, and the time associated with the number of balls (i.e., the time when the number of balls was stored in the first reading/writing memory 263), the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached. Then, the number of balls that entered each winning slot during 0.5 seconds, the number of balls that were guided to the ball discharge path during 0.5 seconds, and the time associated with the number of balls recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 may be transmitted to the inspection device 300, and the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a may also be transmitted to the inspection device 300. In this way, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning slot for each predetermined section from the number of balls that win at each winning slot every 0.5 seconds, and then calculates the ratio of winning balls and the ratio of consecutive winning balls for each predetermined section using the prize ball number table 202e, and can analyze the possibility of fraudulent activity from the change in the ratio of winning balls and the ratio of consecutive winning balls. In addition, if there is a change in the ratio of winning balls and the ratio of consecutive winning balls that is suspected to be fraudulent activity, the inspection device 300 has inputted detailed information related to the game, such as the number of balls that win at each winning slot during 0.5 seconds, the number of balls that are guided to the ball discharge path during 0.5 seconds, and the time associated with these numbers of balls, so that the cause of the change in the ratio of winning balls and the ratio of consecutive winning balls can be investigated in detail based on this information.

In addition, instead of providing the first reading/writing memory 263, the values of the start 1 buffer 262a, start 2 buffer 262b, normal 1 buffer 262c, normal 2 buffer 262d, special prize opening buffer 262e, and out buffer 262d set by the MPU 201 every 0.5 seconds (i.e., the number of balls that entered each winning opening during 0.5 seconds, and the number of balls that were guided to the ball discharge path during 0.5 seconds) may be recorded directly in the second reading/writing memory 264 in sequence together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. In this case, the information about the game status set in the jackpot buffer 262g, the open buffer 262h, and the error buffer 262i every 0.5 seconds may be recorded in the game status data 264d of the second read/write memory 264 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266, and if the buffer 262 is set by the MPU 201 during the night, the after-hours information may be recorded in the game status data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC 266. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for the first read/write memory 263, thereby suppressing the increase in cost of the bonus ratio management chip 207.

In addition, in the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds in the MPU 201 based on the output of various switches, when a winning entry is detected at the first start port 64a by the output of the first start port switch 208a, the start 1 buffer 262a is turned on, when a winning entry is detected at the second start port 64b by the output of the second start port switch 208b, the start 2 buffer 262b is turned on, when a winning entry is detected at the first normal winning port 63a by the output of the first normal winning port switch 208c, the normal 1 buffer 262c is turned on, when a winning entry is detected at the second normal winning port 63b by the output of the second normal winning port switch 208d, the normal 2 buffer 262d is turned on, and when a winning entry is detected at the large winning port switch 208, the large winning port switch 208 is turned on. When a prize is detected at the prize port 65a, the large prize port buffer 262e is turned on, and when a ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected by the out switch 208f, the out buffer 262f is turned on. In this case, the first reading and writing memory 263 may be configured to sequentially store the values of the start 1 buffer 262a, start 2 buffer 262b, normal 1 buffer 262c, normal 2 buffer 262d, large prize port buffer 262e, and out buffer 262d set by the MPU 201 every 2 milliseconds (i.e., information indicating whether or not a prize has been won at each prize port within a 2 millisecond period, and information indicating whether or not a ball has been guided to the ball discharge path within a 2 millisecond period) together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio are calculated based on each value stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 and recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264, or the total number of balls that have entered each winning slot until that timing is reached may be calculated for each winning, and the total number of balls that have been discharged to the ball discharge path until that timing is reached may be calculated and recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264. By this means, the information recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 can be transmitted to the inspection device 300, and the inspection device 300 can determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity from the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio. In this case, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263, i.e., information indicating whether or not a prize was won at each winning port during the 2 millisecond period, and information indicating whether or not a ball was guided to the ball discharge path during the 2 millisecond period, together with the time associated with the information (i.e., the time when the information was stored in the first reading/writing memory 263) may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. This allows the inspection device 300 to grasp detailed information such as which winning port was won at what time in the extremely short time interval of 2 milliseconds, and at what time the ball was guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., launched into the play area) in the extremely short time interval of 2 milliseconds. Therefore, the analysis in the inspection device 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

In addition, in the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds in the MPU 201 based on the output of various switches, if the output of the first start port switch 208a detects a winning entry at the first start port 64a, the start 1 buffer 262a is turned on, if the output of the second start port switch 208b detects a winning entry at the second start port 64b, the start 2 buffer 262b is turned on, if the output of the first normal winning port switch 208c detects a winning entry at the first normal winning port 63a, the normal 1 buffer 262c is turned on, and if the output of the second normal winning port switch 208d detects a winning entry at the second normal winning port 63b, the normal 2 buffer 262d is turned on. In a configuration in which the large prize opening buffer 262e is turned on when the output of the large prize opening switch 208 detects a win at the large prize opening 65a, and the out buffer 262f is turned on when the out switch 208f detects a ball guided to the ball discharge path, the first reading/writing memory 263 may be configured to sequentially store information indicating the winning opening at which the win occurred if any of the buffers 262a to 262e corresponding to each winning opening is turned on, and information indicating that a ball has been guided to the ball discharge path if the out buffer 262f is turned on, along with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio are calculated based on each piece of information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 and recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264, or the total number of balls that have entered each winning slot until that timing is reached may be calculated for each winning, and the total number of balls that have been discharged to the ball discharge path until that timing is reached may be calculated and recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264. By this means, the information recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 can be transmitted to the inspection device 300, allowing the inspection device 300 to determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity from the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio. In this case, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263, i.e., information indicating whether or not a prize was won at each winning port for 2 milliseconds, and information indicating whether or not a ball was guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the time associated with the information (i.e., the time when the information was stored in the first reading/writing memory 263). This allows the inspection device 300 to grasp detailed information such as which winning port was won at what time, and at what time the ball was guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., launched into the play area). Therefore, the analysis in the inspection device 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

As a modified example of the first embodiment, when the information stored in the second reading/writing memory 264 is configured to transmit the role ratio and consecutive role ratio calculated by the role ratio management chip 207 to the inspection device 300 and also transmit the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 to the inspection device 300, the prize ball number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 can calculate the total number of winning balls for each winning slot from the information indicating the presence or absence of winning balls in each winning slot every 2 milliseconds transmitted from the first reading/writing memory 263, and then calculate and analyze the latest role ratio and consecutive role ratio using the prize ball number table 202e. The combination ratio and consecutive combination ratio calculated here are calculated based on the total number of balls that entered each winning slot within a short period of time before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Therefore, the calculated combination ratio and consecutive combination ratio are not necessarily accurate values, but can be used as reference values for analysis by the inspection device 300.

In addition, when the first reading/writing memory 263 stores information indicating whether or not a prize has been won at each winning port for 2 milliseconds, information indicating whether or not a ball has been guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and the time associated with the information (i.e., the time when the information is stored in the first reading/writing memory 263), the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached. Then, the information indicating whether or not a prize has been won at each winning port for 2 milliseconds, information indicating whether or not a ball has been guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and the time associated with the information, recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264, may be transmitted to the inspection device 300, and the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a may also be transmitted to the inspection device 300. In this way, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning slot for each predetermined section from the information indicating the presence or absence of winning balls in each winning slot every 2 milliseconds, and then calculates the ratio of winning balls and the ratio of consecutive winning balls for each predetermined section using the prize ball number table 202e, and can analyze the possibility of fraudulent activity from the change in the ratio of winning balls and the ratio of consecutive winning balls. In addition, if there is a change in the ratio of winning balls and the ratio of consecutive winning balls that is suspected to be fraudulent activity, the inspection device 300 has inputted detailed information related to the game, such as information indicating the presence or absence of winning balls in each winning slot for 2 milliseconds, information indicating the presence or absence of balls guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and the time associated with these pieces of information, so that the cause of the change in the ratio of winning balls and the ratio of consecutive winning balls can be investigated in detail based on this information.

In addition, when the first reading/writing memory 263 stores information indicating the winning opening where a prize was won, information indicating that a ball was guided to the ball discharge path, and the time associated with the information (i.e., the time when the information was stored in the first reading/writing memory 263), the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached. Then, the information indicating the winning opening where a prize was won, information indicating that a ball was guided to the ball discharge path, and the time associated with the information recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 may be transmitted to the inspection device 300, and the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a may also be transmitted to the inspection device 300. In this way, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning port for each predetermined section from the information indicating the winning port where a prize was won, and then calculates the ratio of the winning devices and the ratio of consecutive winning devices for each predetermined section using the prize ball number table 202e, and can analyze the possibility of fraudulent activity from the change in the ratio of the winning devices and the ratio of consecutive winning devices. In addition, if there is a change in the ratio of the winning devices and the ratio of consecutive winning devices that is suspected to be fraudulent activity, the inspection device 300 has inputted detailed information related to the game, such as the information indicating the winning port where a prize was won, the information indicating that a ball was guided to the ball discharge path, and the time associated with these pieces of information, so that the cause of the change in the ratio of the winning devices and the ratio of consecutive winning devices can be investigated in detail based on this information.

In addition, instead of providing the first reading/writing memory 263, the values of the start 1 buffer 262a, start 2 buffer 262b, normal 1 buffer 262c, normal 2 buffer 262d, large prize opening buffer 262e, and out buffer 262d set by the MPU 201 every 2 milliseconds (i.e., information indicating whether or not a prize has been won at each winning opening during a 2 millisecond period, and information indicating whether or not a ball has been guided to the ball discharge path during a 2 millisecond period) may be recorded directly in the second reading/writing memory 264 in sequence together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. In this case, the information about the game status set in the jackpot buffer 262g, the open buffer 262h, and the error buffer 262i every 2 milliseconds may be recorded in the game status data 264d of the second read/write memory 264 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266, and if the buffer 262 is set by the MPU 201 during the night, the after-hours information may be recorded in the game status data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC 266. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for the first read/write memory 263, thereby suppressing the increase in cost of the bonus ratio management chip 207.

In each of the above embodiments, the checksum value in the area where information is recorded in the second read/write memory 264 (for example, in the first embodiment, the area where the feature ratio data 264a, the continuous feature ratio data 264b, the number of shot balls data 264c, and the game status data 264d are recorded, and in the second embodiment, the area where the number of shot balls data 264c, the game status data 264d, and the winning counter data 264e are recorded) is calculated and stored in the second read/write memory 264, and when transmitting the information recorded in the second read/write memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the checksum value may also be transmitted. Then, when the inspection device 300 receives the information recorded in the second read/write memory 264, it may calculate a checksum value from the received information, compare it with the checksum value transmitted from the feature ratio management chip 207, and if they match, determine that the received information is correct and perform analysis. This can prevent the inspection device 300 from performing an analysis based on incorrect information.

In the above embodiments, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt signal is generated, and the CPU 261 executes the inspection result output process based on the interrupt signal, and the information recorded in the role ratio management chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the information recorded in the role ratio management chip 207 may be output to the inspection device 300 based on a command transmitted from the inspection device 300 connected to the inspection terminal 207a. As a result, if the inspection device 300 transmits a command to the role ratio management chip 207 after it is in a state where it can receive information transmitted from the role ratio management chip 207, the inspection device 300 can reliably receive the information transmitted from the role ratio management chip 207.

In each of the above embodiments, when the CPU 261 is executing the role ratio calculation process (first embodiment) or the winning information storage process (second embodiment), if the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a and an interrupt signal is generated, the execution of the inspection result output process corresponding to the interrupt signal may be put on hold while the role ratio calculation process or the winning information storage process is being executed, and the execution of the inspection result output may be started after the role ratio calculation process or the winning information storage process is completed. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the inspection result output process is executed during the execution of the role ratio calculation process or the winning information storage process, and strange information is sent to the inspection device 300 because writing to the second reading and writing memory 264 is in the middle of being performed.

In the above embodiments, the main control device 110 has been described as transmitting winning information, etc., in one direction from the MPU 201 to the bonus ratio management chip 207. However, the MPU 201 may obtain information output from the bonus ratio management chip 207 and execute some processing based on the information. For example, if the operation of the bonus ratio management chip 207 stops or an error occurs in the processing of the bonus ratio management chip 207, the information is transmitted from the bonus ratio management chip 207 to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 may control the first symbol display device 37 to display, turn on or blink a lamp, output a sound, display the third symbol display device 81, or the like, based on the information, to notify the fact. This allows the hall personnel to know the abnormality of the bonus ratio management chip 207 and to take some kind of action. Furthermore, the MPU 201 may reset the reel ratio management chip 207 based on information indicating that the operation of the reel ratio management chip 207 has stopped or information indicating that some error has occurred in the processing of the reel ratio management chip 207. This allows the abnormality in the reel ratio management chip 207 to be automatically resolved, and the reel ratio management chip 207 to operate again.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the role ratio calculated by the role ratio management chip 207 is received by the MPU 201 and the role ratio is higher than a first predetermined ratio, the MPU 201 may control the pachinko machine 10 to make a first predetermined notification. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the consecutive role ratio calculated by the role ratio management chip 207 is received by the MPU 201 and the consecutive role ratio is higher than a second predetermined ratio, the MPU 201 may control the pachinko machine 10 to make a second predetermined notification. Also, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, the ratio of the reel or the ratio of consecutive reels may be calculated appropriately from the information stored in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264, and the calculated ratio may be transmitted to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 may perform the above comparison and notification based on the ratio of the reel or the ratio of consecutive reels received from the reel ratio management chip 207. As the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 may be displayed in a predetermined color, or a predetermined number may be displayed on the seven-segment display 37b. As the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification, a command may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 so that a predetermined lamp is turned on or blinks in a predetermined manner, or a predetermined sound is output, or a command may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 so that a predetermined symbol or character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a command may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 based on the command. Furthermore, as the first and second predetermined notifications, information indicating that the ratio of features is higher than the first predetermined ratio, or information indicating that the ratio of consecutive features is higher than the second predetermined ratio, may be transmitted to a hall computer installed in the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed via a relay board (not shown). These notifications allow the pachinko machine 10 to directly notify hall personnel of an abnormality in the ratio of features or the ratio of consecutive features of the pachinko machine 10. This makes it easy to find pachinko machines 10 in which there is a possibility of fraudulent activity. Furthermore, such notifications can lead to the prevention of fraudulent activity.

In each of the above embodiments, the reel ratio management chip 207 may determine whether the calculated reel ratio or continuous reel ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio or the second predetermined ratio, and output the determination result to the MPU 201. Then, the MPU 201 may control the reel ratio management chip 207 to perform the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification based on the above determination result received from the reel ratio management chip 207. Also, the reel ratio management chip 207 itself may execute control to perform the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification based on the above determination result. For example, LEDs that perform these notifications may be connected to the reel ratio management chip 207, and the reel ratio management chip 207 may drive and control these LEDs when performing the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification. Also, the reel ratio management chip 207 may directly control the first pattern display device 37 to display the LED 37a in a predetermined color or display a predetermined number on the 7-segment display 37b. In addition, a command for making a first or second predetermined notification may be directly transmitted from the reel ratio management chip 207 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 may control the lighting or blinking of a predetermined lamp, the output of a predetermined sound, or the display of a predetermined display on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command. In addition, the reel ratio management chip 207 may directly transmit information indicating that the reel ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio, or information indicating that the consecutive reel ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio, to the hall computer. This also allows the pachinko machine 10 to directly communicate abnormalities in the reel ratio or consecutive reel ratio of the pachinko machine 10 to hall personnel. Therefore, it is easy to find a pachinko machine 10 in which there is a possibility of fraudulent activity. Furthermore, such a notification can lead to the prevention of fraudulent activity.

In the above second embodiment, when the bonus ratio management chip 207 transmits the information recorded in the second reading and writing memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the bonus ratio management chip 207 also transmits the information of the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a to the inspection device 300. In contrast, the bonus ratio management chip 207 may be configured to request the MPU 201 to transmit the prize ball number table 202e when the inspection device 300 outputs to the inspection terminal 207a or based on a control signal from the inspection device 300, and the bonus ratio management chip 207 transmits the prize ball number table 202e transmitted by the MPU 201 in response to the request to the inspection device 300. Alternatively, the inspection device 300 may directly output a signal to the MPU 201 requesting the transmission of the prize ball number table 202e, and the MPU 201 may receive the request signal and transmit the prize ball number table 202e directly to the inspection device 300. Also, the pachinko machine 10 may be designed to be powered on after the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, and the prize ball count table 202e may be sent to the inspection device 300 during the start-up process executed by the MPU 201. This allows the bonus ratio management chip 207 to eliminate the need for the prize ball count data setting area 265a, thereby reducing the number of registers.

In addition, the main control device 110 may not transmit the prize ball number table 202e to the inspection device 300, and the number of prize balls for the inspection device 300 may be set by manual input. This eliminates the need for the main control device 110 to control the transmission of the prize ball number table 202e, thereby preventing the program of the MPU 201 and the program of the bonus ratio management chip 207 from becoming complicated.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which the prize ball count table 202e is not transmitted to the inspection device 300, but even in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the prize ball count table 202e may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. This allows the inspection device 300 to analyze the possibility of fraudulent activity due to changes in the ratio of roles and the ratio of consecutive roles, while also referring to the prize ball count table 202e.

In each of the above embodiments, an output register (buffer) for temporarily storing information transmitted from the second read/write memory 264 to the inspection device 300 may be provided between the second read/write memory 264 and the inspection terminal 207a. This allows information to be easily transmitted from the second read/write memory 264 to the inspection device 300 via the output register, even if the read speed of information read from the second read/write memory 264 differs from the transmission speed for transmitting information to the role ratio management chip 207.

In the above embodiments, when it is detected that the power supply is cut off, information on the role ratio, etc. is recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263. In contrast, the first reading/writing memory 263 may be configured to be able to store information even while the power supply is cut off by configuring the first reading/writing memory 263 as a non-volatile memory or supplying a backup voltage to the first reading/writing memory 263, etc., and when the power supply is supplied, information on the role ratio, etc. may be recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263. This also makes it possible to calculate the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio without omission for the number of prize balls paid out before the power supply is cut off after recording in the second reading/writing memory 264. In addition, when the power supply is turned on, recording in the second reading/writing memory 264 is performed, so that the risk of the power supply being completely cut off during recording in the second reading/writing memory 264 can be suppressed.

In the above embodiments, when it is detected that the power supply is cut off, the information on the role ratio, etc. is automatically recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 under the control of the CPU 261. In contrast, the trigger information data 202f may be set to "power off" or "power supply" as the timing (trigger) for recording the information on the role ratio, etc. in the second reading/writing memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263. If the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is "power off", when it is detected that the power supply is cut off, the information on the role ratio, etc. is recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263, and if the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is "power supply", when the power supply is supplied, the information on the role ratio, etc. may be recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263. This allows information about the ratio of roles and the like based on the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263 to be recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 when the power is cut off or when the power is supplied, depending on the setting of the trigger information data 202f in the MPU 201. Note that if "power supply" can be specified as the trigger information data 202f, the first reading/writing memory 263 can be configured as a non-volatile memory or a backup voltage can be supplied to the first reading/writing memory 263, so that the first reading/writing memory 263 can be configured to store information even when the power is cut off.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating any one of "number of shots", "time", and "play time" as the timing (trigger) for recording information regarding the role ratio, etc., in the second reading/writing memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263. In contrast, the trigger information data 202f may be able to specify "power supply time". When information indicating "power supply time" is specified in the trigger information data 202f, information indicating a "predetermined time" that is the timing for recording information regarding the role ratio, etc., in the second reading/writing memory 264 may also be specified. For example, if the trigger information data 202f specifies information indicating "power supply time" and information indicating four hours as the "predetermined time", the role ratio management chip 207 may obtain the time indicated by the RTC 266 at the stage of setting the trigger information data 202f in the trigger setting area 265b, store the obtained time in memory as the "power supply time measurement start time", and then determine whether four hours have passed since the power was supplied from the difference between the time indicated by the RTC 266 and the "power supply time measurement start time". If four hours have passed, the role ratio management chip 207 may record information regarding the role ratio, etc. in the second reading/writing memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263. Then, the time when the recording is performed may be obtained from the RTC 266, and the time may be stored in memory as a new "power supply time measurement start time", and then determine whether another four hours have passed from the difference between the time indicated by the RTC 266 and the "power supply time measurement start time". By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the feature ratio by the power supply time, the feature ratio and consecutive feature ratio can be reliably calculated when the power supply time has elapsed for a predetermined period of time, even in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is not played much. Therefore, the reliably calculated feature ratio and consecutive feature ratio can be used by the inspection device 300 to reliably analyze whether or not there is any fraudulent activity.

In the above second embodiment, the information recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading and writing memory 264, which indicates the total number of winning balls at each winning slot for each timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f, is sent to the inspection device 300 together with the winning ball number table 202e. In contrast, when sending information indicating the total number of winning balls at each winning slot for each timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f to the inspection device 300, the role ratio and consecutive role ratio at each timing may be calculated based on the information for each timing, and the calculated role ratio and consecutive role ratio may also be sent to the inspection device 300. Alternatively, when transmitting to the inspection device 300, instead of the information indicating the total number of winning balls at each winning port stored in the second reading and writing memory 264, the ratio of the role and the ratio of consecutive roles may be calculated based on that information, and the calculated ratio of the role and the ratio of consecutive roles may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. This eliminates the need to calculate the ratio of the role and the ratio of consecutive roles in the inspection device 300, making it easier to analyze by the inspection device 300. In addition, when calculating the ratio of the role and the ratio of consecutive roles in the inspection device 300, there is a risk that the ratio of the role and the ratio of consecutive roles may be calculated based on a prize ball number table that is set illegally or erroneously. However, if the ratio of the role and the ratio of consecutive roles is calculated in the role ratio management chip 207, there is no risk of the prize ball number table 202e being illegally tampered with by using the prize ball number table 202e in the prize ball number data setting area 265a set by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on, and the ratio of the role and the ratio of consecutive roles can be accurately calculated.

In addition, not limited to the second embodiment, when information indicating the role ratio or the continuous role ratio is not stored in the second reading/writing memory 264, and information necessary for calculating at least one of them is stored in the second reading/writing memory 264, when transmitting to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 may calculate the role ratio and the continuous role ratio from the information stored in the second reading/writing memory 264, and output the calculated role ratio and the continuous role ratio to the inspection device 300 together with or instead of the information stored in the second reading/writing memory 264. This eliminates the need for the inspection device 300 to calculate the role ratio and the continuous role ratio, making it easier to perform analysis by the inspection device 300. In addition, when the inspection device 300 calculates the ratio of the role and the ratio of the consecutive role, there is a risk that the ratio of the role and the ratio of the consecutive role may be calculated based on the prize ball number table that is set illegally or erroneously, but if the ratio of the role and the ratio of the consecutive role are calculated in the role ratio management chip 207, there is no risk that the prize ball number table 202e is illegally tampered with by using the prize ball number table 202e in the prize ball number data setting area 265a that is set by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on, and the ratio of the role and the ratio of the consecutive role can be calculated accurately. In addition, if the calculated ratio of the role and the ratio of the consecutive role are output to the inspection device 300 together with the information stored in the second reading memory 264, when the inspection device 300 judges that there is something suspicious about the ratio of the role and the ratio of the consecutive role, the cause can be found based on the information stored in the second reading memory 264. In addition, the inspection device 300 calculates the role ratio and consecutive role ratio from the information stored in the second reading and writing memory 264, and by determining whether or not they match the role ratio and consecutive role ratio output from the role ratio management chip 207, it is possible to determine whether any fraudulent activity is occurring.

In each of the above embodiments, an out switch 208f is provided to detect balls guided into the ball discharge path, and the number of balls launched into the play area is counted by counting the number of times the balls are detected by the out switch 208f. However, various methods may be used to count the number of balls launched into the play area. For example, an outlet switch may be provided to detect balls that have passed through outlet 66, and the number of balls launched into the game area may be calculated by adding up the number of balls that have passed through outlet 66 detected by the outlet switch, the number of balls that have passed through the first starting port 64a detected by the first starting port switch 208a, the number of balls that have passed through the second starting port 64b detected by the second starting port switch 208b, the number of balls that have passed through the first normal winning port 63a detected by the first normal winning port switch 208c, the number of balls that have passed through the second normal winning port 63b detected by the second normal winning port switch 208d, and the number of balls that have passed through the large winning port 65a detected by the large winning port switch 208e. Alternatively, a supplied ball detection switch for detecting balls supplied to the ball launching unit 112a and a foul ball detection switch for detecting balls launched by the ball launching unit 112a and discharged from the ball guide passage as foul balls without reaching the play area may be provided, and the number of balls launched into the play area may be counted by a counter that counts up by one each time a ball is detected by the supplied ball detection switch and counts down by one each time a ball is detected by the foul ball detection switch. Alternatively, instead of the supplied ball detection switch, a launched ball detection switch for detecting balls launched by the ball launching unit 112a may be provided, and the number of balls launched into the play area may be counted by a counter that counts up by one each time a ball is detected by the launched ball detection switch and counts down by one each time a ball is detected by the foul ball detection switch. In addition, a game ball detection switch may be provided on the return ball prevention member 68 provided at the tip of the inner rail 61, and the game ball detection switch may detect a ball guided from the ball guide passage to the game area. A counter may be provided that counts up by one each time a ball is detected by the game ball detection switch, thereby counting the balls launched into the game area.

In each of the above embodiments, a CPU 261 is provided in the reel ratio management chip 207, and information relating to reel ratios and consecutive reel ratios is recorded in the second read/write memory 264 based on software executed by the CPU 261, and transmitted to the inspection device 300. In contrast, some or all of the functions of the reel ratio management chip 207 may be configured using wired logic. By configuring using wired logic, information relating to reel ratios can be managed at high speed.

In each of the above embodiments, the device ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110, and the device ratio management chip 207 records information about the device ratio and transmits it to the inspection device 300. In contrast, a non-volatile memory may be connected to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 may record information about the device ratio in the non-volatile memory, and the MPU 201 may control the information recorded in the non-volatile memory to be transmitted to the inspection device 300. This allows the MPU 201 to use the information about the winning balls in each winning hole detected by the MPU 201 and the balls guided to the ball discharge path itself to manage information about the device ratio without transferring it to another chip, making it less susceptible to noise and allowing for more accurate management of information about the device ratio.

Also, the reel ratio management chip 207 may be provided separately from the main control device 110, and may be configured so that the reel ratio management chip 207 and the main control device 110 are connected. In this case, the reel ratio management chip 207 may be stored in the same board box 100 as the main control device 110, or may be stored in a board box other than the board box 100 in which the main control device 110 is stored. When storing the reel ratio management chip 207 in a board box other than the main control device 110, the reel ratio management chip 207 may be stored in a board box dedicated to the reel ratio management chip 207, or may be stored in any of the board boxes 101 to 104 in which other control devices, etc. are stored.

The bonus feature ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the payout control device 111, or the bonus feature ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the payout control device 111. The bonus feature ratio management chip 207 may record information about bonus feature ratios based on a signal from the payout control device 111 and transmit it to the inspection device 300. In this case, information about winning for each winning slot (for example, information indicating the number of winning balls for each winning slot within a specified time (for example, 0.5 seconds)) may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the bonus feature ratio management chip 207. In addition, the prize ball command sent from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 includes information indicating which winning port the prize ball is associated with, together with the number of prize balls (the number of balls to be paid out), and based on the prize ball command, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball command is set in the buffer 262 in an area corresponding to the winning port where the prize was won, and the number of prize balls set in the buffer 262 is added to the counter of the corresponding winning port provided in the first reading and writing memory 263, so that the counter counts the number of balls paid out for each winning port due to the winning of the corresponding winning port. Furthermore, instead of the bonus ratio management chip 207, the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 may realize the function of the bonus ratio management chip 207. With these, information regarding the bonus ratio can be recorded in the bonus ratio management chip 207 or the payout control device 111 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. In these cases, when the power is turned on in the main control device 110, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 may send information in the prize ball count table 202e and information in the trigger information data 202f by command from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111. This allows the payout control device 111 to manage the ratio of prizes and the like using this information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

In addition, the reel ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the sound lamp control device 113, or the reel ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the sound lamp control device 113. The reel ratio management chip 207 may record information about the reel ratio based on a signal from the sound lamp control device 113 and transmit it to the inspection device 300. In this case, information about winning for each winning slot (for example, information indicating the number of winning balls for each winning slot during a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds)) may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the reel ratio management chip 207. Furthermore, instead of the reel ratio management chip 207, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 may realize the function of the reel ratio management chip 207. With these, information about the reel ratio can be recorded in the reel ratio management chip 207 or the sound lamp control device 113 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. In addition, by managing the role ratio with the role ratio management chip 207 or the sound lamp control device 113, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display the calculated role ratio, consecutive role ratio, etc. on the third pattern display device 81. By displaying on the third pattern display device 81, hall personnel can easily find a pachinko machine 10 with an abnormal role ratio or consecutive role ratio, and it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from committing an illegal act. In addition, when the role ratio or consecutive role ratio calculated by the role ratio management chip 207 or the sound lamp control device 113 is in a predetermined state (for example, a state in which fraudulent activity is suspected), the sound lamp control device 113 may control the sound output device 226 to output a predetermined alarm sound, or the lamp display device 227 to light up or blink in a predetermined manner, or a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display a predetermined display on the third pattern display device 81. This allows hall personnel to easily discover pachinko machines 10 suspected of fraudulent activity and also prevents fraudsters from committing fraudulent acts. In these cases, when the power is turned on in the main control device 110, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 may send information in the number of winning balls table 202e and information in the trigger information data 202f by command from the main control device 110 to the sound and lamp control device 113. This allows the sound and lamp control device 113 to manage the ratio of prize devices and the like using this information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

In addition, the reel ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the display control device 114, or the reel ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the display control device 114. The reel ratio management chip 207 may record information about the reel ratio based on a signal from the display control device 114 and transmit it to the inspection device 300. In this case, information about winning for each winning slot (for example, information indicating the number of winning balls for each winning slot during a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds)) may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the reel ratio management chip 207. Furthermore, instead of the reel ratio management chip 207, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 may realize the function of the reel ratio management chip 207. With these, information about the reel ratio can be recorded in the reel ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. In addition, by managing the role ratio with the role ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114, the display control device 114 may control the third pattern display device 81 to display the calculated role ratio, consecutive role ratio, etc. By displaying on the third pattern display device 81, the hall staff can easily find a pachinko machine 10 with a wrong role ratio or consecutive role ratio, and it is possible to suppress a fraudulent person from committing an illegal act. In addition, when the role ratio or consecutive role ratio calculated by the role ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114 is in a predetermined state (for example, a state in which fraudulent act is suspected), the display control device 114 may control the third pattern display device 81 to display a predetermined display. This allows the hall staff to easily find a pachinko machine 10 suspected of fraudulent act, and it is possible to suppress a fraudulent person from committing an illegal act. In these cases, when the power is turned on in the main control device 110, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 may send information in the prize ball count table 202e and information in the trigger information data 202f by command from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113. This allows the display control device 114 to manage the ratio of prizes and the like using this information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

In each of the above embodiments, a display device having multiple seven-segment displays may be provided on a board on which the main control device 110 is provided, or on a board connected to the reel ratio management chip 207, or on which the reel ratio management chip 207 is mounted, or on which a control device that realizes the functions of the reel ratio management chip 207 is provided, and the reel ratio, consecutive reel ratio, information related to the reel ratio and consecutive reel ratio, or information indicating game performance (for example, base value, etc.) may be displayed on the display device. Instead of a seven-segment display, the display device may be configured with a liquid crystal display with a predetermined number of pixels, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, etc. The display device may be provided on the board on which the main control device 110 is provided, or on a board connected to the feature ratio management chip 207, or on which the feature ratio management chip 207 is mounted, or on which a control device that realizes the functions of the feature ratio management chip 207 is mounted, but may be provided on the board on which the main control device 110 is provided, or on which the feature ratio management chip 207 is connected, or on which the feature ratio management chip 207 is mounted, or on which a control device that realizes the functions of the feature ratio management chip 207 is mounted. The display device may be assembled so that the display screen of the display device can be seen when looking at the back side of the pachinko machine 10, or so that the display screen of the display device can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

The information on the ratio of the reels and the ratio of consecutive reels displayed on the display device may be, for example, information showing the total number of balls paid out by winning for each winning port, or information showing the total number of balls paid out by winning in all winning ports, the total number of balls paid out by winning in winning ports where the reels are activated (in this embodiment, the second start port 64b and the large winning port 65a), and the total number of balls paid out by winning in winning ports where the reels are activated continuously (in this embodiment, the large winning port 65a). Information showing the total number of balls (number of shot balls) fired into the play area may be included in the information on the ratio of the reels and the ratio of consecutive reels displayed on the display device. The display device may be configured with a liquid crystal display with a predetermined number of pixels, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, or the like, instead of a 7-segment display, and the ratio of the reels and the ratio of consecutive reels, or information related to the ratio of the reels and the ratio of consecutive reels may be displayed on the display device.

The ratio of reels or consecutive reels, information related to the ratio of reels or consecutive reels, or information indicating game performance displayed on the display device may be the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 at the timing (trigger) when the most recent recording was made in the second reading memory 264, or information generated from that information. Also, at the timing (trigger) when recording was made in a plurality of second reading memories 264, including the most recent, the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, or information generated from the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 at each timing, may be displayed on the display device as the ratio of reels or consecutive reels, information related to the ratio of reels or consecutive reels, or information indicating game performance. In addition, at the timing (trigger) of recording to a plurality of second reading/writing memories 264 including the most recent one, the average value of the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, information related to the role ratio and consecutive role ratio, or information indicating the game performance may be calculated from the information recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 or the information of all timings (triggers) recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264, and the average value may be displayed on the display device. Furthermore, the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, information related to the role ratio and consecutive role ratio, or information indicating the game performance may be generated by reflecting not only the information recorded in the second reading/writing memory 264 but also the information stored in the first reading/writing memory 263, and displayed on the display device.

By this, by looking at the display device, it is possible to judge the possibility of fraudulent acts being committed from the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, information related to the role ratio and consecutive role ratio, or information indicating the game performance. The display device may simultaneously display the role ratio, consecutive role, information related to the role ratio and consecutive role ratio, or information indicating the game performance, or may display them one by one. Also, the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, information related to the role ratio and consecutive role ratio, or information indicating the game performance may be displayed alternately at predetermined time intervals. When displaying alternately, information indicating what is being displayed may be displayed together. Also, when the role ratio or consecutive role ratio or other information displayed on the display device exceeds a predetermined ratio (for example, when the role ratio exceeds 70% or the consecutive role ratio exceeds 60%), the displayed role ratio or consecutive role ratio or other information may be displayed in a color different from normal or flashed. In addition, the display device may display the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, information related to the role ratio and consecutive role ratio, or information indicating the game performance only for a predetermined period from when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, it may be a predetermined period such as 30 seconds, or it may be a period until a predetermined process is completed, such as a period until the start-up process is completed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110). This allows the hall staff to easily check whether or not any kind of fraud has occurred by checking the role ratio and consecutive role ratio, or information related to the role ratio and consecutive role ratio, displayed on the display device when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the display device may display the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, information related to the role ratio and consecutive role ratio, or information indicating the game performance when it is determined that the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned off. This allows the hall staff to easily check whether or not any kind of fraud has occurred by checking the role ratio and consecutive role ratio, displayed on the display device when the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned off. In addition, when it is determined that the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 has been cut off, the display of the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, information related to the role ratio and consecutive role ratio, or information indicating the game performance on the display device may be limited to a predetermined period (for example, it may be a predetermined period such as 10 seconds, or it may be a period until a predetermined process is completed, such as a period until the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 finishes the process related to the power supply cut (for example, until the process of S705 is completed)). In addition, when it is determined that the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 has been cut off, the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, information related to the role ratio and consecutive role ratio, or information indicating the game performance on the display device may be performed using power from a backup power source, a secondary battery, a large-capacity capacitor, etc. In addition, the display device may be stored in a board box. This makes it possible to suppress actions such as displaying illegal values on the display device.

In addition, the display device may be provided with a button for displaying the ratio of the reels, the ratio of consecutive reels, information related to the ratio of the reels, or information indicating the game performance, and when the button is operated, the display device may display the ratio of the reels, the ratio of consecutive reels, information related to the ratio of the reels, or information indicating the game performance. As a result, only when the ratio of the reels, the ratio of consecutive reels, or other information is confirmed, the display device may be displayed by operating the button, so that the wasteful consumption of power in the display device can be suppressed. In addition, the operation of the button may be effective only when the game is not being played in the pachinko machine 10, and the display device may display the ratio of the reels, the ratio of consecutive reels, information related to the ratio of the reels, or information indicating the game performance. The pachinko machine 10 may determine that a game is not being played when, for example, the out switch 208f has not detected a ball guided to the ball discharge path for a predetermined period of time or more, when the operating handle 51 has not been rotated, when the ball launch unit 112a has not launched a ball, or when a ball guided to the play area has not been detected. This can prevent cheaters from looking at the information displayed on the display device while playing the game and attempting to commit some kind of fraud.

The operation of the button may be made effective only when it is operated in combination with another button. This makes it possible to prevent a fraudulent person who does not know the effective combination of button operations from easily displaying the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, information related to the role ratio and consecutive role ratio, or information indicating the game performance on the display device. Also, the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, information related to the role ratio and consecutive role ratio, or information indicating the game performance may be displayed on the display device only when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 while operating a button for displaying the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, information related to the role ratio and consecutive role ratio, or information indicating the game performance on the display device. This allows a person involved in the hall to easily check whether or not any fraudulent activity occurred during business hours on the previous day or outside business hours at night by operating the button in addition to checking the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, information related to the role ratio and consecutive role ratio, or information indicating the game performance displayed on the display device. Also, the display device may display the information related to the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, or the information related to the role ratio or the consecutive role ratio, or the information indicating the gaming performance, only when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off while operating a button for displaying the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, or the information related to the role ratio or the consecutive role ratio, or the information indicating the gaming performance on the display device. In this way, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the hall staff can easily check whether or not any fraudulent activity has occurred before or during today's business by checking the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, or the information related to the role ratio or the consecutive role ratio, or the information indicating the gaming performance displayed on the display device by operating the button. The display of the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, or the information related to the role ratio or the consecutive role ratio, or the information indicating the gaming performance on the display device by operating the button may end based on the passage of a predetermined period, or may end when the button is operated again. Also, only while the button is being operated continuously, information related to the ratio of reels or consecutive reels, or information indicating game performance may be displayed.

In addition, when the button is operated and the display device displays the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, information related to the role ratio or consecutive role ratio, or information indicating the game performance, the game mode of the pachinko machine 10 may be set to check mode, and the main control of the game in the main control device 110 may be temporarily stopped. This prevents the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, information related to the role ratio or consecutive role ratio, or information indicating the game performance displayed on the display device from changing as the game progresses, making it difficult to check the role ratio, etc. In this case, the main control device 110 may send a command to the sound lamp control device 113 (and the display control device 114) to notify that the game mode will be transitioned to the check mode at the stage of setting the game mode of the pachinko machine 10 to check mode and temporarily stopping the main control of the game. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 receive a command notifying the transition to the check mode, they may control the third symbol display device 81 to display a predetermined image (e.g., a black screen) corresponding to the check mode, to keep the ongoing variable performance varying at high speed during the check mode period, to make the sound output from the sound output device 226 a predetermined sound corresponding to the check mode, or to output a sound corresponding to the high speed variation. This allows the player to be informed that the pachinko machine 10 has entered the check mode. In addition, the main control device 110 may transmit a command to the voice lamp control device 113 (and the display control device 114) notifying the check mode that the check mode is being released at the stage of releasing the check mode as the game mode of the pachinko machine 10 and resuming the main control of the game. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to return the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 to those before the transition to the check mode.

In the modified examples described so far, when a button is operated, the display device provided on the board of the main control device 110 or the like displays the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, information related to the role ratio or consecutive role ratio, or information indicating game performance. In addition to this, or instead of this, when a button is operated, the first pattern display device 37, the third pattern display device 81, the lamp display device 227, or the like may display the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, information related to the role ratio or consecutive role ratio, or information indicating game performance, or the audio output device 226 may output some kind of notification sound indicating the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, or game performance. In this case, too, the modified examples described above may be applied as appropriate in relation to the button operation.

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which information related to the role ratio is transmitted to the inspection device 300 when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a. However, instead of this, information related to the role ratio may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 when the button operation described above is performed. In this case, too, the above-mentioned modified examples may be applied as appropriate in relation to the button operation.

In the above embodiments, the case where the information managed by the reel ratio management chip 207 is transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described, but if some kind of notification is made based on the information managed by this reel ratio management chip 207, such as by displaying the reel ratio, consecutive reel ratio, and other various information on a display device provided on a board of the main control device 110, or by displaying information on the reel ratio, consecutive reel ratio, or information indicating game performance on the first pattern display device 37, the third pattern display device 81, the lamp display device 227, or the like, or by outputting some kind of notification sound related to the reel ratio, consecutive reel ratio, or game performance from the audio output device 226, transmission to the inspection device 300 is not necessarily performed.

In the above embodiments, a large-capacity capacitor 267 or secondary battery is connected to the reel ratio management chip 207, and when the power supply to the main control device 110 is stopped due to a power outage or the like, the reel ratio management chip 207 uses the power charged in the capacitor 267 to execute processing associated with the power cut. In contrast, instead of the capacitor 267 or secondary battery, a backup voltage may be supplied from the power supply device 115 to the reel ratio management chip 207. This allows the information stored in the first reading and writing memory 263 to be retained even while the power is cut off. In addition, if a fraudster attempts to set fraudulent information in the buffer 262 during late-night hours, the after-hours information can be stored in the after-hours data 263j of the first reading and writing memory 263, and then the after-hours information can be recorded in the game status data 264d of the second reading and writing memory 264 at a predetermined timing.

In the above embodiment, when the MPU 201 determines whether the interrupt signal after the buffer 262 is set is sent during the late night time period by the process of S724 (see FIG. 19), the case where the time indicated by the RTC 266 is determined to be between midnight and 6:00 a.m. may be described. The threshold value of the time used to determine the late night time period may be set by the MPU 201. For example, the late night time period determination time data that specifies the threshold value of the time may be stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201, and the late night time period determination time data stored in the ROM 202 may be set in the late night time period determination time setting area provided in the setting register 265 together with the prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f during the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is supplied. Then, in the process of S724, it may be determined whether the MPU 201 sent the interrupt signal after the buffer 262 is set during the time period indicated by the late night time period determination time data. This allows the determination of late night hours to be variably set by ROM 202.

In each of the above embodiments, when power is applied to the feature ratio management chip 207, the power-on information may be stored in the first read/write memory 263 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time, and the power-on information may be recorded in the game status data 264d of the second read/write memory 264 at a predetermined timing together with the time. Also, when power is applied to the feature ratio management chip 207, the power-on information may be directly recorded in the game status data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. As a result, information regarding the time when the power was applied is also transmitted to the inspection device 300. Therefore, if there is a possibility of fraudulent activity due to changes in the feature ratio and the consecutive feature ratio, the cause can be investigated from multiple perspectives by also including the time when the power was applied.

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, when the power supply to the feature ratio management chip 207 is cut off, the power supply cut information may be stored in the first read/write memory 263 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time, and the power supply cut information may be recorded in the game status data 264d of the second read/write memory 264 together with the time at a predetermined timing. In this case, the first read/write memory 263 may be configured as a non-volatile memory or may be supplied with a backup voltage. In addition, when the power supply to the feature ratio management chip 207 is cut off, the power supply cut information may be recorded directly in the game status data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. In this case, the first read/write memory 263 does not necessarily have to be configured as a non-volatile memory or to be supplied with a backup voltage. As a result, information regarding the time when the power supply was cut off is also transmitted to the inspection device 300. Therefore, if there is a possibility of fraudulent activity due to changes in the feature ratio and the consecutive feature ratio, the cause can be explored from multiple angles, including the time when the power supply was cut off.

In the above embodiment, when the power supplied to the main control device 110 is cut off and the processing of S704 to S707 is executed in the main processing of the MPU 201 (see FIG. 17), after the processing of S704 is executed and before the processing of S705 is executed, the same processing as the processing of S155 and S156 shown in FIG. 11 may be executed. That is, in the processing when the power is cut off, after the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited (S704), the values of the start 1 counter 203d, start 2 counter 203e, normal 1 counter 203f, normal 2 counter 203g, and large prize opening counter 203h in the RAM 203 may be set as winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i may be set as out information in the role ratio management chip 207 together with the game state of the pachinko machine 10 at that time, and an interrupt signal may be sent to the role ratio management chip 207. This allows the number of balls that entered each winning slot and the balls that were guided to the ball discharge path just before the power was turned off, but that have not been counted in the bonus ratio management chip 207, to be counted by the bonus ratio management chip 207 before the power is turned off. Therefore, the number of balls that entered each winning slot and the balls that were guided to the ball discharge path just before the power was turned off can be recorded without omission by the bonus ratio management chip 207.

In the above embodiments, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the ratio of the game features indicated by the trigger information data 202f is "play time", the game time is calculated by counting the time when the ball guided to the ball discharge path by the out switch 208f is detected, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an out switch that detects the ball passing through the out port 66 may be provided, and when the ball passing through each winning port or out port is detected by any of the out switch, the first start port switch 208a, the second start port switch 208b, the first normal winning port switch 208c, the second normal winning port switch 208d, and the large winning port switch 208e, the game time may be calculated by counting the detected time. The game time may be calculated by accumulating the time during which the player is determined to be touching the operation handle 51 based on the output of the touch sensor 51a provided on the operation handle 51, or by accumulating the time during which the operation handle 51 is rotated by the player, or by accumulating the time during which the player is touching the operation handle 51 and rotating the operation handle 51. The game time may also be calculated by accumulating the time during which the ball launch unit 112a is driven by the launch control device 112 and the ball is launched. The game time may also be calculated by providing a game ball detection switch on the return ball prevention member 68 provided at the tip of the inner rail 61, and counting the time during which the game ball detection switch continues to detect the ball guided from the ball guide passage to the game area.

In each of the above embodiments, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of hitting the second symbol is preset by the main control device 110 and cannot be changed by hall personnel or the like, but instead, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of hitting the second symbol may be configured to be changeable in multiple stages (e.g., six stages) by hall personnel or the like. This allows the hall to vary the jackpot probability and/or the probability of hitting the second symbol for each pachinko machine of the same model, giving players the fun of selecting a machine.

The jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed, for example, as follows. First, for each of the multiple stages (hereinafter described as six stages (levels 1 to 6)) in which the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol can be changed, the jackpot random number value and/or the winning random number value of the second symbol at the corresponding level (stage) are stored in advance in ROM 202. The jackpot random number value and/or the winning random number value of the second symbol determined for each level determines the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol at that level.

A keyhole is provided on the main board provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 for changing the jackpot probability and/or the probability of hitting the second symbol. The keyhole may be normally covered by the rear pack 92 of the rear pack unit 94, or may be revealed by opening the rear pack 92. Alternatively, an opening for the keyhole may be provided in the rear pack 92, and the keyhole may be exposed from the opening. The keyhole is configured to be rotatable between two positions, the "probability setting off" side and the "probability setting on" side, by a dedicated key, and when it is on the "probability setting off" side, the dedicated key can be inserted and removed from the keyhole. When the keyhole is set to the "probability setting on" position by the dedicated key, the pachinko machine 10 can change the jackpot probability and/or the probability of hitting the second symbol. In addition, when the keyhole is rotated from the "probability setting off" position to the "probability setting on" position by a dedicated key while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is off, and when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to start in a probability setting mode in which the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol can be changed. This allows the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol to be safely changed in accordance with the start-up of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall. Also, when the keyhole is rotated from the "probability setting off" position to the "probability setting on" position by a dedicated key while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is on, it may be configured so that the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol cannot be changed. This makes it possible to prevent a fraudulent person from fraudulently changing the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol during business hours.

In the pachinko machine 10, a push-type probability setting button for changing the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol is provided on the main board. This probability setting button is usually covered by the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94, like a keyhole, and appears when the back pack 92 is opened. However, an opening for the probability setting button may be provided in the back pack 92, and the probability setting button may be exposed from the opening. When the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability setting mode, the level (stage) of the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol up to that point is displayed, for example, on a display device provided on the main board. Then, when the probability setting button is pressed, the level of the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol increases by one, and this level is displayed on the display device. Also, if the level before the probability setting button is pressed is "6", when the probability setting button is pressed, the level "1" is displayed on the display device. When the pachinko machine 10 enters the probability setting mode, the level displayed on the display device may be a predetermined level (e.g., level "1") instead of the previous level of the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol.

When the display device displays the desired level of the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol, pressing the RAM clear switch 122 sets the jackpot value or the winning value of the second symbol at the level displayed on the display device, and the pachinko machine 10 is started. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to operate with the set level of the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol. Also, when the desired level of the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol is displayed, if the keyhole into which the dedicated key is inserted is rotated to the "probability setting off" position, the jackpot value or the winning value of the second symbol at the level displayed on the display device may be set, and the pachinko machine 10 may be started. This also allows the pachinko machine 10 to operate with the set level of the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a display device for displaying the role ratio or consecutive role ratio, or information related to the role ratio or consecutive role ratio, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the probability setting mode, the display device may be configured to display the level of the set jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol. This makes it possible to reduce the increase in the number of display devices mounted on the pachinko machine 10, thereby reducing the increase in costs. Also, by using the display device for multiple purposes and reducing the increase in the number of parts, the arrangement (layout) of each part can be easily performed.

Now, in the case where the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the jackpot probability and/or the probability of hitting the second symbol can be changed, the ratio of the reel and the ratio of consecutive reels will naturally change in response to the change. Therefore, there is a risk that it will become unclear whether the change in the ratio of the reel and the ratio of consecutive reels managed by the reel ratio management chip 207 is due to a change in the probability of a jackpot and/or the probability of hitting the second symbol, or due to some kind of fraud.

Therefore, when the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol are changed, all information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be erased. This can eliminate the influence of the change in the ratio of the role and the ratio of the consecutive role due to the change in the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol. In this case, information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol have been changed may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 and output to the connected inspection device 300. This makes it possible to know at the inspection stage that the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 has been erased due to the change in the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol, and can be used as a reference for determining whether or not there has been any fraud. In this case, the date and time when the change was made may also be stored. In addition, the information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol have been changed may include information indicating the level after the change, or may include information on the level before the change. Based on these dates, times and levels, it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not fraud has occurred.

On the other hand, even if the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol are changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be kept saved. This allows an analysis of whether or not there was any fraud before the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol are changed. In this case, information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol have been changed may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 and output to the connected inspection device 300. This makes it easy to determine whether or not the influence of the change in the ratio of the role or the ratio of consecutive roles is due to the change in the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol. The information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol have been changed may include the date and time when the change was made. It may also include information indicating the level after the change, or may include information on the level before the change. Based on these dates and levels, the analysis of the factors behind the change in the ratio of the role or the ratio of consecutive roles can be more reliably performed.

In addition, even if the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol are changed, if all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 are kept saved, the display device provided for displaying the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, or information related to the role ratio and consecutive role ratio may display the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, or information related to the role ratio and consecutive role ratio based on the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and/or the first reading memory 263 after the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol are changed. Therefore, the influence of the change in the role ratio or consecutive role ratio due to the change in the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol can be eliminated for the role ratio, consecutive role ratio, or information related to the role ratio and consecutive role ratio displayed on this display device, and fraudulent behavior after the change in the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol can be easily discovered. In this case, information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol have been changed may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 together with the date and time of the change. Based on this information, the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 after the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol have been changed can be easily determined, and based on this, the ratio of the reel or the ratio of consecutive reels, or information related to the ratio of the reel or the ratio of consecutive reels, can be displayed.

In addition, even if the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol are changed, if all information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and information stored in the first reading memory 263 are kept saved, information may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 for each level (stage) of the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol. This makes it possible to determine the ratio of the reels and the ratio of consecutive reels when each level of the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol is set from the information recorded in the second reading memory 264. Therefore, it is possible to clearly switch and analyze the change in the ratio of the reels and the ratio of consecutive reels due to the change in the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol and the change in the ratio of the reels and the ratio of consecutive reels due to fraudulent acts.

When the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol is changed, only one or more pieces of information recorded in the second reading memory 264 immediately before may be saved, and the rest may be erased. Also, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be left saved. Also, all information recorded in the second reading memory 264 may be erased, and only the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be saved. This makes it possible to minimize the influence of the role ratio and consecutive role ratio before the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol are changed on the analysis and display, while making it possible to analyze whether or not there is a possibility that fraudulent activity was performed before the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol are changed. In this case, information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol have been changed may be recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the information may be output to the connected inspection device 300. This makes it easy to determine whether the effect of the change in the ratio of the reels or the ratio of consecutive reels is due to a change in the probability of a big win and/or the probability of the second symbol, and it is possible to know at the inspection stage that some of the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 has been erased due to a change in the probability of a big win and/or the probability of the second symbol, which can be used as a reference for determining whether or not fraud has occurred. The information indicating that the probability of a big win and/or the probability of the second symbol has been changed may also be stored together with the date and time when the change was made. It may also include information indicating the level after the change, or may include information on the level before the change. Based on these dates and levels, it is possible to more reliably analyze the factors behind the change in the ratio of the reels or the ratio of consecutive reels.

In each of the above embodiments, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 cannot be erased from the outside, so that the fraudster cannot erase the evidence of the fraudulent act. On the other hand, there is also a second-hand market in the pachinko machine market, and it is often the case that a machine is sold from one store to another store and installed in the other store. In this case, even if a fraudulent act was committed in the previous store and the ratio of the role was changed, if the information remains in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264, there is a risk that suspicions of fraudulent act have occurred in the current other store. Therefore, in preparation for such a case, when a machine is sold from one store to another store, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 may be erased, or the information to be resold may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. By erasing the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264, it is possible to prevent the record of the fraudulent act committed in the previous store from being taken over by the next other store. Furthermore, if the resale information is recorded in the second reading memory 264, it is possible to clearly separate and analyze information related to the ratio of prizes at the previous store from information related to the ratio of prizes at the next store, and it is also possible to discover fraudulent activity that took place at the previous store from information related to the ratio of prizes at the previous store.

It is preferable that the erasure of information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264, or the recording of information to be resold in the second reading memory 264, be limited to a limited number of places such as the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to prevent the easy erasure or cheating of records of fraudulent acts. In addition, the erasure of information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264, or the recording of information to be resold in the second reading memory 264 may be performed in the following manner. For example, an inspection device 300 may be connected to the inspection terminal 207a, and a program for erasing information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 or recording information to be resold in the second reading memory 264 may be executed by inputting a dedicated command from the inspection device 300 to the role ratio management chip 207. This command may be a special command that is secret to only a limited number of people, thereby making it possible to prevent the easy erasure or cheating of records of fraudulent acts by fraudsters. Also, a hole such as a keyhole may be provided on the main board, and a program for erasing information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 or recording information to be resold in the second reading memory 264 may be executed only when a key that fits the hole is inserted. This allows only those who have a key that fits the hole to erase information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 or record information to be resold in the second reading memory 264, so that it is possible to prevent fraudsters from easily erasing or cheating the records of their fraudulent acts. Also, a switch may be provided in the board box 100 in which the main board is stored, and a program for erasing information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 or recording information to be resold in the second reading memory 264 may be executed only when the switch is operated. As a result, unless the board box 100 is opened, the switch cannot be operated, and information recorded in the first read/write memory 263 or the second read/write memory 264 cannot be erased, and information to be resold cannot be recorded in the second read/write memory 264. As described above, the board box 100 has a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner (connected by a crimping structure), and a seal is affixed to the connection between the box base and the box cover, covering the box base and the box cover. Therefore, since a fraudster cannot easily open the board box, it is possible to prevent a fraudster from easily erasing or cheating on the record of a fraudulent act. Furthermore, if the board box is opened and the switch is operated, evidence of the opening remains, making it easy to determine that a fraudulent act has occurred.

In the above third to seventh embodiments, the processing using the area outside the use area 203y in the RAM 203 was exemplified by processing related to the ratio of the reels and the base value, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and various processing other than the main control of the game may be used. For example, it may be processing to determine fraudulent activity. In this processing to determine fraudulent activity, for example, the presence or absence of the approach of a magnet or vibration, or an unnatural entry of a ball into the winning hole (a ball detected even when the large winning hole 65a is closed) may be determined, and processing to issue an alert in the event of fraudulent activity may be performed. In addition, the processing to use the area outside the use area 203y may include multiple processing with different functions (purposes) (for example, "processing related to the ratio of the reels" and "processing to determine fraudulent activity").

In the above third to seventh embodiments, a case was described in which the contents of the register 200 are saved to the external work area 203y1 of the area outside the use area 203y using a load (LD) instruction, but the same effect can be obtained by using a store (ST) instruction instead of the load (LD) instruction to save the contents of the register 200 to the external work area 203y1 of the area outside the use area 203y.

In the fifth to seventh embodiments described above, in addition to the real-time base value, three base values (the previous base value, the base value before last, and the base value before last) counted for each specified period in the past are displayed on the base display device 401. However, at least two base values (e.g., the previous base value and the base value before last) counted for each specified period in the past may be displayed together with the real-time base value, or four or more base values counted for each specified period in the past may be displayed together with the real-time base value.

In the fifth to seventh embodiments described above, the base values measured over multiple time periods and the base value being measured in real time are displayed on the base display device 401. However, instead of or in addition to the base values, the device may display the ratio of reels, consecutive reels, information related to the ratio of reels and consecutive reels, and/or other information indicating game performance, measured over multiple time periods and in real time on the display device.

In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the base value processing (FIG. 41) is executed by the MPU 201 and various base values are displayed on the base display device 401. However, a management chip for managing the base values may be provided in the main control device 110, or a management chip for managing the base values may be provided separately from the main control device 110, and the management chip may execute processing equivalent to the base value processing to calculate the real-time base value while displaying the real-time base value, the previous base value, the previous base value, and the previous base value on the base display device 401. In this case, the display on the base display device 401 may be directly controlled by the management chip, or the management chip may control the display on the base display device 401 via the MPU 201. The base display device 401 may also be directly connected to the management chip.

The various counters 203j, 203k, 203q, base value data 203l to 203o, and flag 203p shown in FIG. 39(a) may be stored in RAM in the management chip. In this case, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch is on, the MPU 201 transmits a signal to the management chip during the startup process to notify the management chip of this, and the management chip may receive the signal and initialize the various counters 203j, 203k, 203q, base value data 203l to 203o, flag 203p, etc.

Also, when the power is turned on, the management chip may control the base display device 401 to light up all segments of the four seven-segment displays 401a to 401d. In this case, this control may be performed immediately after the management chip starts up when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned on, the MPU 201 may send an initialization signal to the management chip during the startup process, and the management chip may receive the initialization signal and execute this control during the process it executes.

In the above fifth to seventh embodiments, when the previous base value, the previous base value, and the previous base value are displayed on the base display device 401, if there is no valid base value, "--" is displayed in the comparison segment to indicate that there is no valid base value. In contrast, if there is no valid base value for the previous base value, the previous base value, or the previous base value, only the real-time base value may be displayed on the base display device 401. This makes it possible to indicate that there is no valid base value for the previous base value, the previous base value, or the previous base value. In addition, it is possible to prevent the previous base value, the previous base value, and the previous base value that do not have a valid base value from being displayed uselessly. On the other hand, in this case, the real-time base value and the previous base value may be displayed on the base display device 401, and "--" may be displayed in the comparison segment for the previous base value. This also makes it possible to indicate that there is no valid base value for the previous base value, the previous base value, or the previous base value. In addition, by displaying not only the real-time base value but also the previous base value, it is possible to suggest that after a valid base value is obtained, the previous base value, etc. will also be displayed on the base display device 401.

In addition, if a valid base value exists for the previous base value, but no valid base value exists for the previous base value or the previous base value, only the real-time base value and the previous base value may be displayed on the base display device 401. In addition, if a valid base value exists for the previous base value and the previous base value, but no valid base value exists for the previous base value, only the real-time base value, the previous base value, and the previous base value may be displayed on the base display device 401. This makes it possible to indicate that there is no valid base value for base values that are not displayed. In addition, it is possible to prevent values without valid base values from being displayed unnecessarily.

On the other hand, if a valid base value exists for the previous base value, but no valid base value exists for the previous base value or the previous base value, the real-time base value, the previous base value, and the previous base value may be displayed on the base display device 401, and "--" may be displayed for the previous base value in the comparison segment. Also, if a valid base value exists for the previous base value and the previous base value, but no valid base value exists for the previous base, the real-time base value, the previous base value, the previous base value, and the previous base value may be displayed on the base display device 401, and "--" may be displayed for the previous base value in the comparison segment. This also makes it possible to indicate base values of a type that do not have a valid base value. Also, by displaying one base value of a type that does not have a valid base value, it is possible to suggest that after a valid base value is obtained, the base value of that type will be displayed on the base display device 401.

In the fifth embodiment, a case was described in which all segments (including dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are lit for a predetermined period (five seconds in this embodiment) immediately after power is turned on each time the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, but instead of lighting them, all segments may be made to flash for a predetermined period. By making all segments flash, it is possible to check not only whether all segments are lit normally, but also whether all segments are turned off normally, making it easy to determine whether the display on the base display device 401 is operating normally.

In addition, when a pachinko machine 10 is newly started up at a manufacturing factory, or when a used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a second-hand machine, for example, all segments (including dot segments) of the seven-segment display devices 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 may be lit or flashed for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment) only after the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch is operated and until the total number of outs reaches 300. This makes it possible to check whether the display on the base display device 401 is normal at least when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up. Also, while the lights are on, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state.

In addition, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is being operated, all segments (including dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 may be lit or flashed for a predetermined period of time (five seconds in this embodiment).

In the above fifth embodiment, the control to light (or blink) all segments (including dot segments) of the seven-segment display 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 for a predetermined period (five seconds in this embodiment) immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is described as being executed at a predetermined point (S3007) of the startup process (see FIG. 40). However, the control to light (or blink) may be executed at any point in the startup process. For example, the control may be executed first when the startup process starts, or after the initial setting (S601). The control may also be executed after the interrupt permission setting (S613). The control may also be executed at a point other than the startup process. For example, the control may be executed before the loop process (S701 to S703) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 17) executed after the startup process ends. Also, in the timer interrupt process, for example, in the base value process (see FIG. 41), which is one process of the timer interrupt process, it may be determined whether or not this timer interrupt process or base value process is the first time it has been executed since the power was turned on, and if it is the first time it has been executed since the power was turned on, the control may be executed. In other words, as long as it is possible to light up (or blink) all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 once after the power is turned on for a predetermined period (five seconds in this embodiment), this control may be executed at any timing.

In the above fifth embodiment, when a pachinko machine 10 is newly set up, such as when a pachinko machine 10 is completely newly set up in a manufacturing factory or when a used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a second-hand machine, until the total number of outs reaches 300, all segments (including dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are lit for a predetermined period (five seconds in this embodiment) each time the power is turned on, and thereafter, the display of the base display device 401 is displayed in a special display mode different from the normal base value display, in which "88." is flashed (or lit) in the identification segment and the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is flashed (or lit) in the ratio segment. However, in this case, it is also possible not to execute the process of lighting all segments (including dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 for a predetermined period (five seconds in this embodiment) each time the power is turned on. In this case, during the new start-up period of the pachinko machine 10, the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 in a special display mode, making it possible to indicate that the base value being displayed is not the regular base value, and by making this display, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up state.

In the fifth embodiment or the modified example, the special display mode displayed on the base display device 401 when the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up period is described as a mode in which "88." is flashed (or lit) in the identification segment and the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is flashed (or lit) in the ratio segment. However, this mode is not necessarily required, and the display on the base display device 401 may be performed in a mode different from the mode in which the normal base value is displayed. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up period, the display on the base display device 401 may be performed in a mode in which "bL.", "b1.", "b2.", and "b3." are displayed by switching between them at 5-second intervals while the identification segment is flashing, and "--" is displayed and lit in the comparison segment. This makes it possible to suggest that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up state while this display is being performed. In addition, in this mode, the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l may be displayed as a light or flashing display in the ratio segment while "bL." is flashing. This allows you to see the real-time base value at that time for reference.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments, the probability setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6" to change the jackpot probability and/or the probability of hitting the second symbol, but the steps in which the probability setting value can be changed are not limited to six steps, and may be changed to any step.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments, the case where the probability setting value is changed to change the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol is described. However, when the pachinko machine 10 includes a so-called small jackpot, the probability of winning the small jackpot may be changed instead of or in addition to changing the probability of winning the jackpot and/or the probability of winning the second symbol. Here, a small jackpot is a type of miss, and when a ball enters the large prize winning hole 65a opened by a small jackpot and is dispensed, the number of balls dispensed is also used to calculate the base value. In other words, when the probability of winning the small jackpot is changed, the base value also changes, so if the base value data 203r based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the base value based on the changed probability setting value cannot be calculated correctly. Therefore, in this case, when the setting change mode is started and the data of the RAM 203 is erased when the probability setting value is changed, the base value data 203r may also be erased. This allows the base value based on the changed probability setting value to be calculated correctly.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, a case was described in which the probability setting value is checked to see if it is within the normal range (the range of "1" to "6") each time the timer interrupt process is executed, but this check may also be performed when a specified trigger occurs, such as each time a variable presentation starts, or at specified time intervals (for example, every hour or every time an internal clock strikes 00 minutes).

In the sixth and seventh embodiments, the timer interrupt process checks whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (the range of "1" to "6"), and if the probability setting value is not within the normal range, the game is stopped and a notification is issued to hall personnel, etc., to prompt them to restart the pachinko machine 10 and change the probability setting value. However, after the game is stopped, a setting change process may be executed to force hall personnel, etc. to change the probability setting value. In this case, a notification sound may be output to prompt the probability setting value to be changed, or a notification may be issued to call hall personnel to the third pattern display device 81. In addition, an external terminal (not shown) provided on the main control device 110 may notify the hall computer that the probability setting value is not within the normal range. This allows hall personnel, etc., to reset the probability setting value within the normal range.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in normal mode or setting confirmation mode, the start-up process checks whether the RAM judgment value is normal, and if the RAM judgment value is not normal, it further checks whether the probability setting value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, a setting change process is executed to have the hall staff or the like change the probability setting value. Instead of executing this setting change process, the audio output device 226 or the third pattern display device 81 may issue a notification to the hall staff or the like urging them to restart the pachinko machine 10 and change the probability setting value, and/or an external terminal (not shown) provided on the main control device 110 may notify the hall computer that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, causing an infinite loop to occur. This allows the hall staff or the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 and change the probability setting value.

Also, if it is determined during the startup process that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, a specific probability setting value (e.g., "1") from the range of "1" to "6" may be forcibly set as the probability setting value. Note that if it is determined during play (e.g., during timer interrupt processing) that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, it is better not to forcibly set the probability setting value to a specific probability setting value. This is to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage due to a sudden change in the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol during play.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, the calculation of the RAM judgment value (checksum) includes the probability setting value, but the probability setting value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM judgment value. In this case, before determining whether the RAM judgment value is normal (S4009 in FIG. 54), it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, a setting change process may be forcibly executed to have hall personnel change the probability setting value, or the hall personnel may be prompted to restart the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode, or a specific probability setting value within the normal range may be forcibly set as the probability setting value.

In the fifth embodiment, all segments (including dot segments) of the seven-segment display 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are lit for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment) immediately after the power is turned on each time the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the sixth or seventh embodiment, all segments (including dot segments) of the seven-segment display 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 may be lit or blink for a predetermined period immediately after the power is turned on each time the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. However, even when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, it may be cumbersome to light or blink all segments (including dot segments) of the seven-segment display 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 for a predetermined period immediately after the power is turned on. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the lighting or blinking of all segments of the seven-segment display 401a to 401d may not be executed. Also, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, after the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed, all segments of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d may be lit or blinked. Also, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, all segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d may be lit or blinked for a predetermined period of time, and when a predetermined operation is performed, the lighting or blinking may be stopped.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments, the case was described where the base display device 401 is displaying a setting change or setting confirmation using the round number notification LED, the jackpot symbol notification LED, the winning symbol notification LED, etc., provided in the first symbol display device 37, or the entire LED 37a using a lighting pattern that is not used for the original notification, but the base display device 401 may be configured to display an error history using the round number notification LED, the jackpot symbol notification LED, the winning symbol notification LED, etc., provided in the first symbol display device 37, or the entire LED 37a using a lighting pattern that is not used for the original notification.

The first display device 37 may be provided with one LED for notifying that the base display device 401 is displaying a setting change and a setting confirmation, and the LED may be turned on to notify that the base display device 401 is displaying a setting change, and the LED may be turned on to notify that the base display device 401 is displaying a setting confirmation. The first display device 37 may be provided with two LEDs, one for notifying that the base display device 401 is displaying a setting change and the other for notifying that the base display device 401 is displaying a setting confirmation, and the corresponding LEDs may be turned on to notify that the base display device 401 is displaying a setting change or a setting confirmation. The first display device 37 may be provided with an LED for notifying that the base display device 401 is displaying an error history, and the LED may be turned on to notify that the base display device 401 is displaying an error history.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the probability setting value or error history is displayed on the base display device 401, all segments of the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b of the identification segment are turned off, "--" is displayed on the identification segment, or fixed characters are displayed on each of the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b in a display mode different from that when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401. However, when the probability setting value or error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment may be displayed in any display mode as long as it is a display mode different from that when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401. For example, a predetermined segment of each of the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b may be displayed flashing, or each segment of each of the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b may be displayed lighting or flashing in order or randomly. In addition, a plurality of display modes may be displayed in a rotating manner on the identification segment. This also allows the display state to be clearly differentiated between when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and when the probability setting value or error history is displayed.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the probability setting value or error history is displayed on the base display device 401, all segments of the seven-segment display 401c on the left side of the comparison segment are turned off, "-" is displayed, or fixed characters are displayed. However, when the probability setting value or error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the seven-segment display 401c on the left side of the comparison segment may be displayed in any display mode as long as it is different from the display mode when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401. For example, a specific segment of the seven-segment display 401c may be displayed blinking, or each segment of the seven-segment display 401c may be displayed lit or blinking in order or randomly. In addition, the seven-segment display 401c may display multiple display modes in rotation. This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state when the base value or error history is displayed on the base display device 401 from the display state when the probability setting value is displayed.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments, the example shown in FIG. 50 is illustrated as an example of a display mode when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, and a display mode different from the display mode when the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 is described. In contrast, the display mode when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 may be the same as the display mode shown in FIG. 49 (a) or (b). In this case, the display mode when the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 may also be the same as the display mode when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401. The probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 when a hall official or the like starts up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. Also, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 when a hall official or the like presses the error display button 502. In other words, even if the display mode when the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the display mode when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 are the same, hall personnel and others can understand whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability setting value or the error history based on the operation they performed.

In the sixth or seventh embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 or by turning on the setting change switch, but this may also be done with the setting key 501. Specifically, the setting key 501 is made rotatable from the on state to a setting change position provided in the opposite direction to the off side, and is configured so that when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, the setting key 501 is automatically biased to return to the on state. Then, each time the setting key 501 is rotated from the on state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. This also makes it easy to change the probability setting value.

In the sixth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM clear switch 122. However, a setting change switch similar to that in the seventh embodiment may be provided, and the probability setting value may be updated by turning on the setting change switch. This clearly separates the roles of the RAM clear switch and the setting change switch, allowing the operator to clearly understand the role of each switch.

In the above embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is confirmed by turning off the setting key or by turning on the RAM erase switch 122. However, this may be done by operating a separate switch, for example, a setting confirmation switch. This setting confirmation switch is a switch for confirming the probability setting value, for example, by being operated during the setting change mode, and like the error display button 502, may be provided protruding from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, so that it can be operated by hall personnel, etc., without having to open the board box 100. This also makes it easy to confirm the probability setting value.

In the above embodiment, each command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display, but the main control device 110 may send commands directly to the display control device 114. Also, the voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and commands instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp may be sent from the display control device to the voice lamp control device. Furthermore, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as a single control device. By configuring them as a single control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the case where the fluctuation start flag is always set to ON if a stop type command is received has been described, but the fluctuation start flag may also be set to ON if a fluctuation pattern command is received and then a stop type command is received. This makes it possible to prevent strange fluctuation performances from being executed in cases where a stop type command is received without a fluctuation pattern command being received.

Also, the fluctuation start flag may be set to ON at the timing of receiving the fluctuation pattern command. In this case, in the fluctuation display process (S910) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, a display fluctuation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern extracted by the fluctuation pattern command based on the fact that the fluctuation start flag is turned on may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to execute the fluctuation performance based on this display fluctuation pattern command for the display control device 114 without waiting for the reception of the stop type command. In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 may generate a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing of receiving the stop type command, and transmit it to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop pattern of the fluctuation performance executed by the third pattern display device 81 based on this display stop type command.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 236 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of one frame of an image at which the drawing process is completed (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment), but the image controller 236 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third pattern display device 81 is driven to display one frame of an image. The third pattern display device 81 is driven so that one frame of an image is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so by transmitting a V interrupt signal each time one frame of an image is displayed, the time interval can be accurately maintained without having to be timed.

In the above embodiment, the demo performance may be a static display of a third pattern consisting of a main pattern without a number from "0" to "9". Also, the demo performance may be a static display of a third pattern consisting of a main pattern with a number or a main pattern without a number in a semi-transparent state. Also, the demo performance may be a display that changes only the back image without displaying the third pattern. Also, the demo performance may be a display that displays a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern and back image used in the variable display.

In the above embodiment, the continuous notice performance may be executed by the third symbol display device 81 where the variable performance is performed, or a fourth symbol display device separate from the third symbol display device 81 may be provided, and the fourth symbol may be displayed on the fourth symbol display device in conjunction with the variable performance executed by the third symbol display device 81 to execute the continuous notice performance. In this case, the fourth symbol display device may be controlled by the display control device 114 or the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the continuous notice performance may be executed by providing a role that operates according to various performances in the pachinko machine 10 and operating the role in a predetermined manner in conjunction with the variable performance. In addition, the continuous notice performance may be executed by outputting a sound for the continuous notice performance from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the sound lamp control device 113, or the continuous notice performance may be executed by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33 of the pachinko machine 10 in conjunction with the variable performance.

As a result, each time a variable performance is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), symbols are displayed in succession on the fourth symbol display device, the role device operates in a predetermined manner, a sound is output from the audio output device 226, or the illumination units 29 to 33 light up or flash, giving the player a sense of expectation of a big win. In addition, the player normally continues playing while gazing at the third symbol display device 81 where the variable performance is performed, but the continuous advance notice performance is performed by the display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device separate from the third symbol display device 81, the operation of the role device, the audio output from the audio output device 226, or the lighting or flashing of the illumination units 29 to 33, so that the player can easily recognize that a different performance from the usual has been performed. In addition, the continuous advance notice performance can be easily performed with simple control such as the display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the role device, the audio output from the audio output device 226, or the lighting or flashing of the illumination units 29 to 33.

In addition, if the continuous preview performance is performed by audio output from the audio output device 226 or by lighting or blinking the illumination units 29 to 33, the control of the continuous preview performance is performed by the audio lamp control device 113, so by having the main control device 110 perform the win/lose judgment at the time of the initial winning and the lottery processing at the start of the fluctuation, having the audio lamp control device 113 perform the continuous preview performance, and having the display control device 114 perform the fluctuation performance, when the continuous preview performance is performed by the pachinko machine 10, each control device can be assigned to each process. This prevents the load from being concentrated on one control device, and the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

The continuous preview performance may be performed by combining at least two of the following: display of the symbols for the continuous preview performance on the third symbol display device 81, display of the symbols for the continuous preview performance on the fourth symbol display device, operation of the role in a predetermined mode, audio output from the audio output device 226, and lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, and controlling them in conjunction with each other. This allows a more diverse continuous preview performance to be performed. In addition, by changing the method of performing the continuous preview performance (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the role, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, or a combination thereof), multiple continuous preview performance modes may be prepared that are selected according to the game state after the continuous preview performance ends (15R special jackpot, 2R special jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, miss).

In addition, when a continuous preview performance is performed, an image for the continuous preview performance other than the variable performance may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, or the continuous preview performance may be performed by displaying a combination of predetermined patterns, so-called "chance eyes", as a stop pattern to be displayed when the variable performance ends. In this case, when the command determination process (S1602 in FIG. 27(c)) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 determines that a continuous preview command has been received, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the chance eye may be turned on, and other stop pattern discrimination flags may be set to off. In the command determination process, the process corresponding to the continuous preview command is executed in the other command process after the stop identification command process, so that the chance eye is set as the stop pattern instead of the stop pattern set by the reception of the display stop identification command. Therefore, the chance eye can be displayed as a definite sign when the variable performance stops. And, if the chance eye is displayed continuously as a stop pattern for each variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, the player can have a sense of expectation that he will eventually win a jackpot.

In the above embodiment, when a winning ball is entered into the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b (start winning), the main control unit 110 sends to the voice lamp control unit 113 the reserved ball count command that notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the reserved ball count that has been increased by "1" including each counter C1 to C3, CS1 obtained from the counter buffer in response to the start winning. However, the type of counter included in the reserved ball count command may be a part of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, or may include the values of other counters. In addition, when the main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the values of each counter obtained in response to the start winning, information indicating the value of each counter may not be included in the reserved ball count command, but information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command other than the reserved ball count command and these values may be notified to the voice lamp control unit 113. The separate command may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in association with the start winning, or may be a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of other information, such as a change pattern command or a stop pattern command, to which the values of each counter acquired in association with the start winning are added. When notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in association with the start winning as a separate command, the command may include information indicating which of the pending counts the notified counter values relate to. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 can store the values of each counter included in the command in any of the first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information corresponding to that pending count, based on the information on the pending count included in the command.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball count command, it may store the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 indicated by the reserved ball count command in the RAM 223, or when it receives a reserved ball count command (or a command indicating the value of each counter), it may determine whether or not there is a jackpot, the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot, the type of miss if there is a miss, etc. based on the values of each counter indicated in the command, and store these determination results in the RAM 223 in place of the values of each counter indicated in the command, or together with some or all of the values of the counters.

In each of the above embodiments, a single reserved ball counter 203a is used to count the number of reserved balls in the main control unit 110, regardless of whether the ball has entered the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b. In contrast, a reserved ball counter for the first starting hole corresponding to the first starting hole 64a and a reserved ball counter for the second starting hole corresponding to the second starting hole 64b may be prepared in the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110, and the number of reserved balls resulting from a winning start in the first starting hole 64a and the number of reserved balls resulting from a winning start in the second starting hole 64b may be counted separately.

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved is set to "4" regardless of whether the ball enters the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b. However, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved following a starting entry into the first starting hole 64a and the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved following a starting entry into the second starting hole 64b may be determined and managed separately. For example, if the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with a start winning entry into the first start hole 64a is "4", and the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with a start winning entry into the second start hole 64b is "4", and at a certain point in time, the number of reserved balls with a start winning entry into the first start hole 64a is "4", and the number of reserved balls with a start winning entry into the second start hole 64b is "2", even if there are any more start winning entries into the first start hole 64a, those start winning entries will not be reserved, but if there is a start winning entry into the second start hole 64b, they may be reserved. This allows the player to recognize that the first start hole 64a and the second start hole 64b are separate, which can increase the fun of the game.

In addition, for example, the variable presentation based on a start winning entry into the second start opening 64b may be given priority over the variable presentation based on a start winning entry into the first start opening 64a. Or, the variable presentation based on a start winning entry into the first start opening 64a may be given priority over the variable presentation based on a start winning entry into the second start opening 64b. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the start opening where the variable presentation is given priority.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which two start ports, the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b, are arranged on the game board 13 as start ports through which the jackpot lottery begins when a ball enters the port, but this is not necessarily limited to the case, and the number of start ports may be one, or three or more. If there are two or more start ports, a corresponding reserved ball counter may be provided in the RAM 203 for each start port, and the number of reserved balls that are reserved in response to a winning entry into the corresponding start port may be counted for each start port. Also, a maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved in response to a winning entry into the corresponding start port may be set for each start port.

In addition, when there are two or more starting ports, the reserved ball number command that the main control unit 110 sends to the voice lamp control unit 113 to notify that a ball has been reserved due to a winning entry into a starting port may include information indicating which starting port the ball has been reserved due to. In addition, the variation pattern command that the main control unit 110 sends to the voice lamp control unit 113 when starting a variation may also include information indicating which starting port the variation performance has been reserved due to. In this way, the voice lamp control unit 113 has a reserved ball number counter prepared for each starting port, and when a reserved ball number command is received, the reserved ball number is set in the reserved ball number counter for the starting port indicated in the reserved ball number command, and when a variation pattern command is received, the reserved ball number counter for the starting port indicated in the variation pattern command is decremented by one, allowing the number of reserved balls to be counted for each starting port.

In addition, when multiple starting holes are arranged on the game board 13, the counter value acquired in association with winning (start winning) at each starting hole may be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, the command for the main control device 110 to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired in association with the starting winning may include information indicating which starting hole the counter value was acquired in association with the starting winning. In addition, the fluctuation pattern command sent by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when starting the fluctuation may also include information indicating which starting hole the fluctuation performance is associated with. Furthermore, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a look-ahead information storage area may be prepared for each starting hole, and each counter value sent from the main control device 110 in association with the starting winning at the corresponding starting hole may be stored in the corresponding look-ahead information storage area. As a result, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received, a shift process can be performed on the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the starting hole in which the start winning that triggered the execution of the fluctuation performance indicated by the fluctuation pattern command was detected. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the variable performance on hold for each start port can also be stored in the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, in cases where the probability of a jackpot, the allocation probability of the jackpot type, the allocation probability of the miss type, etc. differ depending on the start port where the start is won, the look-ahead process can correctly determine whether or not each variable performance will be a jackpot, the jackpot type if a jackpot, and the miss type if a miss, based on which start port the start is won. Also, in cases where a variable performance based on a start port winning is performed in priority to a variable performance based on a start port winning in another start port, the look-ahead process can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the variable performance based on a start port winning in one, and the number of pending variable performances that will be a jackpot in the near future can be correctly determined.

In addition, in the case where multiple start ports are provided, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the values of each counter acquired based on the start winning into the start port from the main control device 110 by command, the voice lamp control device 113 may execute the continuous notice performance for all variable performances (reserved balls) reserved at that time, regardless of the start port where the start winning occurred. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which multiple start ports are provided and the variable performance for the winning into one start port is executed preferentially over the variable performance for the winning into the other start port, the start of the continuous notice performance may be determined only from the result of the pre-reading of the counter value acquired for the winning into the start port where the variable performance is executed preferentially. As a result, the presence or absence of the setting for the execution of the continuous notice performance is not determined for the variable performance corresponding to the winning into the start port with low priority, and the continuous notice performance is not started for this variable performance. If the continuous notice performance is started for the variable performance corresponding to the winning into the start port with low priority, and the variable performance is constantly reserved for the start port with high priority, there is a risk that the continuous notice performance will not end easily. In contrast, in this modified version, the setting for the execution of a continuous preview performance is not determined for a variable performance that corresponds to a win at a starting port with a low priority, and a continuous preview performance is not started for this variable performance, thereby preventing such a situation from occurring.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the reserved ball count stored in the RAM 223 is decremented by 1 (see S1107 in FIG. 26). However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the variation process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 13)
13), the value (N) of the reserved ball counter 203a of the main control device 110 subtracted in accordance with the setting of the variation pattern command by the variation start process (S307) (see S305 in FIG. 13) may be set to be sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the reserved ball number command may be sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 together with the transmission of the variation pattern command. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to more accurately grasp the number of reserved balls reserved in the main control device 110. In this case, S1107 in FIG. 26 is omitted. The variation pattern command may also include the value (N) of the reserved ball counter 203a after subtraction. In this case, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command, it is sufficient to extract the reserved ball number (N) included in the variation pattern command and set it to the reserved ball number stored in the RAM 223.

In the above embodiment, the winning entry into the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b and the passing through the through gate 67 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for winning entry into the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b may be set separately for each starting port, and the maximum number of reserved balls for each starting port may be any number other than "4". In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, and may be different values. In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed as a variable display based on winning entry into the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as a number, or in a form (e.g., color or lighting pattern) in which the four divided areas differ by the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light-emitting element.

As shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is one type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be performed by moving the pattern horizontally or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern.

In each of the above embodiments, when performing a variable effect, a high-speed change is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 scroll so quickly that the player cannot see them. However, instead of displaying this high-speed change, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so that they are not visible to the player, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are displayed randomly.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine that is different from the above embodiment. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly called a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until a jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value after the jackpot pattern is displayed, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters a predetermined area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

In slot machines, the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out by bonuses (gimmicks) to the total number of gaming media (coins, medals) paid out during a specified period is the bonus ratio. Therefore, the number of gaming media paid out when each winning combination is achieved may be stored in the ROM of the main control device instead of the prize ball number table 202e, and the bonus ratio management chip or a control device that executes a function equivalent to the bonus ratio management chip may be used to count the number of winning combinations (patterns aligned on an active line) achieved during non-bonus game periods (normal periods), the number of winning combinations achieved during bonus game periods, and the number of winning combinations achieved during AT periods to manage the bonus ratio and consecutive bonus ratio.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

Below, various inventive concepts that are included in the above-mentioned embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown. Note that each of the various inventive concepts shown below may be modified by adding a part or multiple parts of the configuration of another inventive concept to the inventive concept or by replacing a part or multiple parts of the configuration of another inventive concept with the inventive concept.

(Challenge 1)
The gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, and O1 shown below have been made to solve the following problems.

That is, there have been gaming machines in which gaming media are fired by a firing means into a gaming area provided with multiple winning slots, and when the gaming media enters one of the winning slots, a predetermined number of gaming media is paid out to the player for that winning slot. In addition, some of the winning slots are provided with a role-playing device, and the operation of the role-playing device affects whether the gaming media wins (for example, JP 2003-340046 A).

Now, some fraudsters attempt to increase the number of winnings at winning slots equipped with bonuses by fraudulently activating the bonuses at the winning slots equipped with bonuses or by guiding gaming media to win at those winning slots. However, there are insufficient measures in place to detect such fraudulent behavior.

This technical idea was conceived in light of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can efficiently detect fraudulent activity.

(Means and Effects 1)
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes including a first winning hole having a device that operates based on a game;
A launching means for launching a gaming medium into the gaming area;
a winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings, for detecting the winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media to the winning port in which the game medium shot by the shot means has won when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shot means has won in the winning port;
a memory control means for accumulating and storing in a memory means information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on a win in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means;
and an output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the memory means.

According to the gaming machine A1, a launching means launches a gaming medium into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning ports, including a first winning port having a role that operates based on a game. Each winning port is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the gaming medium. When the winning detection means detects that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won any of the winning ports, a predetermined number of gaming media is paid out by the payout means to the winning port in which the gaming medium won. In addition, information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning port to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. This has the effect of analyzing the role ratio, which is the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out in conjunction with the winning of the winning port to the number due to the first winning port (i.e., the operation of the role) based on the output signal, and discovering fraudulent behavior based on the role ratio.

In the gaming machine A1,
a main control means for mainly controlling a game, the main control means including the winning detection means, and a payout number setting means for, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium discharged by the discharge means has won in any of the winning ports, setting the number of game media to be paid out based on the winning port in which the game medium has won and notifying the payout means of the number;
The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the memory means, the memory control means, and the output means are provided in the main control means.

Gaming machine A2 has the following effects in addition to those of gaming machine A1. That is, it has a winning detection means, and a payout number setting means that, when the winning detection means detects that the gaming medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning ports, sets the number of gaming media to be paid out based on the winning port into which the gaming medium won and notifies the payout means, and the main control means, which mainly controls the game, is provided with a storage means that accumulates and stores information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning port to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, a storage control means that accumulates the information and stores it in the storage means, and an output means that outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. This allows the detection of a win at a winning port by the winning detection means, the setting of the number of game media to be paid out based on that detection, the storage of information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a win at the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the set number of payouts in the storage means, and the output of a signal based on the information stored in the storage means to all be performed within the main control means. Therefore, even if a cheater tries to output fraudulent information from the output means to prevent the detection of a fraudulent act based on the role ratio, it is difficult to input fraudulent information because the above configuration is completed by the main control means. This has the effect of preventing the detection of a fraudulent act based on the role ratio by a cheater outputting fraudulent information.

In the gaming machine A2,
The main control means is housed in a base box having a box base and a box cover for covering an opening of the box base connected in an unopenable manner.

Gaming machine A3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine A2. That is, the main control means is stored in a board box in which a box base and a box cover covering the opening of the box base are connected in an unopenable manner. Therefore, even if a cheater tries to prevent the detection of a cheating act based on the role ratio by making the output means output fraudulent information, it becomes difficult to input fraudulent information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the detection of a cheating act based on the role ratio from being prevented by a cheater outputting fraudulent information.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3,
An external device connection means capable of connecting to an external device;
an external device connection detection means for detecting that the external device is connected to the external device connection means;
The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that, when the external device connection detection means detects that the external device has been connected, the output means outputs a signal to the external device based on the information accumulated and stored in the memory means.

Gaming machine A4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines A1 to 3. That is, when an external device is connected to the external device connection means, it is detected by the external device connection means, and the detection triggers the output means to output to the external device a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. As a result, simply by connecting an external device to the external device connection means of the gaming machine, a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on a win at the first winning slot to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means is output from the gaming machine to the external device, thereby providing the effect that fraudulent behavior based on the ratio of game devices can be quickly and easily discovered.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A4,
The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the memory means, and a signal for each winning port indicating the number of gaming media to be paid out by the payout means when a winning occurs in the corresponding winning port.

Gaming machine A5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines A1 to 4. That is, the output means outputs at least a signal based on information stored in the storage means and a signal for each winning slot indicating the number of gaming media to be paid out by the payout means when a winning ticket is won at the corresponding winning slot. This has the effect of allowing the recipient of the signal output from the output means to easily analyze the ratio of game devices based on the signal output from the gaming machine, even if the recipient does not have information regarding the number of gaming media to be paid out when a winning ticket is won at each winning slot in the connected gaming machine.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has occurred,
The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, when the judgment means determines that the specified trigger has occurred, the memory control means stores in the memory means information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on a winning into the first winning port to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, based on information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second memory means.

Gaming machine A6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines A1 to A5. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores information about the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. Then, when the judgment means judges that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning into the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the winning information detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing information about the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning into the winning port can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means without missing out on the winning. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, each time a predetermined trigger occurs, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a win in the first winning slot to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, reflecting all wins, can be stored in the storage means. This has the effect of making it possible to output more accurate information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a win in the first winning slot to the number of game media paid out by the payout means.

In the gaming machine A6,
The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the memory means and a signal based on the information stored in the second memory means.

Gaming machine A7 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine A6. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. This results in the output of information related to the most recent winning entry stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, and has the effect of making it possible to determine whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity, including the most recent winning situation.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7,
The first winning port includes a second winning port having a device that operates continuously based on a game,
the storage control means causes the storage means to accumulate and store information relating to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on a win in the second winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means;
Gaming machine A8, characterized in that the output means outputs information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a win at the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, which are cumulatively stored in the memory means, and information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a win at the second winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effect is achieved. That is, the first winning opening provided in the game area includes a second winning opening having a device that operates continuously based on the game, and information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winning at the second winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means is also stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Then, the information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winning at the first winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, which is accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winning at the second winning opening to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, which are stored in the storage means, are output. This allows the recipient of the signal output from the output means to analyze not only the role ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game media paid out in response to winning at the winning port that is due to the first winning port (i.e., the operation of the role), but also the consecutive role ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game media paid out in response to winning at the second winning port (i.e., the operation of the role when the role is operated continuously), and has the effect of being able to more accurately detect fraudulent activity based on the role ratio and consecutive role ratio.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8,
a main control means for mainly controlling a game, the main control means including the winning detection means, and a payout number setting means for, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium discharged by the discharge means has won in any of the winning ports, setting the number of game media to be paid out based on the winning port in which the game medium has won and notifying the payout means of the number;
The main control means has a calculation means for executing a calculation for performing a main control of a game,
At least the winning detection means, the payout amount setting means, the memory control means, and the output means are realized by the execution of calculations by the calculation means.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effect is achieved. That is, it has a winning detection means, and a payout number setting means that, when the winning detection means detects that the gaming medium fired by the firing means has won in any winning port, sets the number of gaming media to be paid out based on the winning port in which the gaming medium won and notifies the payout means, and the main control means that performs the main control of the game is provided with a calculation means that executes calculations for performing the main control of the game. And at least the winning detection means, the payout number setting means, the generation of information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, which is accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the output means that outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are realized by the execution of calculations by the calculation means. As a result, the detection of a win at a winning port by the winning detection means, the setting of the number of game media to be paid out based on that detection, the storage control means storing in the storage means information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a win at the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the set number of payouts, and the output of a signal based on the information stored in the storage means can all be performed by the arithmetic device of the main control means. Therefore, even if a cheater tries to prevent the detection of a cheat based on the role ratio by outputting fraudulent information to the output means, it becomes difficult to input fraudulent information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the detection of a cheat based on the role ratio by a cheater outputting fraudulent information.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8,
A main control means for mainly controlling a game is provided,
The main control means includes a calculation means for executing a calculation for performing a main control of a game,
The winning detection means and the payout number setting means, which, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won in any of the winning ports, sets the number of game media to be paid out based on the winning port in which the game medium has won and notifies the payout means of this, are realized by the execution of a calculation by the calculation means;
The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the memory control means and the output means are provided on a microchip separate from the performance means.

According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effect is achieved. That is, the main control means that performs the main control of the game is provided with a calculation means that executes calculations for performing that control, and the winning detection means and the payout number setting means that, when the winning detection means detects that the gaming medium fired by the firing means has won in any winning port, sets the number of gaming media to be paid out based on the winning port in which the gaming medium won and notifies the payout means are realized by the execution of calculations by the main calculation means. Meanwhile, the memory control means that accumulates and stores in the memory means information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, and the output means that outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the memory means are provided in a microchip separate from the calculation means. This has the effect of making it possible to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winning at the first winning port to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, without significantly rewriting the calculation instructions (program) executed by the calculation means, simply by providing a separate microchip. In addition, because a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winning at the first winning port to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means is output, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load on the calculation means, and it is possible to devote most of the processing capacity of the calculation means to the main control of the game.

In the gaming machine B1,
The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the microchip is provided in the main control means.

Gaming machine B2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine B1. That is, a microchip provided with a memory control means, an output means, and a performance means is provided in the main control means. As a result, the storage means stores information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winning into the first winning port to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means based on the set payout number, and the main control means outputs a signal based on the information stored in the storage means. Therefore, even if a cheater tries to prevent the detection of a cheating act based on the role ratio by causing the output means to output fraudulent information, it is difficult to input fraudulent information because the above configuration is completed by the main control means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the prevention of the detection of a cheating act based on the role ratio by the output of fraudulent information by a cheater.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2,
The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the main control means and the microchip are housed together in a base box having a box base and a box cover covering an opening of the box base connected in an unopenable manner.

Gaming machine B3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines B1 and B2. That is, the main control means and the microchip are stored in a board box in which a box base and a box cover covering the opening of the box base are connected in an unopenable manner. Therefore, even if a cheater tries to prevent the detection of a cheating act based on the role ratio by making the output means output fraudulent information, it becomes difficult to input fraudulent information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the detection of a cheating act based on the role ratio from being prevented by a cheater outputting fraudulent information.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B3,
The main control means
a payout information storage means for storing information regarding the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when a win is made at the corresponding winning port;
The computing means executes a start-up process when the main control means is powered on,
Gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the startup process includes a process for transmitting information to the microchip indicating the number of gaming media to be paid out by the payout means for each winning port when a winning occurs at the corresponding winning port, based on the memory of the payout information storage means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the main control means, information regarding the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when a winning ticket is won at the corresponding winning ticket is stored in the payout information storage means. In the calculation means, a start-up process is executed when the main control means is powered on, and in the start-up process, information indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when a winning ticket is won at the corresponding winning ticket is transmitted to the microchip based on the storage in the payout information storage means. This has the effect that, even if the information indicating the number of game media to be paid out for winning at each winning ticket, which differs for each model of gaming machine, is not stored in the microchip in advance, the microchip can calculate the role ratio based on the information transmitted from the main control means when the power is turned on, or can output a signal based on that information and have the role ratio calculated for the one that receives the signal output from the output means.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B4,
The microchip is provided with a second calculation means for performing calculations to realize the memory control means and the output means.

Gaming machine B5 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by any of gaming machines B1 to B4. That is, the microchip is provided with a second calculation means, and the memory control means for accumulating and storing in the memory means information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winning into the first winning port to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the memory means are realized by the calculation of this second calculation means. This has the effect of making it possible to flexibly respond to functional and specification changes in the memory control means, output means, etc. by changing the calculation command (program) of the second presentation means.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B4,
The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the microchip realizes the memory control means and the output means by wired logic.

Gaming machine B6 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by any of gaming machines B1 to B4. That is, the microchip realizes, by wired logic, a storage control means for accumulating and storing in a storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on a win at the first winning port to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, and an output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. This has the effect of enabling high-speed processing such as storing and outputting in the storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on a win at the first winning port to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9 and B1 to B6,
The storage means is configured to be able to retain stored information even while the power is turned off.

Gaming machine C1 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines A1 to A9 and B1 to B6. That is, the information stored in the storage means related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winning at the first winning slot to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means is retained even while the power is turned off. This allows information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winning at the first winning slot to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means over a long period of time to be accumulated and stored in the storage means, regardless of whether the gaming machine is powered on or not. Therefore, anyone who receives a signal output from the output means can analyze the ratio of the game features of the gaming machine over a long period of time, which has the effect of discovering past fraudulent behavior as well.

In the gaming machine C1,
a second storage means that cannot hold information while the power supply is cut off;
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has occurred,
The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that, when the judgment means determines that the specified trigger has occurred, the memory control means stores in the memory means information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on a winning entry into the first winning port to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, based on information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second memory means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C1, gaming machine C2 provides the following effects. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores information about winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The second storage means cannot hold information while the power is off. Then, when the judgment means judges that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning into the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the winning information detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing information about winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, winning into the winning port can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means without missing out on winning. Then, each time a predetermined trigger occurs, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning into the first winning slot to the number of game media paid out by the payout means can be stored in the storage means, reflecting all winnings, based on the information stored in the second storage means. This has the effect of outputting more accurate information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning into the first winning slot to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. In addition, the storage means is configured to be able to hold the stored information even while the power is cut off. Generally, writing requires a large amount of power, takes a long time, and there is a limit to the number of times it can be written from the standpoint of durability. However, by configuring it as described above, the number of times it can be written into the storage means can be reduced, and the above problems with the storage means can be prevented from becoming apparent.

In the gaming machine C2,
The output means outputs at least a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the memory means and a signal based on the information stored in the second memory means.

Gaming machine C3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine C2. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. This results in the output of information related to the most recent winning entry stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, and therefore has the effect of making it possible to determine whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity, including the most recent winning situation.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3,
The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the memory control means accumulates and stores in the memory means information indicating a win detected by the win detection means as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a win at the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the memory control means accumulates and stores information indicating the winning port where the winning is detected by the winning detection means as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning into the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the memory means. Then, a signal based on this information is output. The person who receives the signal output from the output means can calculate the number of game media paid out by the payout means and the number of game media paid out based on the winning into the first winning port based on the information indicating the winning port where the winning was detected, and can analyze the role ratio from these numbers. Then, if a suspicious change is found in the role ratio, the cause can be deeply investigated based on the information indicating the winning port where the winning was detected. Therefore, there is an effect that fraudulent acts based on the role ratio can be more reliably discovered.

In the gaming machine D1,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has occurred,
The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that, when the judgment means determines that the specified trigger has occurred, the memory control means accumulates and stores in the memory means information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second memory means as information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning at the first winning port to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means.

Gaming machine D1 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by any of gaming machines D2. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores information about winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. Then, when the judgment means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the information about winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning into the first winning slot to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. In this way, by first storing information about winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, winning into the winning slot can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means without missing out on winning. Then, each time a predetermined trigger occurs, the information stored in the second storage means reflecting all wins can be accumulated and stored in the storage means as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a win in the first winning slot to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. This has the effect of making it possible to output more accurate information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a win in the first winning slot to the number of game media paid out by the payout means.

In the gaming machine D2,
The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the memory means and a signal based on the information stored in the second memory means.

Gaming machine D3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine D2. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. This results in the output of information related to the most recent winning entry stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, and therefore has the effect of making it possible to determine whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity, including the most recent winning situation.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3,
The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the memory means, and a signal indicating, at each winning port, the number of gaming media to be paid out by the payout means when a winning occurs at the corresponding winning port.

Gaming machine D4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines D1 to D3. That is, the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal for each winning slot indicating the number of gaming media to be paid out by the payout means when a winning occurs at the corresponding winning slot. This has the effect of allowing the recipient of the signal output from the output means to calculate and analyze the ratio of game devices from the winning information output from the gaming machine, even if the recipient does not have information regarding the number of gaming media to be paid out when a winning occurs at each winning slot in the connected gaming machine.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4,
a ratio calculation means for calculating a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on a win into the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means,
The output means outputs a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the memory means.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effect is achieved. That is, based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning port to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means is calculated by the ratio calculation means. Then, a signal indicating the ratio calculated by this ratio calculation means is output by the output means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. As a result, it is not necessary for a person who receives the signal output by the output means to calculate the ratio (the role ratio), and it is possible to easily analyze fraudulent acts. In addition, when a person who receives the signal output by the output means tries to calculate the role ratio, there is a risk that the role ratio will be calculated based on the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means when a winning is made in the corresponding winning port in each winning port that is set fraudulently or erroneously. In contrast, in the gaming machine D5, the ratio of the reels is calculated and output by a ratio calculation means, which has the effect of allowing accurate calculation of the ratio of the reels and the ratio of consecutive reels.

In the gaming machine D5,
The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the output means outputs, as signals based on the information accumulated and stored in the memory means, a signal indicating the information accumulated and stored in the memory means and a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means.

Gaming machine D6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine D5. That is, the output means outputs a signal indicating winning information detected by the winning detection means, which is accumulated and stored in the storage means, and a signal indicating the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winning into the first winning slot to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, which is calculated by the ratio calculation means. This has the effect that if there is something suspicious about the ratio (gimmick ratio) output from the output means, the cause can be found from the winning information detected by the winning detection means, which is also output.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has occurred;
a ratio calculation means for calculating a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a win at the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred,
The gaming machine E1, wherein the memory control means cumulatively stores information indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means in the memory means.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the information about the winning detected by the winning detection means is temporarily stored in the second storage means by the second storage control means. When the judgment means judges that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning into the first winning port to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means is calculated by the ratio calculation means based on the information stored in the second storage means. Then, information indicating this calculated ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, since this calculated ratio (role ratio) is output, the person who receives the signal output by the output means does not need to calculate the ratio (role ratio), which has the effect of making it easier to analyze fraudulent behavior. In addition, when a device that receives a signal output by the output means attempts to calculate the ratio of the prizes, there is a risk that the ratio of the prizes will be calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means when a prize is won at the corresponding prize slot that has been set fraudulently or erroneously. However, since the ratio of the prizes is calculated and output by the ratio calculation means, it is possible to accurately calculate the ratio of the prizes and the ratio of consecutive prizes. In addition, since the information indicating the ratio of the prizes is accumulated and stored in the storage means, it is possible to reduce the amount of information stored in the storage means, and it is possible to prevent the storage capacity required for the storage means from increasing.

In the gaming machine E1,
The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the memory means and a signal based on the information stored in the second memory means.

Gaming machine E2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine E1. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. This allows information about the latest winning entry into the winning slot stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, to be output, which has the effect of making it possible to determine whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity, including the latest winning situation. Also, while the information stored in the storage means is the ratio of winning devices, the information stored in the second storage means is information about winning detected by the winning detection means, so that the information about winning can be used to more deeply analyze the cause of a situation suspected of being fraudulent.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2,
Gaming machine E3, characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the memory means, and a signal indicating, at each winning port, the number of gaming media to be paid out by the payout means when a winning occurs at the corresponding winning port.

Gaming machine E3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines E1 or E2. That is, the output means outputs at least a signal based on information stored in the storage means and a signal indicating the number of gaming media to be paid out by the payout means when a winning ticket is won at the corresponding winning ticket. This has the effect that when the ratio of winning devices is analyzed and there is a situation where fraudulent activity is suspected, the cause of the situation can be identified by referring to the number of gaming media to be paid out by the payout means when a winning ticket is won at the corresponding winning ticket.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3,
a second storage control means for counting the number of game media that have won in each winning slot from the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity until the occurrence of the next predetermined opportunity for each winning slot based on detection by the winning detection means, and storing information indicating the number of game media that have won in each winning slot, counted for each winning slot, in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has occurred,
The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that, when the judgment means determines that the specified trigger has occurred, the memory control means accumulates and stores in the memory means the information stored in the second memory means as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a win at the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effect is achieved. That is, based on detection by the winning detection means, the number of game media won in each winning slot from the occurrence of a predetermined trigger until the occurrence of the next predetermined trigger is counted for each winning slot by the second storage control means, and information indicating the number of winning game media counted for each winning slot is stored in the second storage means. Then, when the judgment means judges that the predetermined trigger has occurred, the information indicating the winning game media counted for each winning slot and stored in the second storage means is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning slot to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. As a result, first, the winnings detected by the winning detection means are counted by the second storage control means for each winning port, so that winnings at the winning ports are not overlooked and are reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. Then, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, the information indicating the number of game media won at each winning port, which is stored in the second storage means by reflecting all winnings, can be accumulated and stored in the storage means as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings at the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Therefore, there is an effect that more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings at the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. In addition, since the storage means stores the total number of game media won at each winning port from the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity until the occurrence of the next predetermined opportunity, there is an effect that the storage capacity required for the storage means can be suppressed from increasing. Furthermore, the second storage means also stores information indicating the number of game media that have won in each winning slot between the occurrence of a predetermined trigger and the occurrence of the next predetermined trigger, which has the effect of preventing an increase in the storage capacity required for the second storage means.

In the gaming machine F1,
The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the memory means and a signal based on the information stored in the second memory means.

Gaming machine F2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine F1. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. This results in the output of information indicating the number of gaming media that have won at each winning slot, including the most recent winning slot, which is stored in the second storage means and is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, thereby providing the effect of making it possible to determine whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity, including the most recent winning situation.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2,
Gaming machine F3, characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the memory means, and a signal for each winning port indicating the number of gaming media to be paid out by the payout means when a winning occurs in the corresponding winning port.

Gaming machine F3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines F1 and F2. That is, the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal for each winning slot indicating the number of gaming media to be paid out by the payout means when a winning occurs at the corresponding winning slot. This has the effect that even if the recipient of the signal output from the output means does not have information regarding the number of gaming media to be paid out when a winning occurs at each winning slot in the connected gaming machine, the device ratio can be calculated and analyzed from the winning information output from the gaming machine.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3,
a ratio calculation means for calculating a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on a win into the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means,
The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the output means outputs a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means as a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the memory means.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effect is achieved. That is, based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning of the first winning port to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means is calculated by the ratio calculation means. Then, a signal indicating the ratio calculated by this ratio calculation means is output by the output means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. This has the effect that the person who receives the signal output from the output means does not need to calculate the ratio (the role ratio), and it is possible to easily analyze the fraudulent act. In addition, when the person who receives the signal output from the output means tries to calculate the role ratio, there is a risk that the role ratio will be calculated based on the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means when a winning occurs in the corresponding winning port in each winning port that is set fraudulently or erroneously. In contrast, in gaming machine F4, the ratio of the reels is calculated and output by a ratio calculation means, which has the effect of allowing accurate calculation of the ratio of the reels and the ratio of consecutive reels.

In the gaming machine F4,
The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the output means outputs, as signals based on the information accumulated and stored in the memory means, a signal indicating the information accumulated and stored in the memory means and a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means.

Gaming machine F5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine F4. That is, as information accumulated and stored in the storage means, a signal indicating the number of game media won in each winning port from when a predetermined trigger occurs until the next predetermined trigger occurs, and a signal indicating the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means calculated by the ratio calculation means are output by the output means. This has the effect that if there is something suspicious about the ratio (gimmick ratio) output from the output means, the cause can be found from the number of game media won in each winning port from when a predetermined trigger occurs until the next predetermined trigger occurs, which is also output.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3,
a second storage control means for counting the number of game media that have won in each winning slot from the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity until the occurrence of the next predetermined opportunity for each winning slot based on detection by the winning detection means, and storing information indicating the number of game media that have won in each winning slot, counted for each winning slot, in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has occurred;
a ratio calculation means for calculating a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a win at the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred,
The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the memory control means accumulates and stores information indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means in the memory means.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effect is achieved. That is, based on detection by the winning detection means, the number of game media that have won in each winning slot from the occurrence of a predetermined trigger until the occurrence of the next predetermined trigger is counted for each winning slot by the second storage control means, and information indicating the number of winning game media counted for each winning slot is stored in the second storage means. When the judgment means judges that the predetermined trigger has occurred, based on the information stored in the second storage means, the ratio calculation means calculates the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning slot to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Then, the information indicating this calculated ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, the calculated ratio (role ratio) is output, so that the person who receives the signal output by the output means does not need to calculate the ratio (role ratio), and there is an effect that it is possible to easily analyze fraudulent acts. In addition, when the person who receives the signal output by the output means tries to calculate the role ratio, there is a risk that the role ratio is calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means when a prize is won at the corresponding winning port, which is set illegally or erroneously, but since the role ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculation means, there is an effect that the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio can be calculated accurately. In addition, since the information indicating the role ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage means, there is an effect that the amount of information stored in the storage means can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the storage means can be suppressed from increasing. Furthermore, since the second storage means also stores information indicating the number of game media won at each winning port from the occurrence of a predetermined trigger until the occurrence of the next predetermined trigger, there is an effect that the storage capacity required for the second storage means can be suppressed from increasing.

In the gaming machine G1,
The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the memory means and a signal based on the information stored in the second memory means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the gaming machine G2 has the following effects. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. This outputs information indicating the number of gaming media that have won at each winning slot, including the latest winning slot, that is stored in the second storage means and is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, so that it is possible to determine whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity, including the latest winning situation. In addition, while the information stored in the storage means is the ratio of game devices, the information stored in the second storage means is information indicating the number of gaming media that have won at each winning slot from the time a specified opportunity occurs until the time the next specified opportunity occurs, so that by using this information, it is possible to more deeply analyze the cause of a situation suspected of being fraudulent.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2,
The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the memory means, and a signal indicating, at each winning port, the number of gaming media to be paid out by the payout means when a winning occurs at the corresponding winning port.

Gaming machine G3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines G1 or G2. That is, the output means outputs at least a signal based on information stored in the storage means and a signal indicating the number of gaming media to be paid out by the payout means when a winning ticket is won at the corresponding winning ticket. This has the effect that a person who receives the signal output from the output means can analyze the ratio of the game devices and, if there is a situation where fraudulent activity is suspected, can look for the cause of the situation by referring to the number of gaming media to be paid out by the payout means when a winning ticket is won at the corresponding winning ticket.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, and G1 to G3,
a second storage control means for storing information about the winning detected by the winning detection means from the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity until the occurrence of the next predetermined opportunity in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has occurred,
The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that, when the judgment means determines that the specified trigger has occurred, the memory control means stores in the memory means information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on a winning entry into the first winning port to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, based on information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second memory means.

According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, and G1 to G3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores information about winning detected by the winning detection means from the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity until the occurrence of the next predetermined opportunity in the second storage means. Then, when the judgment means judges that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning into the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the winning information detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing information about winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, winning into the winning port can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means without missing out. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, each time a predetermined event occurs, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a win in the first winning slot to the number of game media paid out by the payout means can be stored in the storage means, reflecting all wins. This has the effect of outputting more accurate information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a win in the first winning slot to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. In addition, since the second storage means only stores information relating to wins detected by the win detection means from the occurrence of a predetermined event until the occurrence of the next predetermined event, it has the effect of keeping the storage capacity of the second storage means small.

In the gaming machine H1,
The gaming machine H2, characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the memory means and a signal based on the information stored in the second memory means.

Gaming machine H2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine H1. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. This results in the output of information related to the most recent winning entry into the winning slot stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, and has the effect of making it possible to determine whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity, including the most recent winning situation.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2,
The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the second storage means is configured to be able to retain stored information even while the power is cut off.

Gaming machine H3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines H1 and H2. That is, the winning information stored in the second storage means and detected by the winning detection means from when a predetermined trigger occurs until the next predetermined trigger occurs is retained even while the power is cut off. This has the effect of preventing the loss of winning information stored in the second storage means and not yet reflected in the storage means when the power is cut off, thereby increasing the reliability of the output signal.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and H1 to H3,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has occurred;
A power interruption detection means for detecting that the power supply is interrupted,
The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that, when the judgment means determines that the specified trigger has occurred and when the power interruption detection means detects that the power has been interrupted, the memory control means stores in the memory means information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second memory means to the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning into the first winning port to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means.

Gaming machine I1 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and H1 to H3. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores information about the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. Then, when the judgment means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the memory control means accumulates and stores in the storage means information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning into the first winning slot to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, based on the information about the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. Furthermore, even when the power interruption detection means detects that the power supply is interrupted, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning into the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the winning information detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. In this way, by first storing the winning information detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, winning into the winning port can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means without missing any winning. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, or even when the power supply is interrupted before the predetermined opportunity occurs, all winnings can be reflected and information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning into the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means can be stored in the storage means. This has the effect of preventing the loss of winning information stored in the second storage means that has not yet been reflected in the storage means when the power is cut off, and of outputting more accurate information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on a winning entry to the first winning slot to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means.

In the gaming machine I1,
a power supply means capable of supplying power for at least a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is cut off;
The power supply means supplies the power to at least the memory control means.

Gaming machine I2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine I1. That is, at least the storage control means is supplied with power by the power supply means for at least a predetermined period of time even after the power is cut off. Therefore, when the power cut detection means detects that the power is cut off, the storage control means can use that power to reliably store in the storage means information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on a win at the first winning slot to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, based on information related to a win detected by the win detection means stored in the second storage means.

In the gaming machine I2,
The power supply means supplies the power to the second storage means.

Gaming machine I3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine I2. That is, power is supplied by the power supply means not only to the memory control means but also to the second memory means for at least a predetermined period of time after the power is cut off. This has the effect of reliably storing in the memory means information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on a winning entry into the first winning slot to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, based on information about a winning entry detected by the winning entry detection means stored in the second memory means, before the status stored in the second memory means is erased.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, and I1 to I3,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has occurred,
the second storage means is configured to be able to retain stored information even while the power supply is cut off;
The gaming machine I4 is characterized in that, when power is supplied and when the judgment means judges that the specified trigger has occurred, the memory control means stores in the memory means information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on a winning entry into the first winning port to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means, based on information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second memory means.

According to gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, and I1 to I3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores information about the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The information stored in the second storage means is retained even while the power is turned off. Then, when power is supplied and when the judgment means judges that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, information related to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on the winning into the first winning port to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means based on the winning information detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, first, by storing information about winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, winnings in the winning port can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means without missing any. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, when power is supplied and each time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all winnings can be reflected, and information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, when the power is cut off, information about winning stored in the second storage means and not yet reflected in the storage in the storage means can be reliably reflected in the information stored in the storage means after power is supplied, and the loss of the information stored in the second storage means can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Furthermore, if information is stored in the storage means based on the information stored in the second storage means when a power outage is detected, the power supply may be interrupted midway through the storage of information in the storage means, which may result in the storage of information in the storage means not reflecting all of the information stored in the second storage means, or incorrect information being stored in the storage means; however, when power is supplied, information is stored in the storage means based on the information stored in the second storage means, which has the effect of preventing such problems from occurring.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, and I1 to I4,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has occurred,
the storage control means, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, stores in the storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning into the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means, based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means;
The gaming machine J1 is characterized in that the predetermined trigger includes the number of gaming media released into the gaming area reaching a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, and I1 to I4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores information about the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. Then, when the judgment means judges that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning into the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing information about the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning into the winning port can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means without missing out on the winning. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning into the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means can be stored in the storage means, reflecting all winnings. Therefore, there is an effect that more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning into the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. In addition, since the predetermined opportunity includes the number of game media shot into the play area reaching a predetermined number, it is possible to calculate the ratio (gimmick ratio) of the number of game media paid out based on winning into the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means when the predetermined game media are shot out. Therefore, since the gimmick ratio can be calculated at the stage when many game media win into various winning ports and are paid out, an averaged gimmick ratio can be calculated. This eliminates short-term fluctuations in the ratio of game elements during normal play, making it easier for those who receive the signal output by the output means to analyze any fraudulent activity.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, and J1,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has occurred,
the storage control means, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, stores in the storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning into the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means, based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means;
The predetermined occasion includes the current time becoming a predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, and J1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores information about the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. Then, when the judgment means judges that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning into the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing information about the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning into the winning port can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means without missing out on the winning. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning at the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means can be stored in the storage means, reflecting all winnings. Therefore, there is an effect that more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning at the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. In addition, since the predetermined opportunity includes the current time being the predetermined time, even in a situation where no game is being played, the arrival of the predetermined time can reliably calculate the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning at the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means (the role ratio). Therefore, there is an effect that the reliably calculated role ratio can reliably analyze the presence or absence of fraudulent activity for those who receive the signal output from the output means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1, and J2,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has occurred,
the storage control means, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, stores in the storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning into the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means, based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means;
The predetermined trigger includes a cumulative total time during which games have been played reaching a predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1, and J2, the following effect is achieved. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores information about the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. Then, when the judgment means judges that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning into the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, by first storing information about the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning into the winning port can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means without missing out on the winning. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning at the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means can be stored in the storage means, reflecting all winnings. Therefore, there is an effect that more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning at the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. In addition, the predetermined opportunity includes the cumulative time during which the game has been played reaching a predetermined time. Here, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning at the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means (the role ratio) is originally calculated by performing a test shot test of the game ball for 10 hours. By storing information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning at the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the storage means when the game time reaches a predetermined time, a role ratio close to the original definition can be calculated. This has the effect of allowing the receiver of the signal output from the output means to perform analysis using a role ratio that is close to the original definition.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, and J1 to J3,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has occurred,
the storage control means, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, stores in the storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning into the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means, based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means;
The predetermined trigger includes a cumulative time for which power has been supplied reaching a second predetermined time.

Gaming machine J4 provides the following effects in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, and J1 to J3.

That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores information about winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. Then, when the judgment means judges that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning into the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the winning information detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thus, by first storing information about winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect winning into the winning port without missing it in the information stored in the second storage means. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect all winnings and store information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning into the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the storage means every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, based on the information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning into the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. In addition, since the predetermined trigger includes the cumulative time during which power is supplied reaching the second predetermined time, even in a situation where not much play is performed, the ratio (gimmick ratio) of the number of game media paid out based on winning into the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means can be reliably calculated because the time during which power is supplied reaches the second predetermined time. Therefore, there is an effect that the reliably calculated game ratio can reliably analyze the presence or absence of fraudulent acts for those who receive the signal output from the output means. In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, and J1 to J4,
A main control means for mainly controlling a game is provided,
The main control means includes a calculation means for executing a calculation for performing a main control of a game,
The winning detection means and the payout number setting means, which, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won in any of the winning ports, sets the number of game media to be paid out based on the winning port in which the game medium has won and notifies the payout means of this, are realized by the execution of a calculation by the calculation means;
the memory control means and the output means are provided in a microchip separate from the performance means,
The microchip comprises:
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has occurred,
the storage control means, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, stores in the storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning into the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means, based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means;
The main control means
a predetermined trigger information storage means for storing information indicating the predetermined trigger,
The computing means executes a start-up process when the main control means is powered on,
The start-up process includes a process for transmitting information indicating a predetermined trigger to the microchip based on the information stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means.

Gaming machine J5 provides the following effects in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, and J1 to J4. That is, the main control means that performs the main control of the game is provided with a calculation means that executes calculations for performing that control, and the winning detection means and the payout number setting means that, when the winning detection means detects that the gaming medium fired by the firing means has won in any winning port, sets the number of gaming media to be paid out based on the winning port in which the gaming medium won and notifies the payout means of this, are realized by the execution of calculations by the main calculation means. On the other hand, the memory control means for accumulating and storing in the memory means information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning at the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the memory means are provided on a microchip separate from the calculation means. This has the effect of making it possible to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning at the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, simply by providing a separate microchip, without having to significantly rewrite the calculation instructions (program) executed by the calculation means.

In addition, since a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning into the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is output, the increase in the processing load on the calculation means can be suppressed, and most of the processing capacity of the calculation means can be used for the main control of the game. In addition, in the microchip, the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means is temporarily stored in the second storage means by the second storage control means. Then, when the judgment means judges that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning into the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means based on the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. As a result, by first storing information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning into the winning port can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means without missing it. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, each time a predetermined trigger occurs, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a win in the first winning slot to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, reflecting all wins, can be stored in the storage means. This has the effect of making it possible to output more accurate information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a win in the first winning slot to the number of game media paid out by the payout means.

On the other hand, the main control means stores the predetermined trigger in a predetermined trigger information storage means. The calculation means executes a start-up process when the main control means is powered on, and during the start-up process, information indicating the predetermined trigger is transmitted to the microchip based on the information stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means. Here, the storage of information regarding the ratio (gimmick ratio) of the number of game media paid out based on winning into the first winning slot to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is physically limited by the storage capacity of the storage means that stores information regarding the gimmick ratio, so it is preferable that the microchip does not fix the stored trigger, but rather takes into account the probability of a jackpot and the probability of a special bonus in the gaming machine. Therefore, by having the main control means store the predetermined trigger in the predetermined trigger information storage means, and by transmitting information indicating the predetermined trigger to the microchip each time the power is turned on, the microchip can store information in the storage means regarding the ratio (gimmick ratio) of the number of gaming media paid out based on a win in the first winning slot to the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means at a predetermined trigger that matches the probability of a jackpot or the probability of a special bonus in the gaming machine.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, and J1 to J5,
a third storage control means for accumulating information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine and storing the information in a third storage means;
The output means outputs information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine stored in the third storage means.

Gaming machine K1 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, and J1 to J5. That is, information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine is accumulated and stored in the third storage means by the third storage control means. The information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine stored in the third storage means is output by the output means. This has the effect that a person who receives a signal output by the output means can analyze the gaming state of the gaming machine and find the cause if fraudulent activity is suspected.

In the gaming machine K1,
A door frame covering the front of the play area is provided,
The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which the door frame is open.

Gaming machine K2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine K1. That is, the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which the door frame covering the front of the gaming area is open, so that a person who receives a signal output from the output means can determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity from the occurrence of the state in which the door frame is open.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2,
The gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes an error state of the gaming machine.

Gaming machine K3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines K1 and K2. That is, the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes the error state of the gaming machine, so that a person who receives a signal output from the output means can determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity from the occurrence of the error state of the gaming machine.

In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3,
The gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a winning state in which a predetermined gaming value is awarded to a player.

Gaming machine K4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines K1 to K3. That is, the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a winning state in which a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player, so that a person who receives a signal output from the output means can determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity from the occurrence of the winning state of the gaming machine.

In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4,
Gaming machine K5, characterized in that the gaming status of the gaming machine stored as information in the third memory means includes a state in which the winning detection means detects that a prize has been won in any of the winning slots within a predetermined period of time.

Gaming machine K5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines K1 to K4. That is, the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which the winning detection means detects that a prize has been won at any of the winning slots within a specified time. Therefore, anyone who receives a signal output from the output means can determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity based on whether or not the state includes a winning event outside of business hours, such as late at night.

A gaming machine comprising a lottery means for drawing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and which provides a player with advantageous gaming value when the result of the lottery drawn by the lottery means is a winning lottery,
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes including a first winning hole having a device that operates based on a game;
A launching means for launching a gaming medium into the gaming area;
a winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings, for detecting the winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media to the winning port in which the game medium shot by the shot means has won when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shot means has won in the winning port;
a memory control means for accumulating and storing in a memory means information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on a win in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means;
an output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the storage means;
A change means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means;
and an erasing means for erasing all of the information accumulated and stored in the memory means when the probability is changed by the changing means.

According to the gaming machine L1, a game medium is shot by a shooting means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports, including a first winning port having a role that operates based on a game. Each winning port is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning ports, a predetermined number of game media is paid out by a payout means to the winning port in which the game medium won. Also, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in a storage means by a storage control means. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means is output by an output means. This has the effect of being able to analyze the role ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game media paid out in conjunction with the winning of the winning port to the number due to the first winning port (i.e., the operation of the role) based on the output signal, and being able to discover fraudulent behavior based on the role ratio. On the other hand, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means in the lottery by the lottery means, which is the opportunity to award a player a favorable gaming value, the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is all erased by the erasure means. When the probability of winning is changed, the ratio of the prizes also changes. Therefore, if the information accumulated and stored in the storage means before the probability of winning is changed remains as it is, it becomes unclear whether the change in the ratio of prizes that can be analyzed based on the accumulated and stored information is due to the change in the probability of winning or due to fraud. In contrast, when the probability of winning is changed, all the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is erased, which has the effect of eliminating the effect of the change in the ratio of the prizes that accompanies the change in the probability of winning from remaining in the storage means.

In the gaming machine L1,
The gaming machine L2 is characterized in that the memory control means stores information indicating that a change has been made in the memory means when the probability is changed by the change means.

Gaming machine L2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine L1. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the memory control means. This has the effect that it is possible to know at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been erased due to a change in the probability of winning, and this can be used as a reference for determining whether or not cheating has occurred.

In the gaming machine L2,
The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that, when the probability is changed by the change means, the memory control means stores information indicating that the change was made in the memory means together with information indicating the date and time when the change was made.

Gaming machine L3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine L2. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means, information indicating that the change was made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information indicating the date and time when the change was made. This has the effect of making it possible to know at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means was erased due to a change in the probability of winning, and also to know the date and time when the change was made (i.e., the erasure was made), thereby making it possible to more reliably determine whether or not cheating has occurred.

In the gaming machine L2 or L3,
The gaming machine L4 is characterized in that, when the probability is changed by the change means, the memory control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the memory means together with information indicating the probability of winning after the change.

Gaming machine L4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines L2 or L3. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information indicating the probability of winning after the change. This makes it possible to know at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been erased due to a change in the probability of winning, and also to know the probability of winning after the change, resulting in the effect of being able to more reliably determine whether or not cheating has occurred while also knowing the probability of winning after the change.

In any one of gaming machines L2 to L4,
The gaming machine L5 is characterized in that, when the probability is changed by the change means, the memory control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the memory means together with information indicating the probability of winning before the change.

Gaming machine L5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines L2 to L4. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information indicating the probability of winning before the change. This makes it possible to know at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been erased due to a change in the probability of winning, and also to know the probability of winning before the change, resulting in the effect of being able to more reliably determine whether or not cheating has occurred while also knowing the probability of winning before the change.

A gaming machine comprising a lottery means for drawing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and which provides a player with advantageous gaming value when the result of the lottery drawn by the lottery means is a winning lottery,
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes including a first winning hole having a device that operates based on a game;
A launching means for launching a gaming medium into the gaming area;
a winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings, for detecting the winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media to the winning port in which the game medium shot by the shot means has won when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shot means has won in the winning port;
a memory control means for accumulating and storing in a memory means information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on a win in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means;
an output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the storage means;
a change means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means,
The information accumulated and stored in the storage means continues to be held even when the probability is changed by the changing means.

According to the gaming machine M1, a game medium is launched by a launching means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports, including a first winning port having a role that operates based on a game. Each winning port is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. When the winning detection means detects that the game medium launched by the launching means has won any of the winning ports, a predetermined number of game media is paid out by a payout means to the winning port in which the game medium won. In addition, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in a storage means by a storage control means. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means is output by an output means. This has the effect of analyzing the role ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game media paid out in conjunction with the winning of the winning port to the number due to the first winning port (i.e., the operation of the role) based on the output signal, and discovering fraudulent behavior based on the role ratio. On the other hand, in the lottery by the lottery means, which is the opportunity to award advantageous game value to the player, all information stored in the storage means continues to be held even if the probability of winning is changed by the change means. This has the effect of making it possible to analyze whether or not there has been fraud before the probability of winning is changed, although the ratio of the winning devices changes as the probability of winning changes.

In the gaming machine M1,
The gaming machine M2 is characterized in that the memory control means, when the probability is changed by the change means, stores information indicating that the change has been made in the memory means.

Gaming machine M2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine M1. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the memory control means. This has the effect that it is possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the ratio of the roles has changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and this can be used as a reference for determining whether or not cheating has occurred.

In the gaming machine M2,
The gaming machine M3 is characterized in that, when the probability is changed by the change means, the memory control means stores information indicating that the change was made in the memory means together with information indicating the date and time when the change was made.

Gaming machine M3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine M2. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means, information indicating that the change was made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information indicating the date and time when the change was made. This has the effect that since the date and time when the probability of winning was changed can be easily grasped, if the ratio of the winning devices changes after that, it can be easily determined during analysis that this may be due to a change in the probability of winning.

In gaming machine M2 or M3,
The gaming machine M4 is characterized in that, when the probability is changed by the change means, the memory control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the memory means together with information indicating the probability of winning after the change.

Gaming machine M4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines M2 and M3. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information indicating the probability of winning after the change. This has the effect of making it possible to grasp the probability of winning after the change, and therefore to more reliably determine whether or not cheating has occurred while also knowing the probability of winning after the change.

In any one of gaming machines M2 to M4,
The gaming machine M5 is characterized in that, when the probability is changed by the change means, the memory control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the memory means together with information indicating the probability of winning before the change.

Gaming machine M5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines M2 to M4. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the memory means by the memory control means together with information indicating the probability of winning before the change. This has the effect of making it possible to grasp the probability of winning before the change, and therefore to more reliably determine whether or not cheating has occurred while also knowing the probability of winning before the change.

In any one of gaming machines M1 to M5,
A display means for displaying information related to the ratio of the game parts based on the information stored in the storage means,
The display means is characterized in that when the probability is changed by the change means, the display means displays information relating to the ratio of the reels based only on the information stored after the change.

Gaming machine M6 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines M1 to M5. That is, the display means displays information related to the ratio of prizes based on the information stored in the storage means. At this time, if the probability is changed by the change means, the information related to the ratio of prizes is displayed based only on the information stored after the change. This has the effect that the information related to the ratio of prizes displayed on the display means can exclude changes in the ratio of prizes that accompany changes in the probability of a win, making it easier to detect fraudulent behavior after the probability of a win is changed.

In any one of gaming machines M1 to M6,
The memory control means divides the information into the probabilities that can be set by the change made by the change means, and accumulates and stores the information in the memory means.

Gaming machine M7 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines M1 to M6. That is, the information stored in the storage means is divided into each probability of winning that can be set by the change made by the change means, and is accumulated and stored in the storage means. This makes it easy to determine the ratio of the features when each probability of winning that can be set is set from the information stored in the storage means. This has the effect of making it possible to clearly switch between and analyze the change in the feature ratio associated with a change in the probability of winning and the change in the feature ratio associated with fraudulent activity.

A gaming machine comprising a lottery means for drawing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and which provides a player with advantageous gaming value when the result of the lottery drawn by the lottery means is a winning lottery,
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes including a first winning hole having a device that operates based on a game;
A launching means for launching a gaming medium into the gaming area;
a winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings, for detecting the winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media to the winning port in which the game medium shot by the shot means has won when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shot means has won in the winning port;
a memory control means for accumulating and storing in a memory means information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on a win in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means;
an output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the storage means;
A change means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means;
The gaming machine N1 is characterized by comprising an erasing means for erasing all of the information accumulated and stored in the memory means except for a portion of the information most recently stored when the probability is changed by the changing means.

According to the gaming machine N1, a game medium is launched by a launching means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports, including a first winning port having a role that operates based on a game. Each winning port is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium launched by the launching means has won any of the winning ports, a predetermined number of game media is paid out by a payout means to the winning port in which the game medium won. Also, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in a storage means by a storage control means. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means is output by an output means. This has the effect of analyzing the role ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game media paid out in conjunction with the winning of the winning port to the number due to the first winning port (i.e., the operation of the role) based on the output signal, and discovering fraudulent behavior based on the role ratio. On the other hand, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means in the lottery by the lottery means, which is an opportunity to award a player a favorable game value, the information stored in the storage means is erased by the erase means, except for a portion of the information most recently stored. When the probability of winning is changed, the ratio of the prizes also changes. Therefore, if the information stored in the storage means before the probability of winning is changed remains as it is, it is unclear whether the change in the ratio of the prizes that can be analyzed based on the information stored in the storage means is due to the change in the probability of winning or due to fraudulent activity. In contrast, when the probability of winning is changed, the information stored in the storage means is erased except for a portion of the information most recently stored, so that the effect of the change in the ratio of the prizes due to the change in the probability of winning can be minimized from remaining in the storage means, while it is possible to analyze whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity occurring before the probability of winning is changed.

In the gaming machine N1,
The gaming machine N2 is characterized in that the memory control means stores information indicating that a change has been made in the memory means when the probability is changed by the change means.

Gaming machine N2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine N1. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the memory control means. This has the effect that it is possible to know at the analysis stage that the ratio of the roles has changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and it is possible to know at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been erased due to the change in the probability of winning, and this can be used as a reference for determining whether or not cheating has occurred.

In the gaming machine N2,
The gaming machine N3 is characterized in that, when the probability is changed by the change means, the memory control means stores information indicating that the change was made in the memory means together with information indicating the date and time when the change was made.

Gaming machine N3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine N2. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means, information indicating that the change was made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information indicating the date and time when the change was made. This makes it possible to know at the analysis stage that the ratio of the roles has changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and to know at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been erased due to the change in the probability of winning. Furthermore, the date and time when the change was made (i.e., the erasure was made) can also be known, which has the effect of making it possible to more reliably determine whether or not cheating has occurred.

In the gaming machine N2 or N3,
The gaming machine N4 is characterized in that, when the probability is changed by the change means, the memory control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the memory means together with information indicating the probability of winning after the change.

Gaming machine N4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines N2 and N3. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information indicating the probability of winning after the change. This makes it possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the ratio of the roles has changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and to grasp at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been erased due to the change in the probability of winning. Furthermore, since the probability of winning after the change can also be grasped, it has the effect of making it possible to more reliably determine whether or not cheating has occurred while also knowing the probability of winning after the change.

In any one of gaming machines N2 to N4,
The gaming machine N5 is characterized in that, when the probability is changed by the change means, the memory control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the memory means together with information indicating the probability of winning before the change.

Gaming machine N5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines N2 to N4. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information indicating the probability of winning before the change. This makes it possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the ratio of the roles has changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and to grasp at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been erased due to the change in the probability of winning. Furthermore, since the probability of winning before the change can also be grasped, it has the effect of making it possible to more reliably determine whether or not cheating has occurred while also knowing the probability of winning before the change.

A gaming machine comprising a lottery means for drawing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and which provides a player with advantageous gaming value when the result of the lottery drawn by the lottery means is a winning lottery,
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes including a first winning hole having a device that operates based on a game;
A launching means for launching a gaming medium into the gaming area;
a winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings, for detecting the winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media to the winning port in which the game medium shot by the shot means has won when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shot means has won in the winning port;
a memory control means for accumulating and storing in a memory means information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on a win in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means;
an output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information cumulatively stored in the storage means;
A display means for displaying information related to the ratio of the game parts based on the information stored in the storage means;
a mode switching means for switching to a mode for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means;
a means for displaying, when the mode switching means switches to the change mode, a value indicating the probability of winning to be changed on the display means;
The gaming machine O1 is characterized by comprising a setting means for setting the probability of winning to the desired value displayed on the display means when the mode for changing the probability of winning is completed.

According to the gaming machine O1, a game medium is launched by a launching means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports, including a first winning port having a role that operates based on a game. Each winning port is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. When the winning detection means detects that the game medium launched by the launching means has won any of the winning ports, a predetermined number of game media is paid out by a payout means to the winning port in which the game medium won. In addition, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in a storage means by a storage control means. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means is output by an output means. This has the effect of analyzing the role ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game media paid out in conjunction with the winning of the winning port to the number of game media due to the first winning port (i.e., the operation of the role) based on the output signal, and discovering fraudulent behavior based on the role ratio. Furthermore, since the display means displays information related to the ratio of winning combinations based on the information stored in the storage means, it has the effect of easily determining whether or not fraud has occurred by looking at the display means. On the other hand, when the mode switching means switches to a mode for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means, the display means displays a value indicating the probability of winning to be changed. Then, when the mode for changing the probability of winning is terminated, the setting means sets the probability of winning to be changed, displayed on the display means, as the probability of winning. This allows the display means for displaying information related to the ratio of winning combinations to be used as the display means for displaying the probability of winning to be changed when the probability of winning is to be changed. This has the effect of preventing an increase in the number of display means to be installed in the gaming machine.

(Challenge 2)
The gaming machines P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, and U2 shown below have been made to solve the following problems.

That is, a gaming machine is known in which the RAM (Random Access Memory) used in the main control means that controls the game is divided into a first storage area used for processing that mainly controls the game, and a second storage area used for other processing, and the information used in the main control of the game is protected from being destroyed by other processing (for example, Patent Publication No. 6154863).

On the other hand, there is a demand for better protection of information used in processes that primarily control games from other processes.

This technical idea was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that can optimally protect information used in the main control of gaming.

(Means and Effects 2)
In a gaming machine having a main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means
A calculation means for performing a calculation;
A plurality of registers;
a first storage means for storing in a readable and writable manner first information used when a first process for performing main control of a game is executed by the calculation means;
a second storage means having a storage area different from that of the first storage means and storing second information in a readable and writable manner to be used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the computing means;
a save means for saving the contents of the register to a predetermined area of a second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction when the calculation means shifts from a stage where the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to a stage where the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means;
A gaming machine P1 characterized in that it is equipped with a return means for restoring the contents of the register saved in the specified area of the second storage means to the corresponding register when the calculation means returns from a stage where the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means to a stage where the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means.

According to the gaming machine P1, a main control means for controlling the game is provided. In the main control means, when a first process for mainly controlling the game is executed by a calculation means for performing calculations, first information used for executing the first process is stored in a readable and writable manner in a first storage means. In addition, second information, which has a different storage area from the first storage means and is used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the calculation means, is stored in a readable and writable manner in a second storage means. Then, when the calculation means moves from a stage where the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to a stage where the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a save means with a load command or a store command. On the other hand, when the calculation means returns from a stage where the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means to a stage where the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the contents of the register saved in a predetermined area of the second storage means are restored to the corresponding register by the restoration means. This allows the information stored in this register to be appropriately protected from other processes, as opposed to information used in the process that mainly controls the game. In addition, since the contents of the register are saved in a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load command or a store command, the location where the contents are saved can be fixed to a predetermined area, compared to the case where the contents are saved in a stack area. Therefore, by programming the second storage means to clearly avoid the predetermined area where the contents of the register are saved while the second process is being performed, the contents of the register used in the first process can be reliably protected. This has the effect of appropriately protecting the information used in the main control of the game.

In the gaming machine P1,
the second storage means includes a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the calculation means, and a working area for storing information used based on an instruction to the calculation means;
The saving means saves the contents of the register to the predetermined area provided in the working area of the second storage means.

Gaming machine P2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine P1. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on instructions to the calculation means, and a working area for storing information used based on calculations to the calculation means, and the contents of the register saved by the saving means are saved to a predetermined area provided in the working area of the second storage means. This has the effect of reducing the capacity required for the stack area and ensuring a large capacity for the working area.

In the gaming machine P2,
The calculation means includes:
A stack area designation means for designating a range of the stack area in advance;
A gaming machine P3 is characterized by comprising a memory clearing means which, when information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range specified by the stack area designation means, clears all information stored in at least the second memory means in which the stack area is provided.

Gaming machine P3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine P2. That is, the calculation means specifies the range of the stack area in advance by the stack area designation means. On the other hand, when information is stacked in the stack area beyond the designated range, at least the information stored in the second storage means in which the stack area is provided is cleared by the memory clearing means. Here, when the calculation means moves from a stage in which the calculation means executes a first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to a stage in which the calculation means executes a second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the contents of the register are saved by the saving means to a working area rather than to the stack area. Therefore, the saving has the effect of preventing information from being stacked beyond the designated range in the stack area, and therefore preventing the possibility of all the information stored in the second storage means being cleared.

In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P3,
The gaming machine P4, wherein the register whose contents are saved to the specified area by the saving means includes a register used when the arithmetic process executes the second process.

Gaming machine P4 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by any of gaming machines P1 to P3. That is, when the calculation means transitions from a stage in which the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to a stage in which the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, registers including registers used when the calculation means executes the second process are saved to a specified area of the second storage means by the saving means. This allows the registers used by the execution of the second process to be reliably restored to their contents immediately before the execution of the second process, based on the contents saved to the specified area.

Gaming machine P5 is characterized in that in gaming machine P4, the register whose contents are saved to the specified area by the saving means is a register used when the arithmetic process executes the second process.

Gaming machine P5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine P4. That is, when the calculation means shifts from a stage where the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to a stage where the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the registers used when the calculation means executes the second process are saved to a specified area of the second storage means by the saving means. This has the effect of saving only the minimum necessary registers to the specified area, and reliably restoring the contents to those immediately before the second process was executed.

In a gaming machine having a main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means
A calculation means for performing a calculation;
A plurality of registers;
a first storage means for storing in a readable and writable manner first information used when a first process for performing main control of a game is executed by the calculation means;
a second storage means having a storage area different from that of the first storage means and storing second information in a readable and writable manner to be used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the computing means;
a save means for saving contents of some of the plurality of registers to a predetermined area of a second storage means when the calculation means shifts from a stage in which the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to a stage in which the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means;
a return means for restoring the contents of the register saved in the specified area of the second storage means to the corresponding register when the calculation means returns from a stage where the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means to a stage where the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means.

According to the gaming machine Q1, a main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when a first process for mainly controlling a game is executed by a calculation means for performing calculations, first information used for executing the first process is stored in a readable and writable manner in a first storage means. In addition, second information, which has a different storage area from the first storage means and is used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the calculation means, is stored in a readable and writable manner in a second storage means. Then, when the calculation means moves from a stage in which the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to a stage in which the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the contents of some of the multiple registers are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a saving means. On the other hand, when the calculation means returns from a stage in which the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means to a stage in which the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the contents of the registers saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are restored to the corresponding registers by a restoring means. This allows the information stored in the register to be appropriately protected from other processes, as opposed to information used in the process that mainly controls the game. In addition, since only some of the registers are saved to a specified area of the second storage means, the storage capacity required to save the contents of the registers can be kept low, making it possible to reduce the memory capacity and increase the area for storing other information, etc. This has the effect of providing appropriate protection for information used in the main control of the game.

In the gaming machine Q1,
the second storage means includes a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the calculation means, and a working area for storing information used based on an instruction to the calculation means;
The saving means saves the contents of some of the registers to the predetermined area provided in the working area of the second storage means.

Gaming machine Q2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine Q1. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on instructions to the calculation means, and a working area for storing information used based on calculations to the calculation means, and the contents of some registers saved by the saving means are saved to a predetermined area provided in the working area of the second storage means. This has the effect of reducing the capacity required for the stack area and ensuring a large capacity for the working area.

In the gaming machine Q2,
The calculation means includes:
A stack area designation means for designating a range of the stack area in advance;
A gaming machine Q3 is characterized by comprising a memory clearing means for clearing all information stored in at least the second memory means in which the stack area is provided when information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range specified by the stack area designation means.

Gaming machine Q3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine Q2. That is, the calculation means specifies the range of the stack area in advance by the stack area designation means. On the other hand, when information is stacked in the stack area beyond the designated range, at least the information stored in the second storage means in which the stack area is provided is cleared by the memory clearing means. Here, when the calculation means moves from a stage in which the calculation means executes a first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to a stage in which the calculation means executes a second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the contents of some of the registers are saved by the saving means to a working area rather than to the stack area. Therefore, by saving, it is possible to prevent information from being stacked beyond the designated range in the stack area, and therefore it has the effect of suppressing the possibility of all the information stored in the second storage means being cleared.

In any one of gaming machines Q1 to Q3,
The gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that the portion of registers whose contents are saved to the specified area by the saving means includes a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing.

Gaming machine Q4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines Q1 to Q3. That is, some of the registers, including the registers used when the arithmetic processing executes the second process, are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by the saving means when the arithmetic processing transitions from a stage in which the arithmetic means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to a stage in which the arithmetic means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means. This allows the registers used by the execution of the second process to be reliably restored to their contents immediately before the execution of the second process, based on the contents saved to the predetermined area.

Gaming machine Q5 is characterized in that in gaming machine Q4, the part of the registers whose contents are saved to the specified area by the saving means are registers used when the arithmetic process executes the second process.

Gaming machine Q5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine Q4. That is, the registers used when the arithmetic processing executes the second process are saved as part of the registers to a specified area of the second storage means by the saving means when the arithmetic processing transitions from a stage in which the arithmetic means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to a stage in which the arithmetic means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means. This has the effect of saving only the minimum necessary registers to the specified area, and reliably restoring the contents to those immediately before the second process was executed.

In a gaming machine having a main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means
A calculation means for performing a calculation;
A plurality of registers;
a first storage means for storing in a readable and writable manner first information used when a first process for performing main control of a game is executed by the calculation means;
a second storage means having a storage area different from that of the first storage means and storing second information in a readable and writable manner to be used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the computing means;
a save means for saving the contents of the registers to a predetermined area of a second storage means by an individual instruction for each register when the calculation means shifts from a stage where the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to a stage where the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means;
A gaming machine R1 characterized in that it is equipped with a return means for restoring the contents of the register saved in the specified area of the second storage means to the corresponding register when the calculation means returns from a stage where the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means to a stage where the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means.

According to the gaming machine R1, a main control means for controlling the game is provided. In the main control means, when a first process for mainly controlling the game is executed by a calculation means for performing calculations, first information used for executing the first process is stored in a readable and writable manner in a first storage means. In addition, second information, which has a different storage area from the first storage means and is used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the calculation means, is stored in a readable and writable manner in a second storage means. Then, when the calculation means moves from a stage in which the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to a stage in which the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the contents of the registers are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a save means with an individual command for each register. On the other hand, when the calculation means returns from a stage where the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means to a stage where the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the contents of the registers saved in a predetermined area of the second storage means are restored to the corresponding registers by the restoration means. This allows the information stored in these registers to be appropriately protected from other processes, with respect to information used in the process that mainly controls the game. In addition, since the information is saved in a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual command for each register, it is possible to individually specify and save only the registers that need to be saved in order to ensure that the game process that mainly controls the game is not affected by other processes. This has the effect of appropriately protecting the information used in the main control of the game.

In the gaming machine R1,
the second storage means includes a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the calculation means, and a working area for storing information used based on an instruction to the calculation means;
The saving means saves the contents of the register to the predetermined area provided in the working area of the second storage means.

Gaming machine R2 provides the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine R1. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on instructions to the calculation means, and a working area for storing information used based on calculations to the calculation means, and the contents of the register saved by the saving means are saved to a specified area provided in the working area of the second storage means. This has the effect of reducing the capacity required for the stack area and ensuring a large capacity for the working area.

In the gaming machine R2,
The calculation means includes:
A stack area designation means for designating a range of the stack area in advance;
A gaming machine R3 is characterized by comprising a memory clearing means for clearing all information stored in at least the second memory means in which the stack area is provided when information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range specified by the stack area designation means.

Gaming machine R3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine R2. That is, the calculation means specifies the range of the stack area in advance by the stack area specification means. On the other hand, when information is stacked in the stack area beyond the specified range, at least the information stored in the second storage means in which the stack area is provided is cleared by the memory clearing means. Here, when the calculation means moves from a stage in which the calculation means executes a first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to a stage in which the calculation means executes a second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the contents of the register are saved by the saving means to a working area rather than to the stack area. Therefore, by saving, it is possible to prevent information from being stacked beyond the specified range in the stack area, and therefore it has the effect of preventing the possibility of all the information stored in the second storage means being cleared.

In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3,
The gaming machine R4 is characterized in that the register whose contents are saved to the specified area by the saving means includes a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing.

Gaming machine R4 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by any of gaming machines R1 to R3. That is, when the calculation means transitions from a stage in which the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to a stage in which the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, registers including registers used when the calculation means executes the second process are saved to a specified area of the second storage means by the saving means. This allows the registers used by the execution of the second process to be reliably restored to their contents immediately before the execution of the second process, based on the contents saved to the specified area.

Gaming machine R5 is characterized in that in gaming machine R4, the register whose contents are saved to the specified area by the saving means is a register used when the arithmetic process executes the second process.

Gaming machine R5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine R4. That is, when the calculation means shifts from a stage where the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to a stage where the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the registers used when the calculation means executes the second process are saved to a specified area of the second storage means by the saving means. This has the effect of saving only the minimum necessary registers to the specified area, and reliably restoring the contents to those immediately before the second process was executed.

In a gaming machine having a main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means
A calculation means for performing a calculation;
A plurality of registers;
a first storage means for storing in a readable and writable manner first information used when a first process for performing main control of a game is executed by the calculation means;
A second storage means having a different storage area from the first storage means and storing second information in a readable and writable manner to be used when the second process related to the role ratio is executed by the calculation means;
a save means for saving the contents of the register to a predetermined area of a second storage means when the calculation means shifts from a stage in which the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to a stage in which the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means;
The gaming machine S1 is characterized in that it is equipped with a return means for restoring the contents of the register saved in the specified area of the second storage means to the corresponding register when the calculation means returns from a stage where the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means to a stage where the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means.

According to the gaming machine S1, a main control means for controlling the game is provided. In the main control means, when a first process for mainly controlling the game is executed by a calculation means for performing calculations, first information used for executing the first process is stored in a readable and writable manner in a first storage means. In addition, second information, which has a storage area different from that of the first storage means and is used when a second process related to the ratio of game elements is executed by the calculation means, is stored in a readable and writable manner in a second storage means. Then, when the calculation means moves from a stage in which the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to a stage in which the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a saving means. On the other hand, when the calculation means returns from a stage in which the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means to a stage in which the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are restored to the corresponding register by a restoring means. This allows the information stored in this register to be appropriately protected from processing related to the ratio of game features, as opposed to information used in processing that mainly controls the game. This has the effect of providing optimal protection for information used in the main control of the game.

In the gaming machine S1,
The saving means saves the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means in response to a load command or a store command.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine S1, gaming machine S2 has the following effect. That is, since the contents of the register are saved to a specified area of the second storage means by a load command or a store command, the saved location can be fixed to a specified area, compared to when the contents are saved to a stack area.

In the gaming machine S1 or S2,
The saving means saves the contents of some of the plurality of registers to a predetermined area of a second storage means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines S1 and S2, gaming machine S3 has the following effect. That is, since only some of the registers are saved to a specified area of the second storage means, the memory capacity required to save the contents of the registers can be kept low, and the memory capacity can be reduced and the area for storing other information can be increased.

In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S3,
The saving means saves the contents of the registers to a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual command for each register.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the gaming machine S4 has the following effect. That is, since each register is saved to a specified area of the second storage means by an individual command, it is possible to specify and save only the registers that need to be saved in order to ensure that the game process that mainly controls the game is not affected by other processes.

In a gaming machine having a main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means
A calculation means for performing a calculation;
a first storage means for storing in a readable and writable manner first information used when a first process for performing main control of a game is executed by the calculation means;
a second storage means having a storage area different from that of the first storage means and storing second information in a readable and writable manner to be used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the computing means;
A stack pointer,
the second process is executed by a program that is read at a predetermined position in the first process,
The main control means
The gaming machine T1 is characterized in that it is provided with a stack pointer setting means which sets the stack pointer to a fixed value when the calculation means returns from a stage where the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means to a stage where the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means.

According to the gaming machine T1, a main control means for controlling the game is provided. In the main control means, when a first process for mainly controlling the game is executed by a calculation means for performing calculations, first information used for executing the first process is stored in a readable and writable manner in a first storage means. In addition, second information, which has a different storage area from the first storage means and is used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the calculation means, is stored in a readable and writable manner in a second storage means. Here, the second process is executed by a program read at a predetermined position in the first process. Then, when the calculation means returns from a stage in which the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means to a stage in which the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the stack pointer is set to a fixed value by the stack pointer setting means. Since the second process is a program read at a predetermined position in the first process, when the execution of the second process is started, the number of pieces of information stacked in the first process is always constant. Therefore, by simply setting a fixed value based on the number of stacked pieces of information in the stack pointer when returning from the stage of executing the second process to the stage of executing the first process, the stacked information can be reliably read out in the first process that is executed again. Therefore, when the calculation means transitions from the stage of executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to the stage of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, there is no need to save the value of the stack pointer that points to the stack area provided in the first storage means used in the first process, and therefore an increase in memory capacity due to the saving can be suppressed. This has the effect of favorably protecting the information used in the main control of the game.

In the gaming machine T1,
the calculation means executes a main process, a loop process executed in the main process, and a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined position in the loop process when a timer interrupt which occurs at predetermined time intervals is detected;
The gaming machine T2 is characterized in that the first process and the second process are processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

Gaming machine T2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine T1. That is, a main process, a loop process executed in the main process, and a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined position in the loop process when a timer interrupt that occurs at a predetermined time interval is detected are executed by the calculation means. The first process and the second process are executed in the timer interrupt process. As a result, when the program read at a predetermined position in the first process starts executing the second process, the number of pieces of information stacked in the first process is always a fixed number. Therefore, by simply setting a fixed value based on that fixed number in the stack pointer when returning from the stage of executing the second process to the stage of executing the first process, the stacked information can be reliably read in the first process that is executed again.

In a gaming machine having a main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means
A calculation means for performing a calculation;
A plurality of registers;
a first storage means for storing in a readable and writable manner first information used when a first process for performing main control of a game is executed by the calculation means;
a second storage means having a storage area different from that of the first storage means and storing second information in a readable and writable manner to be used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the computing means;
a first fixed value storage means for storing a fixed value in a predetermined register when the calculation means shifts from a stage in which the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to a stage in which the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means;
The gaming machine U1 is characterized in that it is equipped with a second fixed value storage means for storing the fixed value in the specified register when the calculation means returns from a stage in which the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means to a stage in which the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means.

According to the gaming machine U1, a main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when a first process for mainly controlling a game is executed by a calculation means for performing calculations, first information used for executing the first process is stored in a readable and writable manner in a first storage means. In addition, second information, which has a different storage area from the first storage means and is used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the calculation means, is stored in a readable and writable manner in a second storage means. Then, when the calculation means moves from a stage in which the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to a stage in which the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, a fixed value is stored in a predetermined register by the first fixed value storage means. On the other hand, when the calculation means returns from a stage in which the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means to a stage in which the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the fixed value is stored by the second fixed value storage means in the predetermined register in which the fixed value is stored by the first fixed value storage means. This allows the contents of the register to appear identical at a glance when the calculation means transitions from a stage in which the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to a stage in which the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, and when the calculation means transitions from a stage in which the calculation means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means to a stage in which the calculation means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means. This ensures that the first process, which mainly controls the game, is not affected by the second process executed in between. This has the effect of providing optimal protection for the information used in the main control of the game.

In the gaming machine U1,
The gaming machine U2 is characterized in that the fixed value is 0.

The gaming machine U2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1. That is, when the calculation means moves from a stage where the calculation means executes a first process using the first information stored in the first storage means to a stage where the calculation means executes a second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, and when the calculation means moves from a stage where the calculation means executes a second process using the second information stored in the second storage means to a stage where the calculation means executes a first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, 0 is stored as a fixed value in a predetermined register. This allows the user to know at a glance that the predetermined register has been cleared to 0.
(Challenge 3)
The gaming machines V1 to V9, W1 to W7, and X1 to X6 shown below have been made to solve the following problems.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which gaming media are shot by a shooting means into a gaming area provided with multiple winning slots, and when the gaming media enters one of the winning slots, a predetermined number of gaming media is paid out to the player for the winning slot. (For example, JP 2003-340046 A).

Now, some fraudsters make it difficult for gaming media to enter designated winning slots, or conversely, they try to make it easier for gaming media to enter designated winning slots. However, there has been insufficient measures to detect this type of fraud.

The present technical idea has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that is capable of appropriately detecting fraudulent activity.
(Means and Effects 3)
A gaming area having a plurality of winning slots;
A launching means for launching a gaming medium into the gaming area;
a winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings, for detecting the winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
a payout means for, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shot means has won in any winning port, paying out a predetermined number of game media to the winning port in which the game medium has won,
a game performance information display means for displaying game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed on the gaming machine;
A gaming machine V1 characterized by comprising a confirmation display means for displaying a confirmation display for a predetermined period of time to confirm whether or not normal display is possible on the game performance information display means.

According to the gaming machine V1, a launching means launches gaming media into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning slots. Each winning slot is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the gaming media. When the winning detection means detects that the gaming media launched by the launching means has won one of the winning slots, a predetermined number of gaming media are paid out by the payout means to the winning slot in which the gaming media won. Game performance information showing the performance of a game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on a gaming performance information display means. A confirmation display is performed for a predetermined period of time on the gaming performance display means to confirm whether normal display is possible. This confirmation display allows confirmation of whether normal display is possible on the gaming performance display means, so that it is possible to determine whether the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance display means is normal. This allows the presence or absence of fraudulent activity to be determined based on the gaming performance information determined to be normal, so that there is an effect that fraudulent activity can be preferably discovered.

In the gaming machine V1,
The confirmation display means is configured to cause the game performance information display means to display the confirmation display for a predetermined period of time when the power is turned on.

Gaming machine V2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine V1. That is, when the power is turned on, the confirmation display means performs a confirmation display for a predetermined period of time to confirm whether normal display is possible on the gaming performance display means. This makes it possible to determine whether the display on the gaming performance display means is normal or not each time the power is turned on, and therefore has the effect of making it possible to determine whether or not fraud has occurred based on gaming performance information that is determined to be normal with greater accuracy.

In the gaming machine V1,
The gaming machine V3 is characterized in that the confirmation display means causes the game performance information display means to display the confirmation display for a predetermined period of time when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operating means.

Gaming machine V3 provides the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine V1. That is, when a specified operation is performed on a specified operating means, a confirmation display is performed by the confirmation display means for a specified period of time to confirm whether or not normal display is possible on the gaming performance display means. As a result, by performing a specified operation on the specified operating means, it is possible to determine whether or not the display on the gaming performance display means is normal. Therefore, since the determination can be made by performing a specified operation on the specified operating means when making that determination, there is an effect that fraudulent activity can be preferably discovered.

In the gaming machine V1,
a new launch identification means for identifying that the gaming machine is in a new launch period;
The gaming machine V4 is characterized in that, when it is the new launch period, the confirmation display means causes the game performance information display means to display the confirmation display for a predetermined period of time.

Gaming machine V4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine V1. That is, when the identification means identifies that the gaming machine is in a new launch period, the confirmation display means performs a confirmation display for a predetermined period of time to confirm whether normal display is possible on the gaming performance display means. This makes it possible to determine whether the display on the gaming performance display means is normal at least when the gaming machine is in a new launch period. This has the effect of reducing the shipment of gaming machines that cannot display normally on the gaming performance display means.

In any one of gaming machines V1 to V4,
A gaming machine V5 characterized by having a stopping means for stopping the progress of the game during the specified time.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines V1 to V4, gaming machine V5 has the effect of preventing the game from progressing without being able to determine whether or not there is fraudulent activity while the gaming performance information display means is not displayed because the game performance display means is displaying the confirmation display and the game progress is stopped by the stop means during the specified period during which the confirmation display means is causing the gaming performance information display means to display the confirmation display.

In any one of gaming machines V1 to V4,
A gaming machine V6 characterized in that the game continues to progress during the specified time.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines V1 to V4, gaming machine V6 has the effect of preventing players from having to wait by displaying the confirmation display on the gaming performance information display means since game progress continues during the specified period during which the confirmation display means causes the gaming performance information display means to display the confirmation display.

In any one of gaming machines V1 to V6,
The game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment indicators each composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking or extinguishing each segment of each segment indicator,
The gaming machine V7 is characterized in that the confirmation display is a display in which all segments of the multiple segment displays are lit up.

Gaming machine V7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines V1 to V6. That is, the gaming performance information display means has a plurality of segment displays made up of a plurality of segments, and displays information on each segment display by turning on, blinking, or turning off each individual segment. The confirmation display is a display in which all segments of the plurality of segment displays are turned on. This has the effect of making it possible to check whether all segments can be turned on normally, and easily determining whether the display of the gaming performance information display means is performed normally.

In any one of gaming machines V1 to V6,
The game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment indicators each composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking or extinguishing each segment of each segment indicator,
The gaming machine V8 is characterized in that the confirmation display is a display in which all segments of the multiple segment displays flash.

Gaming machine V8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of gaming machines V1 to V6. That is, the gaming performance information display means has a plurality of segment displays made up of a plurality of segments, and displays information on each segment display by turning on, blinking, or turning off each individual segment. The confirmation display is a display in which all segments of the plurality of segment displays are blinked. This has the effect of making it possible to check whether all segments can be turned on and off normally, and easily determining whether the display of the gaming performance information display means is performed normally.

Gaming machine V9 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines V1 to V8, the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means is a base value that is the number of gaming media paid out when the gaming state is normal, relative to the number of gaming media released into the gaming area being 100.

Gaming machine V9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of gaming machines V1 to V8. That is, the gaming performance information display means displays, as gaming performance information, a base value that is the number of gaming media paid out when the gaming state is normal, relative to the number of gaming media released into the gaming area being 100. This has the effect of making it easier to detect fraudulent behavior.

A gaming area having a plurality of winning slots;
A launching means for launching a gaming medium into the gaming area;
a winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings, for detecting the winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
a payout means for, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shot means has won in any winning port, paying out a predetermined number of game media to the winning port in which the game medium has won,
a game performance information display means for displaying game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed on the gaming machine;
A new launch identification means for identifying that the gaming machine is in a new launch period;
A gaming machine W1 characterized by comprising a special display mode display means for displaying the game performance information display means in a special display mode different from normal display mode when the new launch identification means identifies that the period is a new launch period.

According to the gaming machine W1, a launching means launches gaming media into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning slots. Each winning slot is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the gaming media. When the winning detection means detects that the gaming media launched by the launching means has won one of the winning slots, a predetermined number of gaming media are paid out by the payout means to the winning slot where the gaming media won. Game performance information showing the performance of a game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on the gaming performance information display means. On the other hand, when the new start-up identification means identifies that the gaming machine is in a new start-up period, the special display mode display means displays the gaming performance information display means in a special display mode different from normal times. This has the effect of showing that the gaming performance information display means is currently in a new start-up period and showing that it does not have information that can be used to determine fraudulent activity from the gaming performance information display means displayed in the special display mode.

In the gaming machine W1,
The game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment indicators each composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking or turning off each segment of each segment indicator,
The special display mode is a display mode in which all segments of the plurality of segment displays are lit or flashing.

Gaming machine W2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine W1. That is, the gaming performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment displays made up of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking or turning off each segment of each segment display. The special display mode is a display mode in which all segments of the plurality of segment displays are lit or blinking. This has the effect that the gaming performance information display means can easily show that the new start-up period is currently in progress by lighting or blinking all segments of the plurality of segment displays.

In gaming machine W1 or W2,
The game performance information display means includes:
A plurality of segment displays each composed of a plurality of segments are provided, and information is displayed by turning on, blinking or turning off each segment of each segment display.
some of the segment displays are used to display the gaming performance information, and other segment displays are used to display identification information for identifying a type of the gaming performance information displayed on the some of the segment displays;
The special display mode is a display mode in which the other segment display device lights up or flashes information different from identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information.

Gaming machine W3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine W1 or W2. That is, the gaming performance information display means has a plurality of segment displays each composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing each segment of each segment display. Some of the segment displays are used to display gaming performance information, and other segment displays are used to display identification information for identifying the type of gaming performance information displayed on some of the segment displays. The special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the identification information for identifying the type of gaming performance information is lit or blinked on the other segment displays. This has the effect of easily indicating that the new start-up period is currently in progress when information different from the identification information for identifying the type of gaming performance information is lit or blinked on the other segment displays of the gaming performance information display means.

In the gaming machine W3,
The special display mode is a display mode in which gaming performance information indicating gaming performance measured in real time is displayed by lighting or flashing on some of the segment displays of the gaming machine W4.

Gaming machine W4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine W3. That is, the special display mode is a display mode in which gaming performance information indicating gaming performance measured in real time is lit or flashed on some segment displays. This has the effect that although the regular gaming performance of the gaming machine cannot be measured because it is in the new launch period, information indicating the gaming performance measured in real time can be displayed for reference.

The game performance information display means includes:
A plurality of segment displays each composed of a plurality of segments are provided, and information is displayed by turning on, blinking, or turning off each segment of each segment display.
some of the segment displays are used to display the gaming performance information, and other segment displays are used to display identification information for identifying a type of the gaming performance information displayed on the some of the segment displays;
The special display mode is a display mode in which identification information for identifying the type of the gaming performance information is flashed on the other segment display of the gaming machine W5.

Gaming machine W5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine W1 or W2. That is, the gaming performance information display means has a plurality of segment displays made up of a plurality of segments, and displays information on each segment display by turning on, blinking, or turning off each segment. Some of the segment displays are used to display gaming performance information, and other segment displays are used to display identification information for identifying the type of gaming performance information displayed on some of the segment displays. The special display mode is a display mode in which the identification information for identifying the type of gaming performance information is displayed in a blinking manner on the other segment displays. This has the effect of easily indicating that the new start-up period is currently in progress when the identification information for identifying the type of gaming performance information is displayed in a blinking manner on the other segment displays of the gaming performance information display means.

In the gaming machine W5,
The special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the gaming performance information is lit up on some of the segment displays of the gaming machine W6.

Gaming machine W6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine W5. That is, the special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the gaming performance information is lit up on some of the segment displays. This has the effect of clearly indicating that the regular gaming performance of the gaming machine cannot be measured because it is in the new launch period.

Gaming machine W7 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines W1 to W6, the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means is a base value that is the number of gaming media paid out when the gaming state is normal, relative to the number of gaming media released into the gaming area being 100.

Gaming machine W7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines W1 to W6. That is, the gaming performance information display means displays, as gaming performance information, a base value that is the number of gaming media paid out when the gaming state is normal, relative to the number of gaming media released into the gaming area being 100. This has the effect of making it easier to detect fraudulent behavior.

A gaming area having a plurality of winning slots;
A launching means for launching a gaming medium into the gaming area;
a winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings, for detecting the winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
a payout means for, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shot means has won in any winning port, paying out a predetermined number of game media to the winning port in which the game medium has won,
a game performance information acquiring means for acquiring game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed on the gaming machine during each predetermined period;
a gaming performance information storage means for storing gaming performance information acquired by the gaming performance acquisition means for each of a plurality of predetermined periods;
and a gaming performance information display means for displaying gaming performance information acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods stored in the gaming performance information storage means.

According to the gaming machine X1, a gaming medium is launched by a launching means into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning slots. Each winning slot is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the gaming medium. Then, when the winning detection means detects that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won in any winning slot, a predetermined number of gaming media is paid out by a payout means to the winning slot in which the gaming medium won. Here, for each predetermined period, gaming performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine during the predetermined period is acquired by a gaming performance information acquisition means, and each of the gaming performance information is stored in a gaming performance information storage means. Then, the gaming performance information stored in the gaming performance information storage means and acquired for the plurality of predetermined periods is displayed on a gaming performance information display means. As a result, the gaming performance information for the plurality of predetermined periods is displayed, so that it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity, and it is also possible to predict to a certain extent the time when the fraudulent activity occurred. This has the effect of making it easier to detect fraudulent activity.

In the gaming machine X1,
The gaming performance acquisition means acquires gaming performance information indicating the performance of a game executed on the gaming machine in real time during the predetermined period,
The gaming performance information storage means stores the gaming performance information acquired in real time,
The gaming machine X2 is characterized in that the game performance information display means displays the game performance information acquired in real time together with game performance information acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods stored in the game performance information storage means.

Gaming machine X2 achieves the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine X1. That is, gaming performance information indicating the performance of a game executed on the gaming machine in real time during a predetermined period is acquired by the gaming performance acquisition means, and the gaming performance information acquired in real time is stored in the gaming performance information storage means. Then, the gaming performance information acquired in real time is displayed on the gaming performance information display means together with the gaming performance information acquired for multiple predetermined periods stored in the gaming performance information storage means. This has the effect of making it possible to more accurately determine whether or not fraud has occurred, since the gaming performance information acquired in real time is also displayed.

In the gaming machine X1,
The gaming performance information storage means includes:
a first storage area for storing gaming performance information for a previous predetermined period;
A second storage area for storing game performance information for a predetermined period two periods ago,
The gaming machine X3 is characterized in that, when the specified period has elapsed, the gaming performance information stored in the first memory area is shifted to the second memory area, and gaming performance information indicating the performance of the game executed on the gaming machine during the specified period acquired by the gaming performance acquisition means is stored in the first memory area.

The gaming machine X3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X1. That is, the gaming performance information storage means is provided with at least a first storage area for storing gaming performance information for the previous predetermined period and a second storage area for storing gaming performance information for the predetermined period before the previous one. Then, when the predetermined period has elapsed, the gaming performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and gaming performance information indicating the performance of the game executed on the gaming machine during the predetermined period acquired by the gaming performance acquisition means is stored in the gaming performance information storage means and displayed on the gaming performance information display means every time the predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily determine whether or not a fraudulent act has occurred based on the new gaming performance information.

In the gaming machine X2,
The gaming performance information storage means includes:
a 0th storage area for storing, by overwriting, the gaming performance information acquired in real time during the predetermined period by the gaming performance acquisition means;
a first storage area for storing gaming performance information for a previous predetermined period;
A second storage area for storing game performance information for a predetermined period two periods ago,
A gaming machine X4 characterized in that, when the specified period has elapsed, the gaming performance information stored in the first memory area is shifted to the second memory area, and the gaming performance information stored in the zeroth memory area is shifted to the eleventh memory area.

According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming performance information storage means is provided with at least a 0th storage area that stores the gaming performance information acquired in real time during a predetermined period by the gaming performance acquisition means by overwriting, a first storage area that stores the gaming performance information in the previous predetermined period, and a second storage area that stores the gaming performance information in the predetermined period before last. Then, when the predetermined period has elapsed, the gaming performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the gaming performance information stored in the 0th storage area is shifted to the first storage area. As a result, each time the predetermined period has elapsed, the newly acquired gaming performance information is stored in the gaming performance information storage means in place of the oldest acquired gaming performance information, and is displayed on the gaming performance information display means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily determine whether or not a fraudulent act has occurred based on the new gaming performance information. Furthermore, when a predetermined period has passed, the gaming performance information stored in the 0th memory area becomes the gaming performance information for that predetermined period. By shifting this directly to the first memory area, it is possible to easily store the gaming performance information for the previous predetermined period in the first memory area.

In gaming machine X3 or X4,
The gaming machine X5 is characterized by comprising a shift processing means for executing the shifting of gaming performance information between each storage area in the gaming performance information storage means using an LDIR command.

Gaming machine X5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine X3 or X4. That is, the shift processing means shifts the gaming performance information between the storage areas in the gaming performance information storage means in response to an LDIR command. This has the effect of easily executing the shift process with a single command.

Gaming machine X6 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines X1 to X5, the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means is a base value that is the number of gaming media paid out when the gaming state is normal, relative to the number of gaming media released into the gaming area being 100.

Gaming machine X6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of gaming machines X1 to X5. That is, the gaming performance information display means displays, as gaming performance information, a base value that is the number of gaming media paid out when the gaming state is normal, relative to the number of gaming media released into the gaming area being 100. This has the effect of making it possible to preferably detect fraudulent behavior.

(Challenge 4)
The gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, E2, Ka1, Ka2, and Ki1 to Ki3 shown below have been made to solve the following problems.

There are conventional gaming machines in which gaming media are fired by a firing means into a gaming area provided with multiple winning slots, and when the gaming media lands in one of the winning slots, a predetermined number of gaming media is paid out to the player for the winning slot. (For example, see JP 2003-340046 A.)

There are people who cheat in these types of games. However, there have been insufficient measures to curb such cheating.

This technical idea was conceived in light of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively prevent fraudulent activity.

(Means and Effects 4)
A gaming area having a plurality of winning slots;
A launching means for launching a gaming medium into the gaming area;
a winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings, for detecting the winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
a payout means for, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium discharged by the discharge means has won in any winning port, paying out a predetermined number of game media to the winning port in which the game medium has won,
a game performance information display means capable of switching between displaying game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed on the gaming machine and information other than the game performance information;
The game performance information display means includes:
A first display means for displaying the gaming performance information or information other than the gaming performance information;
a second display means for displaying identification information indicating the display content to be displayed on the first display means;
and a means for making the display of the second display means non-display when information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means.

According to the gaming machine A1, a gaming medium is launched by a launching means into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning slots. Each winning slot is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the gaming medium. When the winning detection means detects that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won one of the winning slots, a predetermined number of gaming media are paid out by a payout means to the winning slot in which the gaming medium won. Game performance information showing the performance of a game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on a game performance information display means. This has the effect of making it possible to preferably discover fraudulent acts from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. In addition, by switching the display, the game performance information display means also displays information other than the game performance information. Here, the game performance information or information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means of the game performance information display means, and identification information showing the display content displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means. When information other than gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is made non-display. This has the effect of making it clear that the display content displayed on the first display means is information other than gaming performance information by seeing that the display on the second display means is non-display.

In the gaming machine A1,
When a start condition is satisfied, a predetermined judgment is made, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player.
A modification means for modifying the probability of a predetermined result occurring in the predetermined judgment among a plurality of levels;
and a display control means for switching the game performance information display means to display the level of the probability as information other than the game performance information when the probability of achieving the specified result is changed among a plurality of levels by the changing means, and causing the game performance information display means to display the level of the probability as information other than the game performance information.

Gaming machine A2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine A1. That is, this gaming machine makes a predetermined judgment when a starting condition is met, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, grants a predetermined gaming value to the player, and the probability of the predetermined result in the predetermined judgment is changed among multiple levels by the change means. Then, when the change means changes the probability of the predetermined result in the predetermined judgment, the display of the gaming performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the probability level is displayed as information other than the gaming performance information. Then, when the probability level is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is made non-display. This has the effect of making it clear that the display content displayed on the first display means is the probability level changed by the change means by seeing that the display of the second display means is non-display.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2,
An error detection means for detecting an error;
an error history storage means for storing a history of the types of errors detected by the error detection means;
an error history display receiving means for receiving a display of the history of the error types;
a display control means for switching the gaming performance information display means when the error history display accepting means accepts the display of the history, and causing the gaming performance information display means to display the history of the error type as information other than the gaming performance information based on the memory of the error history memory means.

Gaming machine A3 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine A1 or A2. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. Also, when the error history display reception means receives the display of the error type history, the display control means switches the gaming performance information display means, and the error type history is displayed on the gaming performance information display means as information other than gaming performance information based on the storage in the error history storage means. Then, when the error type history is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is made non-display. This has the effect of making it clear that the display content displayed on the first display means is the error type history by seeing that the display on the second display means is non-display.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3,
the second display means includes a segment display device composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking or turning off each segment of the segment display device;
The means for making the display of the second display means non-display is characterized in that all segments of a segment display are turned off.

Gaming machine A4 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by any of gaming machines A1 to A3. That is, the second display means is equipped with a segment display device made up of multiple segments, and information is displayed by turning on, blinking, or turning off each segment on the segment display device. Then, when information other than game performance information is displayed on the first display means, all segments of the segment display device of the second display means are turned off, and the display of the second display means is made non-display. This has the effect of making it possible to make the display non-display with simple control.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4,
the first display means is configured to be capable of displaying a plurality of digits,
The gaming machine includes:
Gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, when the non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, some of the multiple digits are used to display the level of the probability, and the remaining digits are displayed in a display mode that is not displayed when displaying the game performance information.

Gaming machine A5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines A1 to A4. That is, the first display means is configured to be able to display multiple digits, and when non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, some of the multiple digits are used to display the non-game performance information, and the remaining digits are displayed in a display mode that is not displayed when displaying game performance information. This has the effect of making it possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information, based on the display content of the remaining digits on the first display means.

In the gaming machine A5,
A gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, when the gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, it is provided with a means for displaying the gaming performance information using all of the plurality of digits.

Gaming machine A6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine A5. That is, when gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the gaming performance information is displayed using all of the multiple digits. This has the effect of making it possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or non-gaming performance information, depending on the display content of the remaining digits.

In the gaming machine A5 or A6,
The means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode that does not display them in the display of the game performance information is characterized in that the means for displaying the remaining digits is non-display.

Gaming machine A7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine A5 or A6. That is, when non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, some of the multiple digits are used to display the non-game performance information, and the remaining digits are hidden. This has the effect of making it possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information by hiding the remaining digits.

In the gaming machine A5 or A6,
The means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the gaming performance information is characterized in that the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode.

Gaming machine A8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine A5 or A6. That is, when non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, some of the multiple digits are used to display the probability level, and the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode. This has the effect of making it possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information, by displaying the remaining digits in a fixed predetermined display mode.

In the gaming machine A5 or A6,
The means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode not displayed in the display of the game performance information is characterized in that the remaining digits are displayed in a flashing manner in a predetermined display mode.

Gaming machine A9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine A5 or A6. That is, when non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, some of the multiple digits are used to display the probability level, and the remaining digits are displayed in a flashing manner in a predetermined display mode. This has the effect of making it possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information, by displaying the remaining digits in a flashing manner in a predetermined display mode.

A gaming area having a plurality of winning slots;
A launching means for launching a gaming medium into the gaming area;
a winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings, for detecting the winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
a payout means for, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium discharged by the discharge means has won in any winning port, paying out a predetermined number of game media to the winning port in which the game medium has won,
a game performance information display means capable of switching between displaying game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed on the gaming machine and information other than the game performance information;
The game performance information display means includes:
A first display means for displaying the gaming performance information or information other than the gaming performance information;
a second display means for displaying identification information indicating the display content to be displayed on the first display means,
The first display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of digits,
The gaming machine includes:
A gaming machine I1 is characterized in that, when the non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, a part of the plurality of digits is used to display the level of the probability, and the remaining digits are displayed in a display mode that is not displayed when displaying the game performance information.

According to the gaming machine I1, a game medium is launched by a launching means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning slots. Each winning slot is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. When the winning detection means detects that the game medium launched by the launching means has won one of the winning slots, a predetermined number of game media are paid out by a payout means to the winning slot in which the game medium won. Game performance information showing the performance of a game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on a game performance information display means. This has the effect of making it possible to preferably discover fraudulent acts from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. In addition, by switching the display, the game performance information display means also displays information other than the game performance information. Here, the game performance information or information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means of the game performance information display means, and identification information showing the display content displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means. The first display means is configured to be capable of displaying multiple digits, and when non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, some of the multiple digits are used to display the non-game performance information, and the remaining digits are displayed in a display mode that is not displayed when displaying the game performance information. This has the effect of making it possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information, depending on the display content of the remaining digits on the first display means.

In the gaming machine I1,
A gaming machine I2 is characterized in that it comprises a means for displaying the gaming performance information using all of the plurality of digits when the gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means.

Gaming machine I2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine I1. That is, when gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the gaming performance information is displayed using all of the multiple digits. This has the effect of making it possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or non-gaming performance information, depending on the display content of the remaining digits.

In the gaming machine (I) 1 or (I) 2,
When a start condition is satisfied, a predetermined judgment is made, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player.
A modification means for modifying the probability of a predetermined result occurring in the predetermined judgment among a plurality of levels;
and a display control means for switching the game performance information display means to display the level of the probability as information other than the game performance information on the game performance information display means when the probability of achieving the specified result is changed among a plurality of levels by the changing means.

Gaming machine I3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine I1 or I2. That is, this gaming machine performs a predetermined judgment when a starting condition is met, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, grants a predetermined gaming value to the player, and the probability of the predetermined result in the predetermined judgment is changed among multiple levels by the change means. Then, when the probability of the predetermined result in the predetermined judgment is changed by the change means, the display of the gaming performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the probability level is displayed as information other than gaming performance information. Then, when the probability level is displayed on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the multiple digits, and the remaining digits are displayed in a display mode that is not displayed when displaying the gaming performance information. This has the effect of making it possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or a probability level based on the display content of the remaining digits on the first display means.

In any one of gaming machines I1 to I3,
An error detection means for detecting an error;
an error history storage means for storing a history of the types of errors detected by the error detection means;
an error history display receiving means for receiving a display of the history of the error types;
and a display control means for switching the gaming performance information display means to display the history of the error type as information other than the gaming performance information based on the memory of the error history memory means when the error history display receiving means accepts the display of the history.

Gaming machine I4 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by any of gaming machines I1 to I3. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. When the error history display reception means receives the display of the history of the error type, the display control means switches the gaming performance information display means, and the history of the error type is displayed on the gaming performance information display means as information other than gaming performance information based on the storage in the error history storage means. When the history of the error type is displayed on the first display means, the history of the error type is displayed using some of the multiple digits, and the remaining digits are displayed in a display mode that is not displayed when displaying the gaming performance information. This has the effect of making it possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or the history of the error type, based on the display content of the remaining digits on the first display means.

In any one of gaming machines I1 to I4,
The means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode that does not display them in the display of the game performance information is characterized in that the means for displaying the remaining digits is non-display.

Gaming machine I5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines I1 to I4. That is, when non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, some of the multiple digits are used to display the non-game performance information, and the remaining digits are hidden. This has the effect of making it possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information by hiding the remaining digits.

In any one of gaming machines I1 to I4,
The means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the game performance information displays the remaining digits in a fixed manner in a predetermined display mode.

Gaming machine I6 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by any of gaming machines I1 to I4. That is, when non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, some of the multiple digits are used to display the probability level, and the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode. This has the effect of making it possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information, by displaying the remaining digits in a fixed predetermined display mode.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I4,
The means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode not used in the display of the game performance information is characterized in that the remaining digits are displayed in a flashing manner in a predetermined display mode.

Gaming machine I7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines I1 to I4. That is, when non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, some of the multiple digits are used to display the probability level, and the remaining digits are displayed in a flashing manner in a predetermined display mode. This has the effect of making it possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information, by displaying the remaining digits in a flashing manner in a predetermined display mode.

A gaming area having a plurality of winning slots;
A launching means for launching a gaming medium into the gaming area;
a winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings, for detecting the winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
a payout means for, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium discharged by the discharge means has won in any winning port, paying out a predetermined number of game media to the winning port in which the game medium has won,
a game performance information display means capable of switching between displaying game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed on the gaming machine and information other than the game performance information;
The game performance information display means includes:
A first display means for displaying the gaming performance information or information other than the gaming performance information;
a second display means for displaying identification information indicating the display content to be displayed on the first display means;
and when information other than the gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, means for displaying on the second display means in a display mode that is not displayed when the first display means displays the gaming performance information.

According to the gaming machine U1, a launching means launches a gaming medium into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning slots. Each winning slot is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the gaming medium. When the winning detection means detects that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won one of the winning slots, a predetermined number of gaming media are paid out by the payout means to the winning slot in which the gaming medium won. Game performance information showing the performance of a game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. This has the effect of making it possible to preferably discover fraudulent acts from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. In addition, by switching the display, the game performance information display means also displays information other than the game performance information. Here, the game performance information or information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means of the game performance information display means, and the identification information showing the display content displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means. When information other than gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode that is not displayed when gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means. This has the effect of making it possible to clearly understand, by looking at the display on the second display means, whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or information other than gaming performance information.

In the gaming machine U1,
When a start condition is satisfied, a predetermined judgment is made, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player.
A modification means for modifying the probability of a predetermined result occurring in the predetermined judgment among a plurality of levels;
and a display control means for switching the game performance information display means to display the level of the probability as information other than the game performance information when the probability of achieving the specified result is changed among a plurality of levels by the changing means, and causing the game performance information display means to display the level of the probability as information other than the game performance information.

Gaming machine C2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine C1. That is, this gaming machine makes a predetermined judgment when a starting condition is met, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, grants a predetermined gaming value to the player, and the probability of the predetermined result in the predetermined judgment is changed among multiple levels by the change means. Then, when the change means changes the probability of the predetermined result in the predetermined judgment, the display control means switches the display of the gaming performance information display means, and the probability level is displayed as information other than gaming performance information. Then, when the probability level is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is performed in a display mode that is not displayed when the first display means displays gaming performance information. This has the effect of making it possible to clearly understand, by looking at the display of the second display means, whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or the probability level changed by the change means.

In the gaming machine U1 or U2,
An error detection means for detecting an error;
an error history storage means for storing a history of the types of errors detected by the error detection means;
an error history display receiving means for receiving a display of the history of the error types;
a display control means for switching the gaming performance information display means when the error history display accepting means accepts the display of the history, and causing the gaming performance information display means to display the history of the error type as information other than the gaming performance information based on the memory of the error history memory means.

Gaming machine C3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine C1 or C2. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. Also, when the error history display reception means receives the display of the error type history, the display control means switches the gaming performance information display means, and the error type history is displayed on the gaming performance information display means as information other than gaming performance information based on the storage in the error history storage means. Then, when the error type history is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode that is not displayed when gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means. This has the effect of making it possible to clearly understand whether the display content displayed on the first display means is gaming performance information or error type history by looking at the display of the second display means.

In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U3,
When information other than the gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the means for displaying the second display means in a display mode that is not displayed when the first display means displays the gaming performance information fixes the display of the second display means in a predetermined display mode.

Gaming machine C4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines C1 to C3. That is, when non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is fixed in a predetermined display mode. This has the effect of making it possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information.

In any of the gaming machines U1 to U3,
When information other than game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the means for displaying the second display means in a display mode that is not displayed when the first display means displays the game performance information causes the display of the second display means to flash in a predetermined display mode.

Gaming machine C5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines C1 to C3. That is, when non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means flashes in a predetermined display mode. This has the effect of making it possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information.

A gaming area having a plurality of winning slots;
A launching means for launching a gaming medium into the gaming area;
a winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings, for detecting the winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
a payout means for, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium discharged by the discharge means has won in any winning port, paying out a predetermined number of game media to the winning port in which the game medium has won,
Game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed on the gaming machine;
An error detection means for detecting an error;
an error history storage means for storing a history of the types of errors detected by the error detection means;
an error history display receiving means for receiving a display of the history of the error types;
and a display control means for switching the game performance information display means when the error history display accepting means accepts the display of the history, and displaying the history of the error type on the game performance information display means based on the memory of the error history memory means.

According to the gaming machine E1, a launching means launches a gaming medium into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning slots. Each winning slot is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the gaming medium. When the winning detection means detects that the gaming medium launched by the launching means has won one of the winning slots, a predetermined number of gaming media are paid out by the payout means to the winning slot in which the gaming medium won. Game performance information showing the performance of a game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. This has the effect of making it possible to preferably discover fraudulent acts from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. In addition, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. When the display of the error type history is accepted by the error history display acceptance means, the display control means switches the game performance information display means, and the error type history is displayed on the game performance information display means based on the memory of the error history storage means. This has the effect that a single game performance information display means can display the history of error types, making it possible to ideally detect fraudulent behavior from the history of error types.

In the gaming machine E1,
The display control means continues to display the game performance information on the game performance information display means when an error is detected by the error detection means.

Gaming machine E2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine E1. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the display control means continues to display the gaming performance information on the gaming performance information display means. Therefore, even if a cheater intentionally causes an error, the cheating can be reliably detected from the gaming performance information that continues to be displayed on the gaming performance information display means.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2,
The display control means, when the error history display accepting means has finished accepting the display of the history, switches the game performance information display means to display the game performance information on the game performance information display means.

Gaming machine E3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines E1 or E2. That is, when the error history display acceptance means finishes accepting the display of the error type history, the display control means switches the gaming performance information display means, and the gaming performance information is displayed again on the gaming performance information display means. As a result, even if the error type history has once been displayed on the gaming performance information display means, the gaming performance information can be displayed again, so that there is an effect that fraudulent activity can be reliably detected from the gaming performance information.

A gaming area having a plurality of winning slots;
A launching means for launching a gaming medium into the gaming area;
a winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings, for detecting the winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
a payout means for, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shot means has won in any of the winning openings, paying out a predetermined number of game media to the winning opening in which the game medium has won;
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined judgment when a start condition is satisfied, and awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when the judgment is a predetermined result,
A storage means for storing information related to a plurality of pieces of game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed on the gaming machine;
an output means for outputting information relating to game performance information based on the information stored in the storage means;
A modification means for modifying the probability of a predetermined result occurring in the predetermined judgment among a plurality of levels;
Gaming machine O1 is characterized by comprising a memory control means which, when the probability is changed by the change means, erases information regarding game performance information that is affected by the probability from the information stored in the memory means, and retains information regarding game performance information that is not affected by the probability.

According to the gaming machine O1, a launching means launches gaming media into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning slots. Each winning slot is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the gaming media. When the winning detection means detects that the gaming media launched by the launching means has won one of the winning slots, a predetermined number of gaming media are paid out by a payout means to the winning slot in which the gaming media won. Information on a plurality of game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is stored in a storage means and output by an output means. This has the effect of making it possible to preferably detect fraudulent acts from the information on the game performance information output by the output means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined judgment when a starting condition is met, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player, and the probability of the predetermined result being obtained in the predetermined judgment is changed among a plurality of levels by a change means. Then, when the change means changes the probability of a predetermined result being obtained in a predetermined judgment, the memory control means erases the information stored in the memory means that is related to game performance information that is affected by the probability, and retains the information related to game performance information that is not affected by the probability. Therefore, the information related to game performance information that is affected by the probability is stored in the memory means at the newly set probability, so that accurate game performance information can be output. On the other hand, since the information related to game performance information that is not affected by the probability is retained in the memory means, even if a cheater changes the probability to conceal the erasure of the cheating act, the cheating act can be reliably detected based on the game performance information retained in the memory means.

In the gaming machine O1,
The gaming machine O2 is characterized in that information regarding game performance information influenced by the probability is stored in a specified area of the storage means.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine O1, gaming machine O2 has the effect that information related to game performance information that is affected by probability is stored in a specified area of the storage means, so that when the probability is changed by the change means, the specified area of the storage means can be erased all at once, making it easy to erase information related to game performance information that is affected by probability.

A gaming area having a plurality of winning slots;
A launching means for launching a gaming medium into the gaming area;
a winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings, for detecting the winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
a payout means for, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shot means has won in any of the winning openings, paying out a predetermined number of game media to the winning opening in which the game medium has won;
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined judgment when a start condition is satisfied, and awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when the judgment is a predetermined result,
A storage means for storing information related to a plurality of pieces of game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed on the gaming machine;
an output means for outputting information relating to game performance information based on the information stored in the storage means;
a determination means for determining whether the determination is a specific result when the determination is not a predetermined result;
an opening means for opening one of the winning ports that is normally closed for a predetermined period of time without awarding the predetermined game value when the determination means determines that the judgment is the specific result;
A modification means for modifying the probability of the specific result occurring in the given judgment among a plurality of levels;
and a memory control means for erasing the information stored in the memory means when the probability is changed by the change means.

According to the gaming machine (1), a launching means launches gaming media into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning slots. Each winning slot is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the gaming media. When the winning detection means detects that the gaming media launched by the launching means has won one of the winning slots, a predetermined number of gaming media are paid out by the payout means to the winning slot in which the gaming media won. Information on a plurality of gaming performance information showing the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is stored in the storage means and output by the output means. This has the effect of making it possible to preferably discover fraudulent acts from the information on the gaming performance information output by the output means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined judgment when a starting condition is met, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player, and if the judgment is not a predetermined result, the specific judgment means judges whether the judgment is a specific result or not. If the determination means determines that the judgment is a specific result, a specified gaming value is not awarded, and one winning port that is normally closed is opened by the opening means for a specified time. If a gaming medium enters this opened winning port, the gaming medium is paid out by the payout means. In addition, the probability of a specific result being obtained in a specified judgment is changed among a plurality of levels by the change means. Then, when the change means changes the probability, the information stored in the storage means is erased by the storage control means. Therefore, the information regarding the gaming performance information is stored in the storage means at the newly set probability, which has the effect of allowing accurate gaming performance information to be output.

In the gaming machine C1,
The gaming machine (2) is characterized in that the gaming performance information is a base value.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine C1, gaming machine C2 has the effect of being able to output a highly accurate base value because the gaming performance information is a base value and the information on the base value is stored in the storage means at a newly set probability.

A gaming area having a plurality of winning slots;
A launching means for launching a gaming medium into the gaming area;
a winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings, for detecting the winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
a payout means for, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shot means has won in any of the winning openings, paying out a predetermined number of game media to the winning opening in which the game medium has won;
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined judgment when a start condition is satisfied, and awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when the judgment is a predetermined result,
A modification means for modifying the probability of a predetermined result occurring in the predetermined judgment among a plurality of levels;
and a display means for displaying the level of the probability,
The game machine 1 is characterized in that the display of the probability level on the display means is performed only when the power is turned on.

According to the gaming machine Ki1, a launching means launches gaming media into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning slots. Each winning slot is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the gaming media. When the winning detection means detects that the gaming media launched by the launching means has won one of the winning slots, a predetermined number of gaming media are paid out by a payout means to the winning slot in which the gaming media won. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined judgment when a starting condition is met, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player, and the probability of the predetermined result being obtained in the predetermined judgment is changed among a plurality of levels by a change means. The probability level is displayed on a display means. The display means displays the probability level only when the power is turned on. As a result, the probability level set in the gaming machine is not displayed unless the power is turned on, so it is difficult for the player to know the probability level set in the gaming machine, and there is an effect that it is possible to appropriately suppress fraudulent acts.

In the gaming machine Ki1,
The display means is provided on the rear side of the gaming machine.

In addition to the effects of Game Machine Ki1, Game Machine Ki2 has a display means provided on the rear side of the game machine, so the probability level displayed on the display means cannot be seen unless the door of the game machine is opened and the rear side of the game machine is exposed. This has the effect of making it more difficult for players to know the probability level set in the game machine.

In the game machine Ki2,
a door opening detection means for detecting that a locked door of the gaming machine has been unlocked and opened;
The display of the probability level on the display means is performed when the power is turned on, at least on the condition that the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door.

Gaming machine Ki3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine Ki2. That is, the door opening detection means detects that the door of the locked gaming machine has been unlocked and opened. Then, when the power is turned on, the display means displays the probability level on the condition that at least the door opening detection means detects that the door has been opened. Since the door is usually unlocked with a key managed by the hall, this has the effect of making it more difficult for players to know the probability level set in the gaming machine.

(Challenge 5)
The gaming machines K1 to K3, K1 to K6, and K1 to K5 shown below have been made to solve the following problems.

There are conventional gaming machines in which gaming media are fired by a firing means into a gaming area provided with multiple winning slots, and when the gaming media lands in one of the winning slots, a predetermined number of gaming media is paid out to the player for the winning slot. (For example, see JP 2003-340046 A.)

There is a demand for changing the probability of winning in such games. However, there has been insufficient support for changing the probability of winning in this way.

This technical idea was conceived in light of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can optimally change the probability.

(Means and Effects 5)
a gaming area having a plurality of winning slots;
A launching means for launching a gaming medium into the gaming area;
a winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings, for detecting the winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
a payout means for, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shot means has won in any of the winning openings, paying out a predetermined number of game media to the winning opening in which the game medium has won;
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined judgment when a start condition is satisfied, and awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when the judgment is a predetermined result,
A modification means for modifying the probability of a predetermined result occurring in the predetermined judgment among a plurality of levels;
A storage means for storing information used for controlling a game and capable of retaining the information even when the power is turned off;
an information erasure instruction means for instructing erasure of the information stored in the storage means;
an authorization means for authorizing a change or confirmation of the level of the probability by being set in a predetermined state;
a first mode startup means for starting up in a first mode that allows the probability level to be changed by the change means when the power is turned on with the permission means being in a predetermined state and the information deletion instruction means issuing an instruction to delete the information;
a second mode start-up means for starting up in a second mode that enables confirmation of the probability level when the power is turned on with the permission means being in a predetermined state and no instruction to erase the information being given by the information erasure instruction means; and a third mode start-up means for starting up in a third mode that erases the information stored in the storage means when the power is turned on with the permission means not in the predetermined state and an instruction to erase the information being given by the information erasure instruction means.
and a fourth mode start-up means for starting up in a fourth mode which performs normal start-up when the power is turned on in a state where the permission means is not in a specified state and the information erasure instruction means has not instructed the erasure of the information.

According to the gaming machine K1, a launching means launches gaming media into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning slots. Each winning slot is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the gaming media. When the winning detection means detects that the gaming media launched by the launching means has won one of the winning slots, a predetermined number of gaming media are paid out by a payout means to the winning slot in which the gaming media won. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined judgment when a starting condition is met, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player, and the probability of the predetermined result being obtained in the predetermined judgment is changed among a plurality of levels by a change means. In addition, information used for controlling the game is stored in a storage means, and the information can be held even while the power is cut off. An information erasure command means for commanding the erasure of the information stored in the storage means, and a permission means for changing the probability level or allowing the probability by being in a predetermined state are provided. Then, when the permission means is in a predetermined state and the information erasure instruction means has instructed the information erasure, the first mode startup means starts the game in a first mode that allows the probability level to be changed by the change means. When the permission means is in a predetermined state and the information erasure instruction means has not instructed the information erasure, the second mode startup means starts the game in a second mode that allows the probability level to be confirmed. When the permission means is not in a predetermined state and the information erasure instruction means has instructed the information erasure, the third mode startup means starts the game in a third mode that erases the information stored in the storage means. When the permission means is not in a predetermined state and the information erasure instruction means has not instructed the information erasure, the fourth mode startup means starts the game in a fourth mode that performs normal startup. This has the effect of making it possible to easily set startup modes, including modes in which the probability level can be changed or confirmed, by combining the operations of the information erasure instruction means and the permission means. This has the effect of providing a gaming machine that allows the probability to be suitably changed.

In the gaming machine K1,
a door opening detection means for detecting that a locked door of the gaming machine has been unlocked and opened;
the first mode start-up means, when the door opening detection means detects that the door is opened, the permission means is set to a predetermined state, and the information erasure instruction means issues an instruction to erase the information, starts up the device in a first mode that allows the probability level to be changed by the change means,
The second mode startup means is characterized in that, when the door opening detection means detects that the door has been opened, the permission means is set to a predetermined state, and the power is turned on without the information erasure instruction means giving an instruction to erase the information, the second mode startup means starts up in a second mode which enables the probability level to be confirmed.

(Action and Effect)
According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the power is turned on in a state where the door opening detection means detects that the door is opened, the permission means is set to a predetermined state, and the information erasure instruction means has instructed to erase information, the first mode start-up means starts up in a first mode that allows the probability level to be changed by the change means. Also, when the door opening detection means detects that the door is opened, the permission means is set to a predetermined state, and the information erasure instruction means has not instructed to erase information, the second mode start-up means starts up in a second mode that allows the probability level to be confirmed. This has the effect of making it difficult for a player to change or confirm the probability level, since the probability level cannot be changed or confirmed unless the door is opened.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2,
The permission means is constituted by a key, and the predetermined state is a state in which the key is rotated to a predetermined position.

Gaming machine K3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines K1 and K2. That is, the permission means is configured with a key, and the predetermined state is a state in which it is rotated to a predetermined position by the key. Therefore, when starting up in the first mode or the second mode, it is necessary to rotate the permission means to a predetermined position by the key. Since the key is managed by the hall, it has the effect of making it difficult for players to change or check the probability level.

A gaming area having a plurality of winning slots;
A launching means for launching a gaming medium into the gaming area;
a winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings, for detecting the winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
a payout means for, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shot means has won in any of the winning openings, paying out a predetermined number of game media to the winning opening in which the game medium has won;
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined judgment when a start condition is satisfied, and awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when the judgment is a predetermined result,
A modification means for modifying the probability of a predetermined result occurring in the predetermined judgment among a plurality of levels;
a confirmation means for confirming whether the level of the probability is normal or not at each predetermined timing;
The gaming machine (1) is characterized by comprising: a process execution means for executing a predetermined process when the confirmation means confirms that the probability level is not normal.

According to the gaming machine (1), a launching means launches gaming media into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning slots. Each winning slot is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the gaming media. When the winning detection means detects that the gaming media launched by the launching means has won one of the winning slots, a predetermined number of gaming media are paid out by a payout means to the winning slot in which the gaming media won. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined judgment when a starting condition is met, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player, and the probability of the predetermined result being obtained in the predetermined judgment is changed among a plurality of levels by a change means. In addition, the confirmation means checks whether the probability level is normal each time a predetermined timing arrives, and if it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, a predetermined process is executed by a process execution means. As a result, if the probability level is destroyed for some reason during a game, it can be discovered early and some kind of response can be taken. This has the effect of providing a gaming machine that can appropriately change the probability.

In the gaming machine 1,
The predetermined timing is the passage of a predetermined time.

Gaming machine K2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine K1. That is, the confirmation means checks whether the probability level is normal or not every time a predetermined time has elapsed. Therefore, if the probability level is destroyed for some reason during play, this can be reliably detected.

In the gaming machine 1,
The predetermined timing is the start of dynamic display of identification information, which is executed in response to the establishment of the start condition.

Gaming machine K3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine K1. That is, the confirmation means checks whether the probability level is normal or not each time the dynamic display of the identification information starts. Therefore, if the probability level is destroyed for some reason during play, this can be reliably discovered before the dynamic display of the identification information starts.

In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3),
The predetermined process includes a process for notifying a player that the probability level is abnormal.

Gaming machine Ke4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines Ke1 to Ke3. That is, if it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, a notification is given to the effect that the probability level is abnormal, so that the player and the hall can immediately grasp the condition.

In any one of gaming machines (1) to (4),
The predetermined process includes a process for stopping a game.

Gaming machine Ke5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines Ke1 to Ke4. That is, if it is determined that the probability level is not normal, the game is stopped, which has the effect of preventing players from suffering disadvantages by playing at an abnormal probability level.

In any one of gaming machines (1) to (5),
The predetermined process includes a process for changing the probability level by the change means.

Gaming machine Ke6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines Ke1 to Ke5. That is, if it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the probability level can be changed by the changing means, so that it is possible to return to playing at a normal probability level.

A gaming area having a plurality of winning slots;
A launching means for launching a gaming medium into the gaming area;
a winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings, for detecting the winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
a payout means for, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shot means has won in any of the winning openings, paying out a predetermined number of game media to the winning opening in which the game medium has won;
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined judgment when a start condition is satisfied, and awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when the judgment is a predetermined result,
A modification means for modifying the probability of a predetermined result occurring in the predetermined judgment among a plurality of levels;
A verification means for verifying whether the level of the probability is normal or not during a start-up process executed when the power is turned on;
and a process execution means for executing a predetermined process when the confirmation means confirms that the probability level is not normal.

According to the gaming machine Co1, a launching means launches gaming media into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning slots. Each winning slot is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the gaming media. When the winning detection means detects that the gaming media launched by the launching means has won one of the winning slots, a predetermined number of gaming media are paid out by a payout means to the winning slot in which the gaming media won. In addition, this gaming machine performs a predetermined judgment when a starting condition is met, and if the judgment is a predetermined result, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player, and the probability of the predetermined result being obtained in the predetermined judgment is changed among a plurality of levels by a change means. Then, in the start-up process executed when the power is turned on, a confirmation means checks whether the probability level is normal, and if it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, a predetermined process is executed by a process execution means. As a result, if the probability level has been destroyed when the power is turned on, it can be reliably discovered and some kind of response can be taken. This has the effect of providing a gaming machine that can optimally change the probability.

In the gaming machine Co1,
The predetermined process includes a process for notifying the player that the probability level is abnormal.

In addition to the effects of the first game machine, the second game machine has the following effect. That is, if it is determined that the probability level is not normal, a notification is given to the effect that the probability level is abnormal, so that the player and the hall can immediately grasp the condition.

In the gaming machine Co1 or Co2,
The predetermined process includes an infinite loop process.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C1 and C2, gaming machine C3 has the following effect. That is, if it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, an infinite loop is performed, so that the start-up process ends with the probability level remaining abnormal, and it is possible to prevent playing from being performed.

In any one of the gaming machines Co1 to Co3,
The predetermined process includes a process for causing the change means to change the probability level.

Gaming machine Co4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines Co1 to Co3. That is, if it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the probability level can be changed by the changing means, so that the start-up process can be completed at a normal probability level.

In any one of the gaming machines Co1 to Co3,
The predetermined process includes a process for setting the level of the probability to one of normal levels.

Gaming machine Co5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines Co1 to Co3. That is, if it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the probability level is set to one of the normal levels, so that the start-up process can be completed at the normal probability level.

Gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that in any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, U1 to U5, D1 to D3, O1, O2, Ka1, Ka2, Ki1 to Ki3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, and Ko1 to Ko5, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, and equipped with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever) and stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and requiring that the definitive identification information at the time of stopping be a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of gaming media include coins, medals, etc.

Gaming machine Y2 is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, U1 to U5, D1 to D3, O1, O2, Ka1, Ka2, Ki1 to Ki3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, and Ko1 to Ko5. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine includes an operating handle, which launches balls into a predetermined play area in response to operation of the operating handle, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port located at a predetermined position in the play area. Also, when a special play state occurs, a variable winning device (big winning port) located at a predetermined position in the play area opens in a predetermined manner, allowing balls to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) is awarded according to the number of winning balls.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, B1 to B7, U1 to U5, D1 to D3, O1, O2, Ka1, Ka2, Ki1 to Ki3, Ku1 to Ku3, Ke1 to Ke6, and Ko1 to Ko5, the gaming machine Y3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a gaming machine equipped with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, in which the variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information as a necessary condition, the gaming machine uses balls as a gaming medium, and is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of the identification information and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state is generated."

The "balls" described in each of the above embodiments correspond to the "game media" in the claims, the "game feature ratio" described in each of the above embodiments corresponds to the "ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a win at the first winning slot to the number of game media paid out by the payout means" in the claims, and the "sequential game feature ratio" described in each of the above embodiments corresponds to the "ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a win at the second winning slot to the number of game media paid out by the payout means" in the claims.

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
63a First regular prize slot (prize slot)
63b 2nd regular prize slot (prize slot)
64a First starting hole (winning hole, first winning hole)
64b Second starting hole (winning hole, first winning hole)
65a Main prize slot (prize slot, first prize slot, second prize slot)
100: Board box 110: Main control device (main control means, display control means)
111 Dispensing control device (dispensing means)
112a Ball launching unit (launching means)
122 RAM erase switch (predetermined operation means, information erase instruction means)
200 Register 201 MPU (calculation means)
202e Number of prize balls table (payout information storage means)
202f trigger information data (predetermined trigger information storage means)
203l real-time base value data (part of the game performance information storage means, 0th storage area)
203m Previous base value data (part of the game performance information storage means, first storage area)
203n: Base value data from the previous game (part of the game performance information storage means, second storage area)
203o Base value data from the game before last (part of the game performance information storage means)
203p New start-up flag (new start-up identification means)
203x Area in use (first storage means)
203x1 Outside work area (first work area)
203x2 outer stack area (first stack area)
203y Outside use area (second storage means)
203y1 Outer work area (work area, second work area)
203y2 outer stack area (stack area, second stack area)
203r Base value data (storage means)
203s Data for role ratio (storage means)
203t Error data (error history storage means)
207 Role ratio management chip (microchip)
207a Inspection terminal (external device connection means)
208a First start switch (winning detection means)
208b Second start switch (winning detection means)
208c First normal winning port switch (winning detection means)
208d Second normal winning port switch (winning detection means)
208e Large prize opening switch (prize detection means)
261 CPU (external device connection detection means, second calculation means, ratio calculation means)
263 First reading memory (second storage means)
264 Second reading memory (storage means, third storage means)
267 Capacitor (power supply means)
300 Inspection device (external device)
401 Base display device (game performance information display means, output means)
401a, 401b 7-segment display (segment display, second display means)
401c, 401d 7-segment display (segment display, first display means)
501 Setting key (permission means)
502 Error display button (error history display receiving means)
S152 (Payout amount setting means)
S717 (Power interruption detection means)
S728 (Second memory control means)
S729 (Determination means)
S740, S741 (Memory control means, ratio calculation means)
S723 (Third memory control means)
S761 (Memory control means)
S751 to S754, S771, S772 (output means)
S2022 (evacuation means)
S2024 (Stack pointer setting means)
S2025 (Return means)
S2031 (First fixed value storage means)
S2041 (Second fixed value storage means)
S3007 (Confirmation display means)
S3008 (Stopping means)
S3208 (game performance information acquisition means, shift processing means)
S3302 (special display mode display means)
S4004: Yes (first mode start-up means)
S4004: No (third mode start-up means)
S4011: Yes (second mode start-up means)
S4011: No (fourth mode start-up means)
S4005 (changing means)

Claims (1)

A gaming area having a plurality of winning slots;
A launching means for launching a gaming medium into the gaming area;
a winning detection means provided for each of the winning openings, for detecting the winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
a payout means for, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shot means has won in any of the winning openings, paying out a predetermined number of game media to the winning opening in which the game medium has won;
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined judgment when a start condition is satisfied, and awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when the judgment is a predetermined result,
A storage means for storing information related to a plurality of pieces of game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed on the gaming machine;
an output means for outputting information relating to game performance information based on the information stored in the storage means;
a determination means for determining whether the determination is a specific result when the determination is not a predetermined result;
an opening means for opening one of the winning ports that is normally closed for a predetermined period of time without awarding the predetermined game value when the determination means determines that the judgment is the specific result;
A modification means for modifying the probability of the specific result occurring in the given judgment among a plurality of levels;
A gaming machine comprising: a memory control means for erasing information stored in the memory means when the probability is changed by the change means.

Images